JP7145405B2 - Game information display device and game arcade system - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a system for amusement arcades provided with technology for wirelessly transporting game data or data relating to valuable values in a game machine or incidental equipment in a game arcade.

In amusement arcades, sales information is managed by a hall computer system in order to ascertain sales and game machine conditions, which are important in operating amusement arcades, on installed game machines or incidental equipment. In recent years, a face image of a player playing a game is captured by a camera and used as authentication information, and the authentication information is also transferred as data to a hall computer system or the like.

For example, the player authentication system of Patent Literature 1 receives imaging data of a player playing a game on a gaming machine installed in a game arcade, and selects an authentication target to be authenticated from the received imaging data. an image data receiving means for receiving image data obtained by imaging a player playing a game in a game machine from an image pickup device provided in a call lamp; Authentication target data extracting means for extracting authentication target data to be authenticated from imaging data, and authentication target data output means for outputting the extracted authentication target data to an image processing apparatus for executing authentication processing. and the authentication object data output means outputs the authentication object data at a predetermined timing according to the game state of the gaming machine.

JP 2015-167712 A

However, in the conventional system, the image data for authentication together with the data related to the game machine is sent from the game area of the game hall to the game machine and the data from the incidental equipment such as the camera image. had to be wired over a long distance to the management area where the system was installed. In addition, many wires must be laid in the island facility or on the ceiling above the island facility. Since these wirings are made of copper wires or the like, they are thick and heavy, requiring a great deal of labor for laying them. In addition, once the wiring has been laid, it is extremely difficult to add wiring, etc., because the wiring must be passed through the laid gaps.

In order to solve such problems, the present invention provides a system for amusement arcades, which does not require wiring and can be easily expanded, etc., for conveying data of game machines and incidental equipment wirelessly. intended to provide

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention employs the following means.
A game hall system used in a game hall where a game machine is installed, wherein at least game information relating to a game obtained from the game machine is collected, and a game information analysis means and an encryption means are provided for analyzing the game information. a game information communication means for transmitting the game information by a wireless communication means with a Data transmission means provided with transmission setting means for collecting the other game information including the count data and setting the game information to be transmitted to the game information analysis means when the count data reaches a predetermined number. and transmission/reception means connected to the data transmission means and the wireless communication means for transmitting the game information to the game information analysis means.

The effect of the present invention is that by transmitting data based on the number of game media inserted into the game machine, the conversion of the data becomes easier and the introduction to other machines becomes smoother. In addition, since the operating status of a gaming machine is often determined by whether or not there is a game medium inserted into the gaming machine, by setting the setting criteria for transmitting the game medium inserted into the gaming machine, the It becomes extremely easy to check the operating status of the machine. The trouble of laying wiring in the island equipment is eliminated, and at the same time, the influence of the noise due to the transportation of the pachinko balls and the radio noise from the pachinko machine P on errors and the risk of electric leakage are reduced. In addition, the security function has been strengthened, so it is possible to deal with eavesdropping and the like. When the data transmission means is added, it can be done by a simple work of completing the transmission/reception means and the link connection, so there is no need to install wiring.

FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing part of a game arcade. FIG. 2 is a configuration diagram of a game arcade. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the flow of data on the game arcade network. FIG. 4 is a configuration diagram of main software. FIG. 5 is a transition diagram of interface screens of the management tool. FIG. 6 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 7 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 8 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 9 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 10 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 11 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 12 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 13 is an interface screen of the management tool. FIG. 14 is a transition diagram of the interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 15 shows an interface screen of the operating terminal. FIG. 16 shows an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 17 shows an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 18 shows an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 19 shows an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 20 shows an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 21 shows an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 22 shows an interface screen of the operation terminal. FIG. 23 is a transition diagram of interface screens of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 24 shows an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 25 shows an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 26 shows an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 27 shows an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 28 shows an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 29 shows an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 30 shows an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 31 shows an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 32 shows an interface screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 33 is a sequence diagram of individual call processing. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of individual call processing. FIG. 35 is a sequence diagram of group call processing. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of group call processing. FIG. 37 is a sequence diagram of summoning call processing. FIG. 38 is a flow chart of summoning call processing. FIG. 39 is a sequence diagram of alarm information distribution processing. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of alarm information distribution processing. FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram of an alarm information database. FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram of a database of alarm information. FIG. 43 is a sequence diagram of alarm information audio distribution processing. FIG. 44 is a flow chart of alarm information audio distribution processing. FIG. 45 is a sequence diagram for opening and closing the game machine. FIG. 46 is a flow chart of opening/closing processing of the gaming machine. FIG. 47 is a flow chart of door open signal processing. FIG. 48 is a sequence diagram of the caution required person notification process. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the caution required person notification process. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of face authentication matching processing. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram of an example of data to be transmitted to the face authentication server. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram of an example of data indicating a matching result from the face authentication server. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 54 is an overall configuration diagram of a game arcade system connected to the Internet network. FIG. 55 is a sequence diagram of the group code creation processing of the system for specifying a goto group. FIG. 56 is a flow chart of the group code creation processing of the system for specifying a goto group. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram of an image capture of a system for identifying gotgroups. FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram of an image capture of a system for identifying gotgroups. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram of each server in the system for specifying a goto group. FIG. 60 is a conceptual diagram of a system for identifying gotgroups. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram of an example of group code data. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of face authentication number and pseudo data. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the screen of the mobile terminal device. FIG. 66 is a flow chart of extraction processing of the system for specifying a god group. FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram of a ball lending machine used in the game arcade system. FIG. 68 is a configuration diagram of equipment connected to the main CPU of the ball lending machine. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing the liquid crystal operation unit of the ball lending machine. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing the liquid crystal operation unit of the ball lending machine. FIG. 71 is a configuration diagram of a membership card. FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing a network of face authentication devices in a game arcade system. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing the data structure of the face authentication server and the individual face authentication server. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of main processing. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of member processing. FIG. 76 is a flow chart of non-member processing. FIG. 77 is a flow chart of non-member processing. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of common processing. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of recorded data capture processing. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of face authentication matching processing. FIG. 81 is a time chart of recorded data capture images. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of face authentication server matching processing. FIG. 83 is a flow chart of leaving processing. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of abnormality processing. FIG. 85 is a flow chart of the personal identification number registration process. FIG. 86 is a sequence diagram showing processing when a member takes a seat. FIG. 87 is a sequence diagram showing processing when a non-member takes a seat. FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram of a capture image instruction list. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of inputting a personal identification number. FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram of the input state of the personal identification number viewed from above. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing items determined by the face recognition engine installed in the individual face recognition device. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram of a form output from the hall computer. FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram of a form output from the face authentication server. FIG. 94 is a flow chart of application scrap registration processing for registering scraps by application software installed in the personal portable terminal. FIG. 95 is a flow chart of the ball lending machine registration process for registering the odd ball by the ball lending machine. FIG. 96 is a flow chart of a scrap server registration process for registering a scrap by a scrap server. FIG. 97 is a sequence diagram of the process of registering a ball. FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram for registering the edge ball. FIG. 99 is a flow chart of the application odds payout process when the odds are paid out by the application software installed in the personal portable terminal. FIG. 100 is a flow chart of the edge ball server payout process by the edge ball server. FIG. 101 is a flow chart of the edge ball server payout process by the edge ball server. FIG. 102 is a flowchart of ball lending machine payout processing by the ball lending machine. FIG. 103 is a sequence diagram of the process of paying out the odd ball. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram for paying out the odd ball. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of special code creation processing when creating a special code. FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data saved in the odd ball server. FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram of an example of data stored in the odd ball server. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display displayed when accessing the oddball server displayed on the personal portable terminal. FIG. 109 is a payout chart showing changes in the difference in the number of balls in the gaming machine and the change in the number of balls in each player's possession. FIG. 110 is an individual income and expenditure slip of an individual using an individual face authentication device. FIG. 111 is an analysis form for each game machine of the game machine, which is aggregated for each individual using the individual face authentication device. FIG. 112 is a correction value form for each balance using the individual face authentication device. FIG. 113 is an analysis form for each gaming machine that is aggregated for each individual using the individual face authentication device and analyzed based on the correction value. FIG. 114 is a schematic diagram of the arrangement of surveillance cameras during operation in the intruder surveillance system. FIG. 115 is a schematic diagram of the arrangement of surveillance cameras in the intruder surveillance system in which the intrusion surveillance system is in operation. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing an imaging position list showing the positions where the surveillance camera in the intruder surveillance system takes an image. FIG. 117 is a schematic diagram showing a monitor connected to a surveillance camera system in an intruder surveillance system. FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram showing a recording area of a recording device provided in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 119 shows a system diagram of power supply lines for game machines and equipment. FIG. 120 shows a control mode transition diagram in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 121 is a flow chart of night monitoring mode processing in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 122 is a flow chart of playback mode processing in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 123 is a schematic diagram showing transition of the focal position of each camera in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 124 is a conceptual diagram showing how the intrusion monitoring system captures an intruder. FIG. 125 is a conceptual diagram showing how the intrusion monitoring system captures an intruder. FIG. 126 is a flowchart of night monitoring mode 2 processing in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 127 shows a system diagram of power supply lines for game machines and island facilities. FIG. 128 is a schematic diagram showing how a recorded image is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen of the machine information display device in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 129 shows a block diagram of a nighttime monitoring system in an intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 130 is a conceptual diagram showing how the nighttime monitoring system in the intrusion monitoring system captures an intruder. FIG. 131 is a time chart regarding recording of each camera of the night surveillance system in the intrusion surveillance system. FIG. 132 is a flowchart of power failure processing in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 133 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged plan view of a part of each camera in the disablement detection system. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram for each item of the blackout detection method. FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram of a blackout detection method. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram of a blackout detection method. FIG. 137 is a schematic diagram showing an enlarged plan view of a portion of the island facility in the disablement detection system. FIG. 138 is a flow chart of blackout detection processing in the disablement detection system. FIG. 139 is a flowchart of blindfold countermeasure processing in the disablement detection system. FIG. 140 is a sequence diagram in the disablement detection system. FIG. 141 is a time chart of each camera in the disablement detection system. FIG. 142 is a time chart in the disablement detection system. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram showing the layout of each island facility installed in the game arcade in plan and side view. FIG. 144 is a schematic side view of part of the inside of the island facility. FIG. 145 is a schematic perspective view of each device installed in the island facility. FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of storage of game media stored in the game media storage tank installed in the island facility. FIG. 147 is a perspective view of a part of the shelf board for collecting game media as seen from the back side. FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the entire shelf board for collecting game media, viewed from the back. FIG. 149 is a schematic side view showing how game media are collected by the shelf board. FIG. 150 is a perspective view of a part of the game medium storage tank cut away and a part of the modification of the shelf board viewed from the back side. FIG. 151 is a perspective view of a part of a modified shelf board for collecting game media, viewed from the back. FIG. 152 is a schematic side view of part of a modification of the shelf board. FIG. 153 is a perspective view showing the upper tank installed in the island facility. FIG. 154 is a perspective view showing the inside of the shutter section. FIG. 155 is a schematic side view showing how the shutter section is opened and closed. FIG. 156 is a block diagram showing how devices for controlling shutter units installed in a plurality of island facilities are connected. FIG. 157 is a block diagram showing the connections of devices that control the shutter section. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing shutter opening/closing processing. FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing the storage state of game media stored in the game media storage tanks installed in each island facility. FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing the storage tank averaging process. FIG. 161 is a flow chart showing the shutter processing for ball transport. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing closing processing mode processing. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing sensor position setting processing. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing sensor position setting processing. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing sensor position setting processing. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing initialization processing. FIG. 167 is a schematic bottom view of the movement of the sensor installed on the shelf board. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing ball clogging detection processing. FIG. 169 is a flow chart showing ball clogging abnormality processing. FIG. 170 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which foreign matter is mixed in the shelf board. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram showing the state when the shelf is activated. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram showing the state when the shelf is activated. FIG. 173 is a perspective view showing a modified sensor and vibration device installed on a shelf. FIG. 174 is a perspective view showing the inside of a modified vibrating device installed on a shelf. FIG. 175 is a schematic side view showing part of the inside of the island facility of another modification. FIG. 176 is a schematic side view showing part of the inside of the island facility of another modification. FIG. 177 is a schematic diagram showing an end face of the machine information display device and the pachinko machine of Modification 1 viewed from the side with the island facility cut away. 178 is a front perspective view of the platform information display device of Modification 1. FIG. 179 is a perspective view of the platform information display device of Modification 1 as seen from the back side. FIG. 180 is a schematic front view of a state in which information is displayed by the platform information display device of Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 181 is a schematic side view showing a closed state of the table information display device of Modification 1 attached to the island facility. FIG. 182 is a schematic side view showing a state in which the platform information display device of Modification 1 attached to the island facility is open. FIG. 183 is a perspective view showing from above a state in which the platform information display device of Modification 1 attached to the island facility is open. 184 is a front perspective view of a call lamp unit attached to the platform information display device of Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 185 is a perspective view showing the call lamp portion attached to the platform information display device of Modification 1 from the back side. 186 is an explanatory diagram showing a cut end face of a call lamp portion attached to the platform information display device of Modification 1. FIG. 187 is a perspective view of the platform information display device of Modification 2 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 188 is a front view of the machine information display device and part of the pachinko machine of Modification 2 as seen from the front side. FIG. FIG. 189 is a front view showing a state in which a plurality of platform information display devices of Modification 1 are arranged in an island facility to display information. FIG. 190 is a front view showing a state in which a plurality of table information display devices of Modification 1 are arranged in an island facility to display information. FIG. 191 is a front view showing a state in which information is displayed by arranging a plurality of table information display devices of Modification 1 on the island facility. FIG. 192 is a front view showing a state in which a plurality of table information display devices of Modification 1 are arranged in an island facility to display information. FIG. 193 is a front view showing a state in which a plurality of platform information display devices of Modification 1 are arranged in an island facility to display information. 194 is an explanatory diagram showing how information is displayed on the liquid crystal display section of the machine information display device of Modification 1. FIG. 195 is an explanatory diagram showing how information is displayed on the liquid crystal display section of the machine information display device of Modification 1. FIG. 196 is an explanatory diagram showing how information is displayed on the liquid crystal display section of the machine information display device of Modification 1. FIG. 197 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the platform information display device of Modification 1. FIG. 198 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of machine information display data used when controlling the machine information display device of Modification 1. FIG. 199 is a sequence diagram for controlling the machine information display device of Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing manual display processing when controlling the machine information display device of Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing manual transmission processing when controlling the machine information display device of Modification 1. FIG. 202 is an explanatory diagram showing how information is displayed on the liquid crystal display of the machine information display device of Modification 1. FIG. 202 is an explanatory diagram showing how information is displayed on the liquid crystal display of the machine information display device of Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 204 is a front view and rear view showing Modification 3 of the calling lamp portion. 205 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit of Modification 1 is attached to the ball lending machine. FIG. 206 is a perspective view showing a counting unit of Modification 1. FIG. 207 is a perspective view showing a counting unit of Modification 1. FIG. 208 is a side view showing a counting unit of Modification 1. FIG. 209 is a plan view showing a counting unit of Modification 1. FIG. 210 is a cross-sectional view showing a counting unit of Modification 1. FIG. 211 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit of Modification 2 is attached to the ball lending machine. FIG. 212 is a perspective view showing a counting unit of modification 2. FIG. 213 is a perspective view of a counting unit according to modification 2. FIG. 214 is a side view showing a counting unit of modification 2. FIG. 215 is a plan view showing a counting unit of modification 2. FIG. 216 is a cross-sectional view showing a counting unit of Modification 2. FIG. 217 is a perspective view showing a lock mechanism of the counting unit of Modification 2. FIG. 218 is a cross-sectional view showing a lock mechanism of a counting unit of modification 2. FIG. 219 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit of Modification 3 is attached to a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. 220 is an enlarged perspective view of the counting unit of Modification 3 attached to the pachinko machine. 221 is a perspective view showing a counting unit of Modification 3. FIG. 222 is a perspective view showing a disassembled counting unit of Modification 3. FIG. 223 is a perspective view showing a counting unit of Modification 3. FIG. 224 is a plan view showing a counting unit of Modification 3. FIG. 225 is a cross-sectional view and an end view showing a counting unit of Modification 3. FIG. FIG. 226 is a cross-sectional view showing an accommodating portion of the counting unit of the modified example. FIG. 227 is a cross-sectional view showing an accommodating portion of a counting unit of a modified example. FIG. 228 is a plan view showing an accommodating portion of the counting unit of the modified example. FIG. 229 is a plan view showing how pachinko balls roll in the accommodating portion of the counting unit of the modification. 230 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit of Modification 4 is attached to the ball lending machine. FIG. 231 is a plan view showing a counting unit of modification 4. FIG. 232 is a perspective view showing a counting unit of Modification 4. FIG. FIG. 233 is a perspective view showing a partly cut counting unit of Modified Example 4. FIG. 234 is a perspective view showing an enlarged part of the counting unit of Modification 4. FIG. 235 is a perspective view showing how pachinko balls are returned by enlarging a portion of the counting unit of Modification 4. FIG. 236 is a perspective view showing how pachinko balls are returned by enlarging a portion of the counting unit of Modification 4. FIG. 237 is a side view of the counting unit of Modification 4 showing how pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 238 is a side view of the counting unit of Modification 4 showing how pachinko balls are returned. FIG. FIG. 239 is a partially cut perspective view of the counting unit of Modification 4 showing how pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 240 is a partially cut perspective view of the counting unit of Modification 4 showing how pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 241 is a partially cut perspective view of the counting unit of Modification 4 showing how pachinko balls are returned. 242 is a flowchart showing individual count return processing in the counting unit of Modification 4. FIG. 243 is a schematic diagram showing a switching state of passages in the counting unit of Modification 4. FIG. 244 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit of Modification 5 is attached to the ball lending machine. FIG. 245 is a perspective view showing a counting unit of modification 5. FIG. 246 is a plan view showing a counting unit of modification 5. FIG. 247 is a perspective view showing how pachinko balls are returned by enlarging a portion of the counting unit of Modification 5. FIG. 248 is a perspective view showing how pachinko balls are returned by enlarging a portion of the counting unit of Modification 5. FIG. 249 is a perspective view showing how pachinko balls are returned by enlarging a part of the counting unit of Modification 5. FIG. FIG. 250 is a partially cut perspective view of the counting unit of Modified Example 5 showing how pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 251 is a partially cut perspective view of the counting unit of Modified Example 5 showing how pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 252 is a partially cut perspective view of the counting unit of Modified Example 5 showing how pachinko balls are returned. FIG. 253 is a partially cut perspective view of the counting unit of Modified Example 5 showing how pachinko balls are returned. 254 is a flowchart showing return tray return processing in the counting unit of Modification 5. FIG. FIG. 255 is a schematic diagram showing the movement of pachinko balls inside the ball lending machine. FIG. 256 is a block diagram showing transmission and reception of data between devices in a wireless game arcade. FIG. 257 is a block diagram of first communication showing transmission and reception of data between devices of the game arcade system. FIG. 258 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the machine information display device of the game arcade system. FIG. 259 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the receiving device of the game arcade system. FIG. 260 is a block diagram showing transmission and reception of data within the island facilities of the system for game arcades. FIG. 261 is a block diagram of first communication showing transmission and reception of data between devices of the game arcade system. FIG. 262 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of data transmitted and received between the devices of the game arcade system. FIG. 263 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data transmitted and received by the game arcade system. FIG. 264 is a sequence diagram for initial registration between devices of the game arcade system. FIG. 265 is a sequence diagram showing a standby state between devices of the game arcade system. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing game data communication main processing of the game arcade system. FIG. 267 is a flow chart showing emergency communication data processing of the game arcade system. FIG. 268 is a flow chart showing first communication data transmission processing of the game arcade system. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing second communication data transmission processing of the game arcade system. FIG. 270 is a sequence diagram showing data communication processing between devices of the game arcade system. FIG. 271 is a sequence diagram showing emergency data communication processing between devices of the game arcade system. FIG. 272 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data transmitted and received by the modified example of the game arcade system. FIG. 273 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each device for transmitting and receiving call data of the game arcade system. FIG. 274 is a block diagram showing transmission and reception of call data between devices of the game arcade system. FIG. 275 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration between devices of the game arcade system. FIG. 276 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each device for transmitting and receiving call data of the game arcade system. FIG. 277 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each device for transmitting and receiving call data of the game arcade system. FIG. 278 is a sequence diagram showing call data communication processing between devices of the game arcade system. FIG. 279 is an explanatory diagram showing the rewriting state of the inserted amount of the game arcade system. FIG. 280 is a sequence diagram showing processing for rewriting the inserted amount of the game arcade system. FIG. 281 is a flow chart showing the input amount rewriting main process of the game arcade system. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing each-machine camera determination processing of the game arcade system. FIG. 283 is a flow chart showing money amount rewriting processing of the game arcade system. FIG. 284 is a flow chart showing guest card balance face authentication processing of the game arcade system. FIG. 285 is an explanatory diagram showing the layout of the equipment installed in the game hall and the radio wave intensity of the game hall system. FIG. 286 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged part of the layout of the equipment installed in the game hall of the game hall system. FIG. 287 is a table showing the relationship between the radio wave intensity and the distance of the game arcade system. FIG. 288 is a perspective view showing the ball box of the game arcade system and the ball box placing table incorporating the function of charging the ball box. FIG. 289 is a perspective view showing a ball box of the game arcade system. FIG. 290 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which pachinko balls are transferred from the ball box of the game arcade system. FIG. 291 is a schematic diagram showing the appearance of the pachinko ball box when the pachinko balls are transferred from the ball box of the game arcade system. FIG. 292 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ball box of the game arcade system. FIG. 293 is a block diagram showing the structure of the ball box of the game arcade system. FIG. 294 is a list of data used in the ball box management system of the game arcade system. FIG. 295 is a chart showing the contents of detection of the state of the ball box of the game arcade system. FIG. 296 is a sequence diagram showing control of the ball box management system of the game arcade system. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing ball box management control processing of the game arcade system. FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing ball box monitoring control processing of the game arcade system. FIG. 299 is a block diagram showing the configuration of an information collection system for collecting game information to be displayed on the machine information display device. FIG. 300 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode list showing an example of the relationship between the display mode displayed on the machine information display device and the model type of the gaming machine. FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing display mode switching processing. FIG. 302 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display content list showing display modes and display content on the machine information display device. FIG. 303 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a signal of gaming machine information output from the information terminal board of the gaming machine. FIG. 304 is a time chart showing signal processing of gaming machine information in the machine information display device. FIG. 305 is a flow chart showing a ball payout speed display control process for controlling the display of information about the ball payout speed on the machine information display device. FIG. 306 is a flow chart showing a ball payout speed display process for controlling the display of information on the ball payout speed on the machine information display device. FIG. 307 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mode displayed on the table information display device. FIG. 308 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mode displayed on the machine information display device. FIG. 309 is a schematic diagram showing an example of gaming machine information signals output from the information terminal board of the gaming machine. FIG. 310 is a time chart showing signal processing of gaming machine information in the machine information display device. FIG. 311 is a flow chart showing the number-of-starts non-display process for controlling the display of the machine information display device. FIG. 312 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mode displayed on the table information display device. FIG. 313 is a list showing an example of contents displayed on the machine information display device. FIG. 314 is a schematic diagram showing the effect of the pachinko machine and the mode of special symbols displayed on the special symbol LED display.

An embodiment of a game arcade system according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. It should be noted that the embodiments and drawings described below illustrate a part of the embodiments of the present invention, and are not used for the purpose of limiting to these configurations, and are within the scope of the present invention. can be changed as appropriate. Corresponding components in each figure are labeled with the same or similar reference numerals.

(Amusement center equipment configuration)
A gaming facility 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing a part of the game hall 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a configuration diagram of the game hall 1. As shown in FIG.
A game hall 1 is divided into a management area 2 and a game area 3. The game area 3 is an area where a pachinko machine P and a slot machine S are installed in the island facility HS, and the customers M play games with these game machines. Here, in addition to the pachinko machine P and the slot machine S, the gaming machine includes a so-called parrot machine in which a game similar to the slot machine S is played using pachinko balls as a medium, an enclosed pachinko machine in which the pachinko balls are enclosed in the machine, and the like. Also included are slot machines used at casino establishments.

The pachinko machine P and the slot machine S are provided with an information terminal board I for providing information to the outside. The information terminal board I is a terminal for outputting a signal or the like as an event code, which will be described later, to the outside. The signal output from the information terminal board I is, for example, a door open signal as a signal output when the door of the pachinko machine P or the slot machine S is opened, or output when the glass door of the pachinko machine P is opened. There is a glass open signal to do. In addition, signals indicating game operation as gaming machine related information include signals such as the number of out balls, the number of safe balls, special prize signals (big hits, variable probability, small hits, short time and AT), sales information, and the like. Other signals include signals from magnetic sensors and radio sensors that respond to magnetism and radio waves used in goto.

The island facility HS is provided with facilities for transporting, supplying, and cleaning game media for playing the game machine. In the island facility HS, a plurality of chairs C are arranged in pairs with game machines so that visitors M can sit and play games. A plurality of island facilities HS are installed according to the number of gaming machines. Passages are provided between the island facilities HS so that the customers M can move, and a ball box or the like containing acquired game media can be placed near the chairs C.

In addition to the game machines, the island facility HS is provided with a ball lending machine PT and a lending machine CT for lending game media to customers M in pair with the game machines. A machine information display device K is provided above the gaming machine for displaying information about the gaming machine, such as the number of times the game machine has won a jackpot and the number of times the game has been started. The machine information display device K is provided with a liquid crystal display screen 891 and a 7-segment display for displaying the information of the game machine, and notifies the employee MS with an LED or the like when there is a problem with the game machine or when the game medium is replaced. A switch is provided. At the end of the island facility HS, a counter JC for counting game media such as game balls acquired by customers M is provided.

The game area 3 is provided with a plurality of wireless routers 5 each having a radio wave area of about 40 m, and many wireless routers 5 cover the radio wave range of the mobile terminal device 40.例文帳に追加The wireless router 5 is used for data communication and telephone calls between employees MS, but may also be used for information distribution to customers M who come to the store. Also, the wireless router 5 may be installed above the island facility such as the ceiling of the island facility HS, the transport gutter, the upper tank, or the like, or may be installed at the same position as the monitoring camera 61 .
Also, the wireless router 5 may have a structure integrated with the surveillance camera 61 . By installing the wireless router 5 and the surveillance camera 61 at the same position, or by installing the wireless router 5 and the surveillance camera 61 integrally, the distance to a person can be measured by image recognition, and the mobile phone can be controlled by the radio wave intensity of the wireless router 5. It can also be used to specify the position and distance of the terminal device 40, and both measurement techniques can be used to comprehensively measure the distance and the like accurately.

In addition, a plurality of monitoring cameras 61 are provided in the game area 3, and are attached to the ceiling on the extension line of the aisle so as to capture the visitors M who are playing games. In addition, the monitoring camera 61 is installed near the entrance of the game hall 1, toward the prize exchange area, the money changer, the safe, and the counter JC.

The management area 2 is an area in which facilities for mainly managing and operating the game hall 1 by a person in charge are collectively installed. The management area 2 is often different in level and room from the game area 3, and mainly includes a hall computer 90 that manages the operation status of the pachinko machine P and the slot machine S, and surveillance cameras that monitor the behavior of customers M. A system 60, a face authentication server 80 (face authentication system) for identifying a person's face, and a communication server 10 for making calls and communicating between employees MS are installed.

The hall computer 90 has a built-in CPU, ROM, RAM, and hard disk, stores the above-mentioned various information obtained from each game machine in the hard disk, and has a function of displaying and printing the information as a form on a separately provided monitor. have. Moreover, the hall computer 90 is provided with a separate server to store data when the amount of information is large.
A surveillance camera system 60 having a plurality of surveillance cameras 61 incorporates a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and a hard disk, and records images from each surveillance camera 61 in a recording server 64 of the surveillance camera system 60 .

The face authentication server 80 has a built-in CPU, ROM, RAM, and hard disk, and receives images or videos of faces, appearances, etc. of customers collected in the game hall 1 and images or videos of faces, appearances, etc. of goto from other stores. has the function of storing or processing
The communication server 10 incorporates a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and a hard disk, and stores main programs for communication and phone calls, which will be described later. An operation terminal 11 for operating the communication server 10 incorporates a CPU, a ROM, a RAM and a hard disk, and a monitor is attached to the outside. The operation terminal 11 is provided with an interface screen for performing operation functions as a base unit for calling and communicating, setting of the communication server 10, and the like.
Also, at the end of the island facility HS, an island switchboard DT, which will be described later, is provided, and power is turned on and off to each game machine, ball lending machine (game medium lending means) PT, and lending machine (game medium lending means) CT. making it possible. Furthermore, a battery BA for nighttime monitoring, which will be described later, is provided at the end of the island facility HS, and is used in a system for controlling nighttime monitoring.

(Connection configuration of each device in the game hall)
Next, the connection of each device used in the game hall 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG.
In order to convert the data output as a contact signal or pulse signal as a signal from the information terminal board I of the pachinko machine P or the slot machine S and transmit it to the hall computer 90, one out of two game machines or one One stand computer 93 is provided for each stand. The platform computer 93 also collects sales data of the ball lending machine PT, the lending machine CT, etc., and data of the individual face authentication device 800 . The platform computer 93 converts the signal into a serial signal or the like and sends the signal to the island computer 91 at the end of the island facility HS through the in-island wiring 92 . The machine computer 93 is also connected to the machine information display device K, and transmits data desired by the customer M. In this embodiment, data is transmitted from each game machine to the machine information display device K via the machine computer 93. may be connected to transmit

The island computer 91 of each island facility HS is connected to the hall computer 90 in the management area 2 by island wiring 95 through the ceiling or the like. The island computer 91 is connected to the counter JC and the hall computer 90 by two-way communication.
The in-island wiring 92 and the island wiring 95 employ twisted wires, RS232C, RS422, RS485, optical cables, etc. in consideration of noise, propagation distance, etc., and are used by appropriately changing them according to the application. The island computer 91 and the stand computer 93 are equipped with a CPU, a ROM and a RAM, and perform signal conversion and communication processing for collecting data of each device and transmitting the collected data to the hall computer 90 .

A wireless router 5 is connected to a switching hub 7 in the management area 2 by a LAN cable. Also, the wireless router 5 and the mobile terminal device 40 are wirelessly connected by a wireless LAN.
Each monitoring camera 61 is connected to a camera hub 65 via a camera wiring 63 using a LAN cable, coaxial cable, optical cable, or the like.
The face authentication server 80, the communication server 10, the monitoring camera system 60, the operation terminal 11 and the hall computer 90 in the management area 2 are connected via the switching hub 7 by the connection wiring 8 employing a LAN cable.
The surveillance camera system 60 is connected to each surveillance camera 61, the face authentication server 80, the disabling detection server, and each stand camera 69 in the above-described communication mode, and operates in cooperation with them.
The router 9 is connected to the switching hub 7 and is connected to other stores and the chain store head office 500 via the Internet network E through the Internet line 588 to transmit and receive data.

Referring to FIG. 54, the overall configuration of the game arcade system for identifying the god group will be described. This shows a case where there are many game arcades 1 as chain stores, and the chain store head office 500 collects various information including business information from the game arcades 1 and manages this data. The chain store head office 500 stores at least face image data (605 and 606 in FIG. 57 or 58) of the person requiring caution MB, which will be described later, in the face authentication server 580 as one of the information therein. Then, the chain store head office 500 distributes face image data 605 capturing the face required for face authentication of the person requiring caution MB to each game hall 1 . These data are distributed from the chain store headquarters 500 using the Internet line 588 or the like, and stored in the face authentication server 80 of each game hall 1 (game shop).
In addition, the data of the ball which is sent from each ball lending machine PT in each store is transmitted and received to and from the ball server 71 of the chain store head office 500 via the Internet network E. Furthermore, the edge ball server 71 transmits and receives data to and from the personal portable terminal SM owned by the player M through the Internet network E.

(Configuration of ball lending machine PT)
The ball lending machine PT will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 70. FIG. FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram of the ball vending machine PT used in the game arcade system. FIG. 68 is a configuration diagram of devices connected to the main CPU 850 of the ball lending machine PT. FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing the liquid crystal operation unit 801 of the ball lending machine PT. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing the liquid crystal operation unit 801 of the ball lending machine PT.

The individual face authentication device 800 is mainly composed of an individual face authentication server 820 equipped with a face authentication engine stored in the storage area of the HDD 855 installed in the ball lending machine PT, and each camera 69. Both are built in the ball lending machine PT.
The ball lending machine PT reads programs from the ROM 851, RAM 853, and HDD 855 connected to the main CPU 850, and controls each device.
Each device mainly has a liquid crystal operation unit 801 , an LED display unit 812 , a card processing unit 807 , a banknote processing unit 809 , each machine camera 69 , a speaker 831 , a ball lending nozzle 803 and a counting unit 805 .

The ball lending machine PT has an LED display section 812 at the top to indicate the state of the ball lending machine PT. The LED display section 812 indicates whether or not the ball lending machine P is capable of lending balls, or an error in the equipment or the like, by the display color of the LED.
The ball lending machine PT is provided with a banknote processing unit 809 for performing processing for the player M to insert banknotes of 10,000 yen, 5,000 yen, 1,000 yen, or the like, and to lend game balls, which are game media, from the inserted banknotes. ing. From the ball lending machine PT, it is possible to lend out game media until the balance runs out.
The ball lending machine PT is provided with a ball lending nozzle 803 extending to the tray of the pachinko machine P. - 特許庁The ball lending nozzle 803 can drive the ball lending drive unit 813 to pay out the stored balls to the pachinko machine P every predetermined number.

The ball lending machine PT has a card processing section 807 below. The card processing unit 807 includes a driving motor 814 for operating the insertion and ejection of the member card 550 and the guest card 551 inserted from the card insertion/ejection port 811, and the number of balls stored in the card by the card reader/writer 804. and balance value, etc. are rewritten. In addition, a card storage section 816 for guest cards is provided so that the employee MS does not need to replenish the guest card 5 after recording the remaining money and balls (acquired balls) on the guest card 5 and moving the guest card.
The ball lending machine PT is equipped with a speaker 831 so as to announce error conditions and handling, and a drive circuit 833 generates warning sounds, operation sounds and guidance sounds.

The ball lending machine PT is equipped with a counting unit 805 which can receive the game balls acquired by the player M from the lower tray of the pachinko machine P and count them by a counting counter 806 . The number of balls counted by the counting counter 806 is counted as possession balls, and the number of balls currently stored is displayed by the possession ball number display section 802d, which will be described later. In addition, the ball lending machine PT is provided with a counter shutter 832 having a movable opening/closing member that prevents balls from flowing into the counting counter 806 in order to stop the counting operation in the event of an abnormality. The counter shutter 832 performs an opening/closing operation by receiving an abnormal signal or the like from the ball lending machine PT. When the counter shutter 832 is actuated, the counter shutter 832 is closed to prohibit the ball from flowing into the counting counter 806 and the ball remains in the counting unit 805 . After the abnormality is resolved, the counter shutter 832 is opened, and the ball starts to flow into the counting counter 806 to enable counting again. Thus, by providing the counter shutter 832, it is possible to prevent erroneous counting of balls to be counted and to safely hold the balls to be counted.

The ball lending machine PT is provided with a liquid crystal operation unit 801 capable of operating the ball lending machine PT in the central part. The liquid crystal operation unit 801 is provided with an operation display section 802 having an operable screen.
The operation display unit 802 includes a menu display unit 802a that serves as an interface screen, a shared display unit 802b that can be operated to share the ball in hand and distribute it to others, and the discharge of the member card 550 etc. and the operation of the ball lending machine PT. A lock display section 802c capable of selecting whether to prohibit or not, a possessed ball number display section 802d capable of displaying the acquired game balls possessed, and a menu display section 802 are displayed on other operation screens. A switching display section 802e that can be switched, an end display section 802f that can discharge a card such as the membership card 550 and end it, and a replay that can pay out the stored balls from the ball lending nozzle 803. A display section 802g and a scrap processing display section 802h, which will be described later, are provided. These operation display units 802 are designed as touch panels, and are operated by pressing the display portion.

The operation display section 802 can display a personal identification number input display section 845 that is operated when a personal identification number is registered or input by the switching display section 802e. A personal identification number input display portion 845 displays a personal identification number display portion 847 for displaying the input state of the personal identification number and a numeric portion to be entered.
The ball lending machine PT, as shown in the judgment content list 825 in FIG. Each item such as ID", "front table data", "front ratio", and "profile ratio" can be discriminated. Each stand camera 69 mounted on the individual face authentication device 800 is installed in a state that the player M does not know.

Each stand camera 69 is set so that the focus of the camera is best when the player M is seated, and the individual is identified by capturing the front face or side face. In addition, each stand camera 69 is configured so as to be able to monitor the movement of the player M using pan/tilt/zoom functions. The pan/tilt/zoom functions are driven by the drive unit 835, and the camera 69 is controlled by the controller 834 of the ball lending machine PT from the operation terminal 11 connected to the face authentication server 80 and the hall computer 90.
In addition, it is possible to operate while watching the video of each camera 69 from the mobile terminal device 40 held by the employee MS via the communication server 10, and the employee MS can monitor the players M even from a remote location. can be done. In particular, it is effective in monitoring a person requiring attention.

The ball lending machine PT is connected to the pachinko machine P via an IF (interface). The pachinko machine P has a ball lending button 401 for settling the balance from the balance put into the ball lending machine PT, lending game media to the pachinko machine P, and a member card 550 and a guest card 551, which will be described later, from the ball lending machine PT. A return button 402 for returning is provided.
In addition, the ball lending machine PT is connected via an IF (interface) 808 to a machine information display device K equipped with a liquid crystal display screen 891 for displaying useful information such as the number of jackpots and the number of starts of the pachinko machine P to the player M. It is
In addition, the ball lending machine PT sends the data of the individual face authentication server 820, the sales data of the ball lending machine PT, and the data obtained by counting the game balls acquired by the counting unit 805 to the stand computer 93, which transmits the data to the hall computer 90 as an IF ( interface) 808 .
In the present invention, the ball lending machine PT attached to the pachinko machine P is explained, but this function may be utilized by providing each camera 69 in the lending machine CT. Further, the machine information display device K attached to the slot machine S may be provided with each machine camera 69 to utilize this function.

(Composition of Membership Card)
The membership card will be explained with reference to FIG. The membership card 550 is an IC card equipped with an IC chip 553, and the IC chip 553 can rewrite and store data without contact. The IC chip 553 of the member card 550 stores a member ID indicating a member code, a personal identification number, money data, face image data 555 of the member's face, and the like in order to ensure security against theft.
The data on the number of balls and the number of stored game media and the remaining money may be stored in a member management server, a storage server, or the like instead of being stored in the membership card 550, and may be communicated at any time. Moreover, these cards may be not only IC chips but also magnetic cards.

(Network configuration of data in amusement arcades)
The main flow of data obtained from each device described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the main data flow on the network of the gaming arcade 1. As shown in FIG. The communication server 10 is a server that mainly transmits and receives data, processes data from each device, and performs communication and telephone calls.

The communication server 10 is provided with an IP telephone server 22 as a program for making group calls, all-out calls, etc. in cooperation with the IP telephone terminal program 45 of the mobile terminal device 40 . The IP telephony server 22 employs a general-purpose session control protocol such as SIP, establishes sessions with a plurality of clients, and operates as a so-called IP telephony that performs two-way real-time communication.
The wireless router 5 and the mobile terminal device 40 are wirelessly connected by a wireless LAN, and standards such as IEEE802.11a, 11b, 11g, 11n, and 11ac are used, and the frequency band of 5 GHz band with less crosstalk is used. ing. In addition to the frequency band of 5 GHz band, wireless communication of 2.4 GHz band may be used, and it is also possible to select according to the situation such as crosstalk. Other wireless communication may be, for example, wireless communication such as a wireless telephone line or Bluetooth (registered trademark).
Further, since the communication regarding the call and the data transfer is performed by the same line, the security against eavesdropping and data interception occurring during the call and communication can be raised to the same level. Therefore, security costs and software production costs can be kept low.

Further, the communication server 10 cooperates with the alarm reception display program 46 of the mobile terminal device 40 and provides the income server 21 as a program for transmitting data for displaying alarm information on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40 . The income server 21 performs each setting of the communication server 10 or the IP phone of the mobile terminal device 40 and the setting of the IP phone server 22 .
Alarm information, which will be described later, is information that is mainly sent to the mobile terminal device 40 and notified to alert employees. Alarm information is notified by text display, image display, and sound.
The communication server 10 is provided with an IP telephone master unit program 23 for communicating with the mobile terminal device 40 through the IP telephone server 22 using the operation terminal 11 as a master unit.

The communication server 10 has a bridge server 20 as a program that bridges data from the surveillance camera system 60 , face authentication server 80 and hall computer 90 to the intercom server 21 . The communication server 10 is provided with a DB server 25 that cooperates with the bridge server 20 and stores various data of the communication server 10 . Further, the communication server 10 is provided with an alarm server 27 for accumulating data transmitted as an event code (to be described later) out of various information obtained from the hall computer 90 .

A signal obtained from a game machine or the like is input to the hall computer 90 , and the hall computer 90 distributes data to the alarm server 27 . Data distributed as event codes are saved as code data. The saved data is converted into text data as alarm information by software described later and saved in a database. FIG. 41, which will be described later, shows an example of the contents saved in the database of the DB server 25. As shown in FIG.
The data to be saved is text data, but may be code data as long as it can be converted into text data before it is transmitted to the mobile terminal device 40 or displayed.

The communication server 10 is provided with a speech synthesis program 24 as a program for converting the text display of alarm information into speech to generate speech information.
The communication server 10 issues a command in response to a request from a surveillance camera terminal program 66 that operates a surveillance camera operation terminal 62 provided in the surveillance camera system 60, and transmits a signal from the hall computer 90 to the bridge server 21. A VMC command program 28 is provided.
The communication server 10 is provided with an image server 26 that cooperates with a face authentication server 80 and stores data of the face authentication server 80 in response to requests from the monitor camera terminal program 66 .

As described above, the communication server 10 has the IP telephone server 22 as a program for making calls, and the intercom server 21 as a program for transmitting data to be displayed on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40 . In this way, by separating the program for transmitting data from the call, the employee can confirm the information transmitted on the display screen 43 while talking on the phone and proceed with the work. Able to work quickly and accurately.

(Network configuration of individual face authentication server in game hall system)
FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing the network of the game arcade system. A main flow of data obtained from each device of the individual face authentication device 800 described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The individual face authentication server 820 stored in the HDD 155 of the ball lending machine PT is connected to the island computer 91 located at the end of the island via the in-island wiring 92 via the platform computer 93 connected via the IF 808 of the ball lending machine PT. be. Also, the island computer 91 is connected to a switching hub (SHB) 7 . The face authentication server 80 and the individual face authentication server 820 connected to the switching hub 7 transmit and receive data under the control described later. In addition, the face authentication server 80 and the individual face authentication server 820 are also connected to the hall computer 90 via the switching hub (SHB) 7 by the island wiring 95, and it is also possible to analyze the game data for each individual.
In addition, the face authentication server 80, which also functions as a parent server of the individual face authentication server 820, uses a large number of monitoring cameras 61 connected to the hub 65 for each camera to monitor the entrance of the game hall 1 and the inside of the game hall 1. It is connected to a monitoring system 60 to monitor and monitors a person who needs attention MB or the like.

(Software configuration diagram)
The configuration of software for communication of data such as call and alarm information using the above program will be described with reference to FIG.
The communication server 10 is composed of a SIP server 35, a management tool 32, an alarm information backup tool 34, and an alarm information audio distribution 31 as software for making calls and communications.

The SIP server 35 performs control to call and connect the mobile terminal devices 40 to each other or from the parent device of the operation terminal 11 . The management server 32 performs summons calling, management of call status, and notification of alarm information. The management tool 33 controls the SIP server 35 and edits each setting. The alarm information backup tool 34 imports and exports alarm information. The alarm information audio distribution 31 converts text information into audio data and transmits the converted audio data as audio packets.
The mobile terminal device 40 and the operation terminal 11 serving as a master device are provided with SIP clients 36 and 37 as software for communication, calling and display. The SIP client 36 displays telephone calls between the parent device or the portable terminal device 40, incoming and outgoing calls, and alarm information.

(Data structure of face authentication server and individual face authentication server)
FIG. 73 shows the data structure of the face authentication server 80 and the individual face authentication server 820. As shown in FIG.
73A shows the data structure of the face authentication server 80. FIG. The face authentication server 80 is divided into a system area 83 for operating the system of the face authentication server 80 and a data area 85 of the face authentication server 80 . The data area 85 of the face authentication server 80 includes a member/professional customer data area 86 in which face image data 555 of members and regular customers is stored, and a cautionary person data area 87 in which face image data 605 of a cautionary person is stored. , a machine analysis data area 88 storing face image data 556 used for analyzing gaming machine data for each individual, and a face analysis data area 88 used for analyzing customers such as gender, age, and unit price per customer. A customer analysis data area 89 in which image data 557 is stored and a spare area 84 as an empty area for data are provided.

FIG. 73B shows the data structure of the individual face authentication server 820. As shown in FIG. The individual face authentication server 820 is divided into a system area 861 for operating the system of the individual face authentication server 820 and a data area 862 of the individual face authentication server 820 . A data area 862 of the individual face authentication server 820 is provided with a recorded data area 863 for continuously recording images from the camera 69. Recorded data is stored for each predetermined period, and the recorded data area 863 is the upper limit. When it becomes , the oldest stored files are overwritten and saved. A data area 862 of the individual face authentication server 820 stores face image data 555 or 559 recognized by each camera 69 in a procedure described later. A captured image data area 865 is a data area for controlling a captured image by each camera 69 in a procedure to be described later. In addition, the data area 862 of the individual face authentication server 820 has a spare area 964 as an empty area for data.

(Interface screen used for playgrounds)
Interface screens for running the software described above will now be described with reference to FIGS.

<Management tool interface screen>
First, interface screens displayed on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11 of the management tool 33 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a transition diagram of the interface screen of the management tool 33. As shown in FIG.
When the application software 100 of the management tool 33 is activated on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11, a login screen 101 appears. From the import screen 106 in the login screen 101, database information such as alarm information can be imported.

When a password is entered on the login screen 101 and the login button is pressed, the menu screen 102 shown in FIG. 6 is displayed. A SIP server control button 105 is provided on the menu screen 102 , and when the SIP server control button 105 is pressed, a SIP control screen 103 is displayed. The SIP control screen 103 is provided with a screen for controlling starting, stopping, restarting, and data reloading of the SIP server 35 (not shown). When the setting button 104 on the menu screen 102 is pressed, the setting screen 110 shown in FIG. 7 is displayed.

A setting screen 110 shown in FIG. 7 represents a state in which a terminal tab 111 is selected. At the top of the setting screen 110, tabs for moving to other setting screens are provided. In addition to the terminal tab 111, a group tab 112, a summoning tab 113, a filter tab 114, a blacklist tab 115, and an access point tab 116 are displayed. and server tab 117 . A startup display 121 is provided as a window that is commonly displayed on other setting screens and indicates the operation of the management server 32 .
In addition, at the bottom of the setting screen 110, a confirm button 118 and a cancel button 119 that are commonly displayed on other setting screens are provided. When the confirm button 118 is pressed, the data in the database is updated, and when the cancel button 119 is pressed, the menu screen 102 is displayed again.

Next, when the group tab 112 is selected, a group conference room edit screen 130 is displayed. A group conference room edit screen 130 (not shown) displays group numbers and group names as a list of groups set in the SIP server 35 and management server 32 . A group conference room editing screen 130 is a screen for adding and editing groups.

Next, selecting the Invite tab 113 displays an Invite Call edit screen 140 . A summons call edit screen 140 (not shown) displays summons numbers and summons names as a list of summons calls set in the SIP server 35 and the management server 32 . A call summons edit screen 140 is a screen for adding and editing a call summons.

Next, when the filter tab 114 is selected, an alarm information filter screen 150 shown in FIG. 8 is displayed. The alarm information filter screen 150 is a screen for setting distribution of alarm information. The alarm information filter list 153 displays event codes, group numbers, and device numbers. The event code is a code transmitted from hall computer 90 and surveillance camera system 60 .

Here, the event code is output from the hall computer 90 as an event code, which is mainly handled as an abnormality of the game machine or other equipment among the signals collected by the hall computer or the like.
The types of signals include the door open signal that is transmitted when the frame of the pachinko machine P or slot machine S is released, the glass open signal that is transmitted when the glass frame of the pachinko machine P is released, and the suspicion of goto. Signals when magnetic sensors, radio sensors, etc. are activated, signals related to calls when customer M makes a call with table information display device K, ball lending machine PT, lending machine CT, counter JC and island Abnormal signals of equipment for transporting and replenishing game media stored in the facility HS, abnormal signals of a money changer, and the like are included.
Further, the event code transmitted from the monitoring camera system 60 is triggered by information from the face authentication server 80, and is a code for notifying that the person requiring attention MB is in the store, or leaving the occurrence of a problem detected by the monitoring camera system 60. code, etc.
These data are saved in the database of the DB server 25, and other data whose contents are shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, which will be described later, are saved.
It should be noted that the event code can be obtained not only from the equipment connected to the hall computer 90 but also from the equipment installed in the game area 3 as the event code.

The group number is the number of the group when making the group call as described above. The machine number is a number assigned to each pachinko machine P or slot machine S represented by game machines, a counter JC at the end of an island, a ball lending machine PT, a lending machine CT, a money changer, or an island number. This is the number assigned to the replenishment device, out ball counter, etc. in the HS in the facility. Also, the device number may be the number of each surveillance camera 61 corresponding to the position where the surveillance camera 61 is installed.

At the top of the alarm information filter screen 150, there is a check box 154 for selecting whether or not to deliver audio. This is a column for selecting whether or not to perform voice distribution for each event code. If selected, text data is synthesized into voice and voice data is distributed. If not selected, only text data is delivered as alarm information.
It is a simple setting to check, and at the same time, it can be set for each event code, so employees can easily make extremely detailed settings.

The alarm information filter screen 150 has an add button 155 and an edit button 157 . By pressing the add button 155, the screen shifts to the add screen 156 in FIG. 9A, and the event code, device number, and group number can be additionally set. Also, by selecting an event code from the alarm information filter list 153 and pressing an edit button 157, an edit screen 158 shown in FIG. 9B is displayed, and the device number and group number can be edited and set.
Since the alarm information can be set for each group, for example, information about the pachinko machine P will not be provided to the group in charge of the slot machine S. In this way, it is possible to select and send the necessary information to the necessary groups.

Next, when the blacklist tab 115 is selected, a blacklist edit screen 160 (not shown) is displayed. The blacklist editing screen 160 is a screen for displaying a list of intruders who intrude into the network for the purpose of eavesdropping or tampering with the system, and for adding and editing the list.

Next, when the access point tab 116 is selected, an access point edit screen 170 shown in FIG. 10 is displayed. This is the screen for adding and editing access points. The access point edit screen 170 uses the wireless router 5 installed in the game area 3 as an access point, and displays a list 171 of access points in the center of the screen.
The access point editing screen 170 is provided with an add button 172 and an edit button 173. By pressing the add button 172 or the edit button 173, the screen shifts to the add edit screen 175 of FIG. The add/edit screen 175 is a screen for adding and editing an access point name, a network name (SSID) of 5 GHz and 2.4 GHz, and an encryption key.
Security measures are taken to prevent eavesdropping and external intrusion by including encryption keys in the communication and call networks of this system. The encryption key can be a fixed encryption key, but using a randomly generated encryption key can provide additional security. Further, the additional edit screen 17 of FIG. 11 has a function of displaying the encryption key, and by displaying it on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11, setting work of the portable terminal device 40, which will be described later, can be performed quickly. can be done
The access point editing screen 170 is also provided with an XML file output button 174 for outputting a file for setting the operation terminal 11 or the mobile terminal device 40 in XML format.

Next, when the server tab 117 is selected, a server information setting screen 180 (not shown) is displayed, and the status of connection to the SIP server 35 and the DB server 25 can be confirmed. The server information setting screen 180 displays the shop name, IP address of the SIP server 35, user ID and password, and allows editing. Also, the IP address, user ID, database name and password of the DB server 25 serving as a database are displayed and can be edited.

Next, when the terminal tab 111 is selected, the setting screen 110 shown in FIG. 7 is displayed. The setting screen 110 is a screen for setting the information of the mobile terminal device 40 , and the terminal number and terminal name of the mobile terminal device 40 that are set are displayed as a terminal information list 127 in the center of the screen. An add button 122 and an edit button 123 are provided at the bottom of the list of the setting screen 110. When the add button 122 or the edit button 123 is pressed, the terminal information edit screen 120 (not shown) is displayed. The terminal information edit screen 120 is a screen for adding and editing the telephone number and terminal name for the mobile terminal device 40 selected when adding and editing the mobile terminal device 40 .
At the bottom of the terminal information list 127 of the setting screen 110, a delete button 124 for deleting the settings of the mobile terminal device 40 and a file for setting the operation terminal 11 or the mobile terminal device 40 from the selected terminal are displayed in XML. An XML file output button 126 for outputting in the format is provided.

Furthermore, an identification number output button 125 is provided at the bottom of the terminal information list 127 of the setting screen 110, and when the identification number output button 125 is pressed, the identification number output access point selection screen 190 shown in FIG. 12 is displayed. .
The identification number output access point selection screen 190 displays the store name, telephone number, and IP addresses of the SIP server 35 and the management server 32 as information of the mobile terminal device 40 . The identification number output access point selection screen 190 displays a list 191 of access points with the wireless router 5 installed in the game area 3 as the access point in the center of the screen. When an access point displayed in the list 191 is selected and the identification number display button 19 is pressed, an identification number display screen 195 shown in FIG. 13 is displayed.

The identification number display screen 195 displays, as information on the access points of the mobile terminal device 40, store names, telephone numbers, IP addresses of the SIP server 35 and the management server 32, access point names, 5 GHz band and 2.4 GHz band networks (SSID ) name is displayed. Although not shown, information on access points of the 5 GHz band and the 2.4 GHz band is displayed as identification numbers 197a and 197b in square frames.
The identification numbers 197a and 197b are displayed in a form that is difficult to recognize, such as a QR code (registered trademark), bar code, color code, or the like. The identification numbers 197a and 197b contain an encryption key, so security measures are taken to prevent eavesdropping and intrusion from the outside. The encryption key can be a fixed encryption key, but using a randomly generated encryption key can provide additional security.

Further, by displaying the identification numbers 197a and 197b on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11, the mobile terminal device 40 incorporates the identification numbers 197a and 197b displayed on the monitor screen 13 into the mobile terminal device 40. can be captured by a camera 41 that The identification numbers 197a and 197b captured by the camera 41 contain store names, telephone numbers, IP addresses of the SIP server 35 and management server 32, access point names, 5 GHz band , 2.4 GHz band network (SSID) name, and encryption key. Therefore, the SIP client 37 of the mobile terminal device 40 can automatically set the mobile terminal device 40, which facilitates the setting of the mobile terminal device 40 and allows employees to know the settings such as the encryption key. Since the setting of the mobile terminal device 40 and the setting of the management tool 33 can be performed without the need to perform the setting, it is possible to enhance the security.
In addition, since the same information as the information displayed on the monitor screen 13 is printed on the print button, the information can be captured by the camera 41 of the mobile terminal device 40 or the like, and network access can be set easily.
Next, on the identification number output access point selection screen 190 and the identification number display screen 195, the currently opened screens are closed by pressing the screen close button.

<SIP client interface screen of operation terminal>
Interface screens of the master SIP client 37 displayed on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 22. FIG.
FIG. 14 is a transition diagram of interface screens of the SIP client 37. As shown in FIG. When the application software 200 of the SIP client 37 is activated on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11, a call screen 210 shown in FIG. 15 is displayed. On the call screen 210, the number of the own station is displayed at the top of the screen, and a status display field 211 indicating the call status is provided below. An alarm information display column 212 for displaying alarm information in text is provided below the status display column 211 . A message transmission button 213 is provided below the alarm information display field 212, and when the message transmission button 213 is pressed, a message transmission screen 220 shown in FIG. 16 is displayed.

The message transmission screen 220 shown in FIG. 16 has a function for manually transmitting messages and images. When the destination type 221 is pressed, three types of destinations are selected: all, group, and terminal designation. can do. The destination list 222 displays destinations of the group selected by the destination type 221 .
The message transmission screen 220 is provided with a message field 223 in which text can be entered on the right side of the screen. In addition, the monitoring camera system 60, the face, etc., can be used to transmit images of people requiring attention, such as goto masters, obtained at other stores or their own stores, and manuals, etc. in the event of trouble with the equipment including the game machines in the game area 3. An image to be transmitted can be selected by referring to image data from an image file in the authentication server 80, SIP server 35, or operation terminal 11. FIG.
In this way, since the message can be delivered as text along with the image, it is possible to accurately and quickly send information to the employees in the game area 3 even if they are not in the management area 2, regarding troubles including goto. And there is an advantage that an employee who obtains the information can take corrective and prompt action.
Then, the message transmission screen 220 is closed by pressing the close button at the bottom.

In addition, the call screen 210 shown in FIG. 15 includes a speech button 213 that enables speech to the specified mobile terminal device 40 while the button is pressed during a conversation, and a speech button that continues to speak until the button is released. A button 215 is provided. On the call screen 210, a call to the mobile terminal device 40 can be made by inputting the ten keys or selecting the abbreviated dial field 217 on the right.

Next, by pressing the option button 218 below the call screen 210, the screen shifts to the option screen 230 shown in FIG. The option screen 230 is a screen for selecting each function.
The option screen 230 shown in FIG. 17 has a group call list button 232 , an individual call list button 233 , a summoned call list button 234 , an alarm information list button 235 , a setting button 236 and an import button 237 .
When the import button 237 is pressed, an import screen 290 (not shown) is displayed. The import screen 290 is a screen for importing a file output in XML format by the management tool 33 .

Next, when the group call list button 232 shown in FIG. 17 is pressed, the group call list screen 240 shown in FIG. 18 is displayed. The group call list screen 240 is a screen for selecting the call destination of the group. By selecting one from the list screen 241 of all groups and pressing the call button 242, the group call is started and the call screen 210 is displayed. return automatically.

Next, when the individual call list button 233 shown in FIG. 17 is pressed, the individual call list screen 250 shown in FIG. 19 is displayed. The individual call list screen 250 is a screen for selecting an individual call destination. By selecting one from the individual call list screen 251 and pressing a call button 252, the call destination is called and the call is made. When the called party answers, the call is started and the call screen 210 automatically returns.

Next, when the call summons list button 234 shown in FIG. 17 is pressed, the call summons list screen 260 shown in FIG. 20 is displayed. The summoned call list screen 260 is a screen for selecting the summoned call destination. By selecting one from the list screen 261 of all the summoned groups and pressing the call button 262, the call destination is called and the call is started. to automatically return to the call screen 210 .

Next, when the alarm information list button 235 shown in FIG. 17 is pressed, the alarm information list screen 280 shown in FIG. 21 is displayed. The alarm information list screen 280 is a screen for displaying a list of alarm information. The alarm information list screen 280 is provided with an alarm information list 281 for displaying alarm information acquired from the database on the left side of the screen, and displays the content of the alarm information in text. In the upper right part of the alarm information list screen 280, there is provided an alarm information image column 282 in which an image attached to the alarm information can be displayed. In addition, an alarm information message column 283 is provided below the alarm information message column 283 in which a message attached to the alarm information and detailed contents can be displayed.

Next, when the setting button 236 shown in FIG. 17 is pressed, the setting screen 270 shown in FIG. 22 is displayed. The screen shown in FIG. 22 is used to set the IP addresses and port numbers of the SIP server 35 and the management server 32 to which the operation terminal 11 and the mobile terminal device 40 are to be connected. This is a screen for setting a password and a display name.
The screen displayed on the abbreviated dial tab is a screen for selecting a abbreviated number from individual calls, group calls, and convened calls. to be displayed.

<Interface screen of the SIP client of the mobile terminal device>
The interface screen of the SIP client 36 displayed on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32. FIG.
FIG. 23 is a transition diagram of interface screens of the SIP client 36. As shown in FIG. When the application software 300 of the SIP client 36 is activated on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40, a lock screen 310 shown in FIG. 24 is displayed. A lock screen 310 is a screen that is displayed at the time of activation and prevents malfunction. For example, when the mobile terminal device 40 is put in a pocket of clothes or inserted into a holder or the like attached to the waist or arm, even if the display screen 43 is accidentally touched, the call or other A function is provided to prevent touch operation on the display screen 43 so as not to shift to the screen. In addition, the screen shifts to the lock screen 310 even when no operation is performed for a certain period of time. Then, when performing an operation such as a call, the lock release button 311 is pressed for a long time to shift to a call screen 320 .
Further, below the unlock button 311, an information display field 312 is provided in which one item of latest unread alarm information can be displayed.

Next, a call screen 320 shown in FIG. 25 is a call screen that functions as an intercom. While pressing the call button 321 on the screen, it is possible to speak with the selected terminal. Even with the utterance switch attached, utterance is possible while these buttons are being pressed.
By pressing the camera button 323 provided on the call screen 320, it is possible to take an image with the camera 41 of the mobile terminal device 40, the captured image is registered in the management server 32, and the mobile terminal device 40 and It is a function of delivering to the operation terminal 11 . The camera 41 can capture not only images but also moving images, and the captured images and moving images can be used as evidence when troubles occur with customers or customers. Also, in the case of equipment trouble, it is possible to send an image or moving image to the management area 2 to investigate the cause of the failure and to deal with the failure remotely.

Below each button, an information display field 324 is provided in which one item of the latest alarm information can be displayed as an unread message. Furthermore, below the information display column 324, a message confirmation column 325 is provided in which the number of unread messages is displayed. The message confirmation column 325 displaying read and unread allows the employee to know that there is information that has not been confirmed, and can also be used to confirm whether the work has yet to be completed.
A message can be displayed in the information display column 324 by pressing the message confirmation column 325 . The call screen 320 automatically transitions to the lock screen 310 when no operation is performed for a certain period of time.
Next, when the option button 322 shown in FIG. 25 is pressed, an option screen 330 shown in FIG. 26 is displayed. The option screen 330 is a screen for selecting each function, and includes a group call list button 331, an individual call list button 332, an alarm information list button 333, a connection destination list button 334, an access point list button 335, and an identification number reading button 336. and a terminal name setting button 337 are provided.

Next, when the group call list button 331 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the group call list screen 340 shown in FIG. 27 is displayed. The group call list screen 340 is a screen for selecting a call destination of a group. Selecting one call destination from all groups and pressing the group call display 341 starts a call. If there are no group contacts, the alarm information will be displayed in text.
Next, when the individual call list button 332 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the individual call list screen 340 shown in FIG. 28 is displayed. The individual call list screen 350 is a screen for selecting individual call destinations, and by selecting one of the displayed individual call destinations as the call destination and pressing the individual call display 351, the call is started. If there is no individual call destination, text alarm information is displayed.

Next, when the access point list button 335 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the access point list screen 360 shown in FIG. 29 is displayed. The access point list screen 360 is a screen for measuring the radio wave intensity of each access point and switching the access point. The access point list screen 360 displays the radio wave intensities that can be detected by the mobile terminal device 40, and the radio wave intensities are displayed in ascending order of radio wave strength. The displayed access point can be switched by pressing the button, but it is also possible to automatically switch to an access point with a stronger radio wave. This radio wave status is also sent to the management server 32 and used for monitoring a person to be cautioned, which will be described later.

Next, when the identification number reading button 336 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the identification number reading screen 370 shown in FIG. 30 is displayed. The identification number reading screen 370 reads the identification numbers 197a and 197b displayed on the identification number display screen 195 shown in FIG. can be set. Store name, telephone number, IP address of SIP server 35 and management server 32, access point name, network (SSID) name of 5 GHz band and 2.4 GHz band, encryption key from which mobile terminal device 40 can access the network is included, the SIP client 37 of the mobile terminal device 40 can automatically set the mobile terminal device 40, which facilitates the setting of the mobile terminal device 40 and allows employees to set encryption keys and the like. Security can be enhanced because the setting of the mobile terminal device 40 and the setting of the management tool 33 can be performed without being known. Then, when the reading and setting of the mobile terminal device 40 are completed, the option screen 330 is displayed.

Next, when the alarm information list button 333 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the alarm information list screen 380 shown in FIG. 31 is displayed. The alarm information list screen 380 displays a list of transmitted alarm information. By pressing the displayed alarm information, the screen shifts to the alarm information detail screen 390 shown in FIG.
The alarm information detail screen 390 displays details of messages and images in text format. The alarm information detail screen 390 also displays information such as the date and time when the alarm information occurred and the photographer of the image.
Further, the alarm information detail screen 390 is provided with an unlock request button 393 for requesting the hall computer 90 to release the closed state of the door when opening and closing the door of the gaming machine. A machine number input frame 395 is also provided for inputting the machine number of the gaming machine for releasing the closed state of the door.

Next, when the connection destination list button 334 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the SIP server list screen 317 shown in FIG. 23 is displayed. This is a screen for switching the SIP server 35 to be connected. If the mobile terminal device 40 is set in advance for another store, it can be used at another store simply by switching the SIP server 35 .
As described above, the setting of the portable terminal device 40 can be done only by reading the identification number with the camera 41, which is very convenient. Therefore, even if it is not necessary to prepare the mobile terminal devices 40 for the number of people in each store, the number of the mobile terminal devices 40 can be reduced because the mobile terminal devices 40 can be circulated among group stores.

Next, when the terminal name setting button 337 shown in FIG. 26 is pressed, the name setting screen 315 shown in FIG. 23 is displayed. The name setting screen 315 is a screen for setting the terminal name of the own mobile terminal device 40 .

(Control of game hall system)
Each control in the game arcade system will be described with reference to sequence diagrams and flow charts shown in FIGS. 33 to 66. FIG. These controls are realized using the software and programs described above, but are not limited to the software and programs described above. It doesn't matter how you do it.

<Controlling individual calls, group calls, and convened calls>
Control regarding a call will be described with reference to sequence diagrams and flowcharts shown in FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG.
The control for making individual calls will be described. FIG. 33 is a sequence diagram when making an individual call, and FIG. 34 is a flow chart relating to processing when making an individual call. The individual call is a function that enables a one-to-one call between the base unit and the mobile terminal device 40 displayed on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11 and between the mobile terminal devices 40 .

First, the caller selects a call destination from the monitor screen 13 (FIG. 19) of the operation terminal 11 or the display screen 43 (FIG. 28) of the portable terminal device 40 (S101). The SIP clients 36 and 37 on the originating side end the current telephone call (S102) and make a call to the selected call destination (S103). The SIP server 35 that has received the call calls the called party (S104). The SIP clients 36 and 37 on the called party side display an incoming call dialog. If the called party is the SIP client 36 of the mobile terminal device 40 (YES in S106), notification is given by ringtone and vibration (S107). YES), notification is given only by ringtone (S108).

If the called party selects a response (YES in S109), the called party's SIP client 36/37 terminates the current call (S110) and transmits a response to the SIP server 35 (S111). The SIP server 35 transmits the response to the SIP client 36/37 on the sender side, and the SIP client 36/37 on the sender side receives the response (S112). The SIP clients 36 and 37 on the caller side notify the destination to the management server 32 (S113). Also, the SIP clients 36 and 37 on the called party side notify the destination of the call to the management server 32 (S113). Then, it becomes possible to start talking to each other.
If the called party refuses the response (NO in S109), the SIP client 36/37 on the called party side transmits a refusal to the SIP server 35 (S115), and the SIP server 35 acknowledges the refusal. receive. The SIP server 35 transmits the rejection to the SIP clients 36 and 37 on the sender side, and the SIP clients 36 and 37 on the sender side receive the rejection (S116). The SIP clients 36 and 37 on the caller side make a call to the previous call group toward the SIP server 35 (S117). Also, the SIP clients 36 and 37 on the caller side notify the destination of the call to the management server 32 (S118).

Next, control when talking in a group will be described. FIG. 35 is a sequence diagram when making a group call, and FIG. 36 is a flow chart of processing when making a group call.
A group call is a call within a telephone number registered in advance in a group conference room in a call between the base unit and the mobile terminal device 40 displayed on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11 and a call between the mobile terminal devices 40. It is a function that allows you to make multiple-to-multiple calls.

When switching to the group call, if the group call is selected from the monitor screen 13 (FIG. 18) of the operation terminal 11 or the display screen 43 (FIG. 27) of the mobile terminal device 40 (S210), the SIP clients 36 and 37 first End the current call (S202) and make a call to the selected group conference room (S203). If the SIP clients 36 and 37 are registered in the selected group (YES in S204), the destination is notified to the management server 32 (S207), and a call can be started.

If the SIP client 36/37 is not registered in the selected group (NO in S204), the SIP server 35 notifies the SIP client 36/37 of the termination (S205), and the SIP client 36/37 A call to the previous call group is made to the SIP server 35 (S206). Also, the SIP clients 36 and 37 notify the management server 32 of the destination (S207), and return to the state before switching to the group call.
In the group call, by classifying the groups according to the hierarchy to be engaged in, the installation location of the pachinko machine P and the slot machine S in charge, the group of island facilities HS in charge, etc., it becomes possible to transmit and receive only desired information for each group.

Next, the control at the time of convening calls will be described. FIG. 37 is a sequence diagram when making a calling call, and FIG. 38 is a flowchart relating to processing when making a calling call.
A summons call is a call mainly between the mobile terminal device 40 and the parent device displayed on the monitor screen 13 of the operation terminal 11 . The summons call is a function of calling a specific SIP client 36 from the master unit and having a call between the SIP client 36 called into the summons conference room and the master unit, and one-to-many calls can be made. When a calling call is selected from the monitor screen 13 (FIG. 20) of the operation terminal 11 (S301), the SIP client 37 ends the current call (S302) and makes a call to the selected calling conference room ( S303).
The SIP client 37 notifies the destination of the call to the management server 32 (S304), and transmits the summons call (S305). The management server 32 notifies the SIP client 36 of the summons call (S306). The SIP client 36 displays an incoming call dialog on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40 (S307). If the terminal to be convened is a mobile phone (YES in S308), the notification is given by ringtone and vibration (S310). Notification is given only by ringtone (S309).

When the SIP client 36 that has received the notification of the convocation makes a call (YES in S311), the SIP client 36 terminates the current telephone call (S312) and makes a call to the convened conference room. (S313), and notifies the response to the management server 32 (S314). Then, a convening call is started.
If the SIP client 36 that received the notification of the convocation refuses (NO in S311), the SIP client 36 notifies the management server 32 of the refusal (S315).
Then, the parent SIP client 37 receives the response or rejection result of the summoned SIP client 36 (S316).
The summoning call is used by the person in charge of the game arcade 1 to summon a specific person in an emergency situation such as Goto, and can quickly and accurately convey information to employees. In addition, since there is a reply such as a response or refusal (S316), the person in charge can grasp the client's status, so he can quickly issue a command, and the employee who receives it can quickly respond to the trouble. .

<Alarm information distribution control>
Control relating to alarm information will be described with reference to sequence diagrams, flow charts, and explanatory diagrams of database contents shown in FIGS.

The control related to distribution of alarm information will be described. FIG. 39 is a sequence diagram for distributing alarm information, and FIG. 40 is a flowchart relating to processing for distributing alarm information.
The distribution of alarm information is triggered by a signal transmitted from the bridge server 20 . Signals are sent to the bridge server 20 via the hall computer 90 and the alarm information is distributed via the bridge server 20; There are two ways: one is when the alarm information is delivered to the other.

First, when an event code from the monitoring camera system 60 is transmitted to the management server 32 (YES in S401), the management server 32 distributes the event code to the designated one, or distributes the event code to all logged-in SIP clients 36 and 37. decide whether to deliver to
When the management server 32 distributes the information to the specified one (YES in S404), the management server 32 acquires the information of the target SIP clients 36 and 37 (S405). When distributing to all logged-in SIP clients 36 and 37 (NO in S404), the information of all logged-in SIP clients 36 and 37 is acquired.
When the event code from the hall computer 90 is sent to the management server 32 (NO in S401), the management server 32 acquires information on the distribution target group (S402), (S403).
Then, the management server 32 converts the contents of the alarm information corresponding to the event code and transmits the alarm information to the target SIP clients 36 and 37 (S407).

FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of data 2501 held in the database (DB server 25). The data held in common by the management server 32 and the portable terminal device 40 include the ID of the alarm information, the content of the alarm information, the message of the monitoring camera system 60, the name of the game hall 1, and the name of the SIP client 36/37 that generated the alarm. , an event code, the code of the device targeted for the alarm information, the device number such as the machine number of the gaming machine targeted for the alarm information, and the date and time of occurrence of the alarm information. In addition to the above, the management server 32 holds the type of alarm information, the name of the terminal of the monitoring camera system 60, and the name of the image file.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the alarm information data 2502 held in the database (DB server 25). As for the display of the alarm information in text, for example, when the call button of the table information display device K is pressed, the event code (“005”) is output from the hall computer 90 . The alarm information at this time is displayed on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40 as texts such as "Please go around the 3rd course", "Please go around the XX number", and "Call". In addition, if an event code (“010”) is output when the game machine is opened and closed, “123 series door open” or the like is displayed. When a suspicious person appears, an event code ("105") is output from the surveillance camera system 60 or the face authentication server 80, and "suspicious person information" or the like is displayed. When the rental machine CT attached to the slot machine S is not replenished, the hall computer 90 outputs an event code ("798") and displays "suspicious person information" and the like. The text display includes characters, figures, symbols, etc., and may be in any manner as long as it can be recognized by employees.

In addition, the mobile terminal device 40 does not directly hold the image file, but holds the information of the path to the file so that the data volume can be reduced. In addition, the mobile terminal device 40 also holds information that can be used to determine whether the alarm information has been read or not so that the content of the alarm information can be confirmed later even if it cannot be confirmed immediately during work.
The image attached to the alarm information or the path to the image file may be a moving image. Also, the moving image may be a live-broadcast moving image delivered directly from the monitoring camera system 60 .

Next, control regarding audio distribution of alarm information will be described. FIG. 43 is a sequence diagram for audio distribution of alarm information, and FIG. 44 is a flow chart for processing when distributing alarm information.
The audio distribution of alarm information is a process of converting text information into audio information and transmitting the audio to the conference room of the corresponding group when alarm information occurs. It operates with the transmission of data from the bridge server 20 as a trigger, and processing is performed when audio distribution is selected for each event code on the alarm information filter screen 150 (FIG. 8) of the management tool 33 .

First, when alarm information is generated and an event code is sent from the monitoring camera system 60 to the management server 32 (YES in S501), the management server 32 distributes it to one specified group or distributes it to all groups. It is determined whether to distribute to the SIP clients 36 and 37. When distributing information to one designated group (YES in S502), the management server 32 acquires information on groups in which all SIP clients 36 and 37 are in communication (S504). If distribution is to be made to all logged-in SIP clients 36 and 37 (NO in S502), the group information of the general call is acquired (S505).
When the event code from the hall computer 90 is transmitted to the management server 32 (NO in S501), the management server 32 acquires information on the distribution target group (S503).
The management server 32 makes a request to the alarm information audio distribution 31 in order to distribute the audio data to the distribution target group (S506). The alarm information audio distribution 31 attempts to synthesize the text data into speech (S507), and if the speech synthesis succeeds (YES in S508), the audio data is transmitted to the SIP server 35 (S509), and the audio data is sent to the SIP server 35. It is distributed to the clients 36 and 37 (S510). If the voice synthesis fails (NO in S508), the alarm information voice delivery 31 outputs a log and terminates without transmitting the voice data to the SIP server (S511).

<<Control when opening and closing the game machine>>
The distribution control of the alarm information has been explained, but in more detail, the mode of controlling the process of distributing the alarm information in response to an event occurring in the game hall 1 will be explained.
Control regarding alarm information will be described with reference to the sequence diagrams and flow charts shown in FIGS. FIG. 45 is a sequence diagram when the gaming machine is opened and closed due to trouble occurring in the gaming machine, and FIG. 46 is a flowchart relating to processing when the gaming machine is opened and closed. FIG. 47 is a flow chart for distributing alarm information or the like after the game machine is opened/closed.

First, the customer M who is playing a game presses the call button of the machine information display device K when the pachinko machine P is jammed with balls or when the slot machine S has an error in the hopper due to running out or the like and the game cannot be played. is pressed to call the employee MS. The hall computer 90 transmits "call" of the event code ("005") as information indicating that the call button is pressed to the management server 32 via the bridge server 20 (S601). When the management server 32 selects audio distribution for the event code "call" on the alarm information filter screen 150 (FIG. 8) of the management tool 33 (YES in S602), the management server 32 performs the above-described alarm information audio distribution processing. (S500) If the event code ("005") of "call" does not select audio distribution (NO in S602), the above-described alarm information distribution processing is performed (S400). The alarm information distributed as text data is displayed on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40 by characters such as "Call", "Please go to the 3rd course", and the like. Since the event code is distributed as text data, the mobile terminal device 40 does not need to have a database for converting the event code, and the capacity of the program can be reduced. In addition, by displaying the contents of the alarm information in characters or the like on the display screen 43, it becomes easy to confirm the contents of the alarm information.

The employee MS who owns the mobile terminal device 40 to which the notification has been made rushes to the game machine to deal with the trouble, so as to release the lock mechanism of the game machine. By entering the number and pressing the unlock request button 393, the SIP client 36 requests the management server 32 to unlock the gaming machine (S603). The management server 32 retains the unlock data (S604) and requests the hall computer 90 to unlock the gaming machine (S605). The hall computer 90 unlocks the target gaming machine (S606).

In this control, even if the alarm information is not distributed, the employee MS may rush to the island facility HS and request the unlocking of the lock mechanism.
The lock mechanism is a lock mechanism provided on the side of the island facility HS that closes the game machine with a contracting wire attached to the frame of the game machine, or a lock mechanism that fixes a key cylinder for opening and closing the game machine. is not particularly limited. In addition, although the unlocking of the lock mechanism for each gaming machine has been described, when unlocking, the lock mechanism may be unlocked for each unit of a plurality of machines.
Although the unlocking of the lock mechanism of the game machine has been explained via the hall computer 90, it can be released from the mobile terminal device 40 via infrared communication or wireless communication, via the machine information display device K, directly to the game machine, or to the lock mechanism. A signal may be directly transmitted to release the lock mechanism of the gaming machine. There is no particular limitation as long as information indicating which SIP client 36 or 37 has requested unlocking of the lock mechanism is stored and can be collated in a process to be described later.

Next, the employee MS opens and closes the gaming machine with the key in order to deal with the trouble of the gaming machine whose lock mechanism has been released. When the game machine is opened and closed, a door open signal is transmitted from the game machine to the hall computer 90, and the hall computer 90 receiving the door open signal sends the event code (“010”) “door open” to the bridge server. 20 to the management server 32 (S701).
The management server 32 checks whether it is the gaming machine that requested unlocking (S702), and if there is a SIP client 36/37 that requested unlocking (YES in S702), the SIP client 36/37 is distributed. It is excluded from the object (S703). In this way, by excluding the SIP clients 36 and 37 that have requested unlocking, there is no need to notify the employee MS who requested unlocking again, so useless distribution can be avoided. In addition, the employee MS who requested the unlocking may misunderstand the information, and he or she can devote himself to the work and process quickly without unnecessary information.

If there is no game machine that requested unlocking and the game machine is opened and closed (NO in S702), the management server 32 determines whether the door of the game machine has been illegally forced open or the lock mechanism of the game machine is abnormal. Then, the event code (for example, "099") is rewritten as "unauthorized door opening" (S704).
When audio distribution is selected for the event code on the alarm information filter screen 150 (FIG. 8) of the management tool 33 (YES in S705), the management server 32 performs the above-described alarm information audio distribution processing (S500), If audio distribution is not selected for the event code (NO in S705), the above-described alarm information distribution processing is performed (S400).
Note that even when audio is being delivered (S500), the alarm information delivery process (S400) may be performed at the same time, and the alarm information may be displayed on the display screen 43. FIG. It is also possible to distribute both (S400, S500) instead of either one.
In this way, the game machine requesting unlocking and the game machine whose door is opened are collated (S702), so that unauthorized opening and closing of the game machine can be quickly and easily detected. In addition, the employee MS can be confirmed on the display screen 43 by characters ("123 series door open", "door open", "123 series unauthorized door open", "unauthorized door open", etc.) or images ( From S704 to S400), it becomes possible to notify by voice (S704 to S500).

In addition, the event code "door open" transmits an abnormal signal from the hall computer 90 to the monitoring camera system 60, and the monitoring camera system 60 zooms the monitoring camera 61 to the game machine, It is also conceivable to use it as an opportunity to take an image of M. In this way, it is also possible to attach the face image and moving image of the visiting customer M who is playing a game to the alarm information and distribute it. In addition, by being notified of the "unauthorized door opening" in the alarm information, the employee MS can rush to the site while checking the situation with the distributed face image and video, enabling an accurate and prompt response. is.
It should be noted that the process of distributing alarm information when an "unauthorized door opening" has occurred can be performed even during a group call by distributing it to a specific employee, for example, only to the leader of the group call or the person in charge of the hall. well. A group call may be set in advance to distribute alarm information by specifying an employee who can deal with fraudulent acts even in a group call.

In this way, by presetting the employees to whom the alarm information is to be delivered according to the type of error, it becomes possible to clarify the division of roles and respond quickly. At that time, the employee registers work that can be done by himself/herself in the management server 32 from the portable terminal device 40, the leader of the group call or the like approves it, and the management server 32 carries out the work distributed by the alarm information even in the group call. It is also possible to employ a system that selects employees who are capable of doing so and distributes the alarm information.

<<Control when a person requiring caution visits the store>>
Further, a detailed description will be given of a mode in which processing for distributing alarm information when a person requiring caution MB comes to the game hall 1 is controlled.
Control relating to alarm information will be described with reference to the sequence diagrams, flow charts, etc. shown in FIGS. FIG. 48 is a sequence diagram when the caution-requiring person MB comes to the store, and FIG. 49 is a flowchart relating to control processing when the caution-requiring person MB comes to the store. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the control of person matching performed by the face authentication server 80 to identify the caution-requiring person MB. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data to be transmitted to the face authentication server 80. As shown in FIG. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data indicating the matching result from the face authentication server 80. As shown in FIG. FIG. 53 is an example of alarm information displayed on the mobile terminal device 40. As shown in FIG. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram of an image capture of a system for identifying gotgroups.

First, the process of notifying the visit of the person requiring caution MB by alarm information starts with the process of collation by the face authentication server 80 in order to identify the person requiring caution MB (S900).
The face authentication server 80 detects images from other stores stored in the database of the face authentication server 80 or images accumulated in its own store by the monitoring camera 61 installed at the entrance of the game hall 1 or the like. It is compared with the obtained face image to determine whether or not they match (S901). In this process, if the matching rate between the face image data stored in the database and the customer M does not reach a certain level, it is determined that they do not match, and the matching of the next customer M is repeated (S901). NO). Then, the face image data of the face image detected by the monitoring camera 61 (for example, the captured image 600 in FIG. 57) and the face image stored in the database of the face authentication server 80 (the face represented by the face authentication number 583 described later). image data 605 (for example, the image of FID001), and if it is determined that they match (YES in S901), the monitoring camera system 60 is notified that the suspected caution-requiring person MB has visited the store (S902). The monitoring camera system 60 that has received the notification extracts an image from the video recorded in the monitoring camera system 60 (S903), and transmits the extracted image together with the command data 67 shown in FIG. 51 to the face authentication server 80 (S904).

Here, the command data 67 includes a "start code" indicating the key number of the extracted image, a "version" indicating the version of the application software, and a "equipment "device number" indicating the number of the surveillance camera 61 that recorded the extracted image; "year/month/day" and "hour/minute/second" indicating the date and time when the extracted image was recorded; and the amount of data of the extracted image. "Image data size" shown in FIG.
By using the "year/month/day" and "hour/minute/second" indicating the date and time of recording as the command data 67, an image can be extracted from the video recorded by the monitoring camera system 60 even later and used again for verification and confirmation work. can do. In addition, by using "year/month/day" and "hour/minute/second" indicating the date and time of recording as the command data 67, it is not always necessary to store the image in the face authentication server 80 if there is recording data of the monitoring camera system 60. Instead, only the data recorded by the surveillance camera system 60 need be stored, and the amount of data in the face authentication server 80 can be reduced.
Further, by encrypting the face image data 605, for example, even if an image is leaked out, the image cannot be viewed easily.

Next, the face authentication server 80 recognizes a plurality of faces shown in the image based on the image and the command data 67 sent from the monitoring camera system 60, and calculates the number of faces. The face authentication server 80 collates the image data for the number of identified faces (S905), and transmits the result for the number of people who have been collated together with the image to the monitoring camera system 60 (S906). FIG. 52 shows an example of matching result data 84 indicating the matching result from the face authentication server 80. As shown in FIG.

The matching result data 84 includes a "start code" indicating the key number of the extracted image, a "data size" indicating the amount of data in the matching result data 84, an "authentication number" indicating the number of authenticated faces in the image, and an image "Authentication No." indicating a value obtained by sequentially encoding the face authenticated in the image, "Authentication type" indicating the type of face authentication, and coordinates of the face and the authenticated position shown in the image as shown in FIG. "Face authentication area" indicating the face authentication server 80, "matching rate" indicating the matching rate with the face image registered in the database of the face authentication server 80, and the date and time when the face image registered in the database of the face authentication server 80 was registered The “year/month/day” and “hour/minute/second” shown are stored as data to be transmitted to the monitoring camera system 60 .

Then, the face authentication server 80 repeatedly compares the items from "authentication No." to "hour/minute/second" shown in FIG. Data 84 is transmitted to surveillance camera system 60 . By authenticating a plurality of faces from one piece of image data in this way, even if a group of goto masters, which will be described later, come to the store, it is possible to recognize them as a group from one of the persons requiring caution MB. You can instantly recognize a group of goto masters. Therefore, it is possible to quickly notify the employees of the existence of the goto group.
In addition, by providing an "authentication type" that indicates the type of face authentication, it is possible to classify such as a person requiring attention MB, a good customer, or a new customer. can also be used for the analysis of

Further, by analyzing the matching rate with the face image data 605 registered in the database of the face authentication server 80, the "matching rate" can be used as an index of whether or not the person MB is a person requiring attention MB. . A person in charge or the like who operates the surveillance camera system 60 can carry out the registration work to the database while being sure that the person is the person requiring attention MB. Therefore, by determining a predetermined "collation rate" as a threshold and registering it, it is possible to prevent erroneous registration as a caution-requiring person MB. In addition, there are methods for collating faces by analyzing and comparing each of the feature points of the “eyes,” “nose,” “mouth,” and “ears,” which are features of the face, and methods for comparing the contours of the entire face and each feature. A method of collating faces by comparing the positions of "eyes", "nose", "mouth", "ears", etc. is conceivable. In this way, it is conceivable to make the matching rate more accurate.
It should be noted that although the work of registering a person requiring caution MB to the database is judged by a person, if the "verification rate" exceeds a predetermined value, the probability of being a person requiring caution MB is high. The work of registering the person requiring attention MB to the database may be performed automatically, and the work of the operator can be reduced by automating the registration.

Next, the person in charge or the like who is operating the monitoring camera system 60 judges from the results sent from the face authentication server 80, and if he/she confirms that he/she is the person requiring attention MB (YES in S907), face authentication is performed. A registration instruction is issued to the server 80 (S908), and data having the same content as the command data 67 is registered in the face authentication server 80 (S909).
The data registered in the face authentication server 80 include a "start code" indicating the key number of the extracted image, a "version" indicating the software version, and a ""equipmentcode","equipmentnumber" indicating the number of the surveillance camera 61 that recorded the extracted image, "year/month/day" and "hour/minute/second" indicating the date and time when the extracted image was recorded, and the amount of extracted image data and face image data 605 obtained by encrypting the extracted image.
If the person in charge of operating the monitoring camera system 60 is not the person requiring caution MB, he or she does not register as the person requiring caution MB and waits until the visit of the person requiring caution MB is notified (S907). NO).

Next, when the person requiring caution MB is registered in the face authentication server 80, the surveillance camera system 60 acquires information on the position of the surveillance camera 61 that last captured the person requiring attention MB (S802). The monitoring camera system 60 selects the event code (“105”) and “suspicious person information” (S803), and sends the management server 32 the event code (“105”), an image or video of the face, appearance, etc., and the monitoring camera 61 The position information is transmitted and notified (S804).
The management server 32 acquires the information of all the logged-in SIP clients 36 and 37 (S805), and notifies all the SIP clients 36 and 37 of the radio wave intensity to acquire the position information of the SIP clients 36 and 37. Data is requested (S806). Each of the SIP clients 36 and 37 measures the radio wave intensity (S807), and transmits the radio wave intensity and the connected access point number to the management server 32 (S808). The management server 32 calculates the positions and distances of the SIP clients 36 and 37 and the caution person MB from the position information of the monitoring camera 61, the position of the caution person MB, and the position information of the SIP client (S809). The management server 32 stores this information in the database of the DB server 25 (S810), displays "suspicious person information" or the like in text as alarm information to all the SIP clients 36 and 37, and transmits images or moving images (S811). ).

FIG. 53 is an example of alarm information displayed by the SIP client 36 on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40. As shown in FIG.
Alarm information detail screens 3901 and 3910 represent transitions from the alarm information list screen 380 (FIG. 31) to the detail screens. Then, an alarm information detail screen 3901 (FIG. 53(A)) transitioned to the detail screen is displayed first, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the alarm information detail screen 3910 (FIG. 53(B)) is automatically displayed.
The alarm information detail screen 3901 is provided with a distribution date/time display 3902 that indicates the time when the suspicious person information was distributed. In the center of the alarm information detail screen 3901, a face image display section 3903 is provided in which a face image or appearance captured by the face authentication server 80 or the surveillance camera system 60 is displayed. Also, a switch button 3904 is provided so that it is possible to switch not only to images but also to moving images. A position number 3905 of the camera that captured the image is displayed above the face image display portion 3903 . Below the alarm information detail screen 3901, the SIP client 36 and a distance display section 3906 for displaying the position or the distance from the camera position where the surveillance camera system 60 last captured the person requiring attention MB are provided.
The distance display section 3906 expresses the distance using graphics, characters, and colors. For example, if the color of the distance display section 3906 is red, it represents a near state, and if it is blue, it represents a far state. Also, if the slanting line between the figures displayed as perspective is closer to either side, the perspective is expressed. The distance between near and far may be represented by the color of the square figure surrounded by the face image display section 3903 described above. Furthermore, the distance may be expressed numerically.

The alarm information detail screen 3910 expresses the layout of the game hall 1, and displays the position of the person requiring caution MB. It is displayed that the person requiring attention MB is in the corridor of three courses, and the position of the SIP client 36 is represented by MS. The position (CH3) of the camera that captured the person requiring attention MB is also represented. The alarm information detail screen 3910 displays the captured camera position (CH3), so that the employee MS can recognize the state in which the sent image was taken, so that the employee MS can accurately grasp the situation. be able to.
With the above configuration, by notifying the employee MS of accurate information, it is possible to move while confirming image information such as the face and appearance of the person requiring attention MB on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40. Therefore, it is possible to rush to the site while quickly grasping the person MB requiring attention. In addition, it is possible to call attention to the employee MS who is close to the person to be careful MB based on the information such as the position and distance from the person to be careful MB. In addition, since it is also possible to notify by moving images, it is possible to grasp the situation of the trouble more clearly than the image, and it is possible to respond more quickly.
Note that the layout may be displayed by two-way communication in real time so that not only the static image but also the movements of the person requiring attention MB and the employee MS (client 36) are displayed in real time.

<Controls to analyze and identify groups that cause fraudulent acts or artificial troubles>
A detailed description will be given of a mode of controlling the processing of analyzing and identifying groups that cause fraudulent acts and artificial troubles, which are processed by the gaming center 1 and the chain store head office 500 .
49 to 50 and 54 to 66 are sequence diagrams, flow charts, outline diagrams, explanation diagrams, etc., and control for specifying a goto group will be described. FIG. 48 is a sequence diagram when a person requiring caution visits the store, and FIG. 49 is a flowchart relating to control processing when a person requiring caution visits the store. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the control of person verification by the face authentication server 80 to identify a person requiring caution. FIG. 54 is an overall configuration diagram of a system for game arcades that specifies a godgroup. FIG. 55 is a sequence diagram of the group code creation processing of the system for specifying a goto group. FIG. 56 is a flow chart of the group code creation processing of the system for specifying a goto group. Figures 57 and 58 are schematic diagrams of captured images of the system for identifying gotgroups. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram of each server in the system for specifying a goto group. FIG. 60 is a conceptual diagram of a system for identifying gotgroups. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram of an example of group code data. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data of the face authentication number 583 and pseudo data. 63, 64, and 65 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of screens of the mobile terminal device 40. FIG. FIG. 66 is a flow chart of extraction processing of the system for specifying a god group.

First, the control of the game arcade system for specifying a god group will be described using sequence diagrams, flowcharts, schematic diagrams, explanatory diagrams, etc., for specifying a god group.
In the game hall 1, it is determined whether or not the player M captured by the surveillance camera 61 is the person requiring caution MB. 48 and 49), it is compared with the face image data 605 stored in the face authentication server 80, and it is determined whether or not the person is a cautionary person MB (S901 in FIGS. 48 and 50). When it is determined that the cautionary person MB has visited the game hall 1 of store A (YES in S901 in FIGS. 48 and 50), the captured image shown in FIG. From 600, suspicious data 584 are created as numbers for managing the files of the face image data 606 of persons (MG2 to MG5) other than the face image data 605 of the person requiring caution MB, and are stored for the number of persons (S1012). Further, the system is put on standby until the person requiring attention MB comes to the store (NO in S901 in FIGS. 48 and 50).

For example, in the amusement center 1 of store A, the file name of the face image data 606 of the suspected person (MG2 to MG5) captured mainly by the person requiring attention MB is the number "GID001 to GID004" of the suspected data 584. As shown in FIG. 58, in game hall 1 of store B, which is another store, suspicious data 584 is used as the file name of face image data 606 of suspected persons (MG2, MG6 to MG8) captured mainly by person requiring caution MB. number (GID10001 to GID10004). By creating the suspect data 584, it becomes possible to assume that a person (such as MG) photographed together with the person requiring caution MB is a member of the goto group and mark it. However, at this stage, the person is recorded as a Suspect rather than a Person of Interest.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 62, shop data 582 for distinguishing shops, face authentication number 583 as a file number for managing face image data 605, suspicious data 584 as a file number for managing face image data 606, and Photographing date/time data 585 indicating the date and time when the face image data 605 was photographed is created, and these data are transmitted to the face authentication server 580 of the chain store headquarters 500 (S1013). In addition, depending on the location where the image is taken, the transmitted data may be accompanied by data indicating the rental unit price of the game medium.
The date and time of the shooting date and time data 585 can be used for verification when an incident occurs, and can also be used to increase credibility when matching the face image data 606 . These prevent misidentification and determination of a visitor M who accidentally appears as a person requiring caution MB as a person requiring caution MB.
The data transmitted from many stores are stored in the face authentication server 580 of the chain store headquarters 500 as shown in FIG. By collecting face image data 606 from many shops in a wide range in this way, it is possible to perform matching in a wide range and with high accuracy.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 60, the data aggregated from many shops are extracted by an extraction process (S1100), which will be described later, so that the general public is not misidentified.
Using the face authentication number 583 as a key, the same face authentication number 583 is extracted, and it is checked whether or not the same person exists in the face image data 605 of the extracted doubt data 584 (S1015). As shown in FIG. 60, the same FID001 is extracted from the transmitted FID001, and among the suspicious data 584 in it, it is determined that the persons of GID001 transmitted from A store and GID10001 transmitted from B store are the same. If so (YES in S1015), as shown in FIGS. 59, 60 and 61, the group code 586 is created as G001 as a goto group of FID001 (S1016). At the same time, the suspected data 584 is rewritten, and a new face authentication number 583, for example, FID002, is assigned as a person requiring caution MB (S1017). By rewriting the suspected data 584 with the caution person MB, it is possible not only to quickly grasp the caution person MB but also to specify many caution person MBs.

Then, the group code 586 created as shown in FIG. 61 is assigned a number for each group and stored in the face authentication server 580 of the chain store headquarters 500 (S1018). As for the group code 586, for example, in G001, FID001, FID002, and FID056 are shown as the file names recognized as the group as the face authentication numbers 583. FIG. In addition, the face authentication server 580 stores not only the face authentication number 583 but also the face image data 605 and the shooting date/time data 585, which are the suspect data 584 in FIG. do. This storage process makes it possible to store and analyze a large amount of data in the future. The group code 586 makes it possible to recognize that the person requiring attention MB forms a group, and not only facilitates the management of the goto group, but also when some incident occurs or is likely to occur in the future. are used for analysis such as search/extraction of face image data 605 and 606.

After that, the face authentication server 580 of the chain store headquarters 500 distributes the face image data (605 or 606) indicated by the group code 586 and the face authentication number 583 to all stores via the Internet line 588 (S1019). By collecting the suspected data 584, collating it, and distributing the face image data 605 and 606 to other stores with the face authentication number 583 as a management file, it is possible to quickly grasp the goto group and prevent shortages in advance. It is possible to prepare for the situation of
The distributed group code 586 and the face image data (605 or 606) having the face authentication number 583 as the file name are stored in the face authentication server 80 of each game arcade 1. FIG.

Then, the control of the system for the game arcade described above is repeatedly performed, and as the face image data (605 or 606) is accumulated, the accuracy of the analysis of the group is improved, and a large number of persons requiring attention MB can be grasped. Become. Until now, human beings have made comprehensive judgments based on individual videos and images to determine groups of people. Therefore, the more face image data (605 or 606) with fewer errors, the more accurate determination can be made.
Also, in this system, management is performed for each group code 584, but if the same person is found beyond the group code 584 by regularly collating whether the same person exists elsewhere, Group codes 584 can be unified into a large population. In this way, it is possible to grasp the goto group in a chain reaction, and it is possible to quickly grasp the visit of the goto group from one person MB who needs attention.
Furthermore, since the chain store headquarters 500 distributes the group code 584, face authentication number 583, and face image data 605 not only to its own store but also to other stores, it is possible to quickly distribute information between other stores over a wide range. store can be alerted.

Next, the extraction process (S1100) will be described with reference to FIGS. 59, 62 and 66. FIG. The extraction process (S1100) determines whether or not the same face authentication number 583 exists in different data numbers as shown in FIG. This process is continuously repeated until the same face authentication number 583 is found (NO in S1101). If the same face authentication number 583 is found (YES in S1101), the suspicious data 584 in the data numbers shown in FIGS. 59 and 62 are extracted (S1103). For example, GID001, GID002, GID003, GID10001, GID10002, and GID10003 are extracted from the extracted suspect data 584 .

Next, among the data (S1103) extracted from the face authentication server 580 provided in the chain store head office 500, priority is given to the face authentication number 583 that appears in the area where the gaming machine with the highest rental unit price of the game medium is installed. This is a process of registering as data for discrimination (S1104).
For example, in an area where a pachinko machine P is installed, if there are three areas where the unit price of rental balls is 4 yen, 1 yen, and 0.5 yen, the pachinko machine P with a high rental unit price of game media is installed. Data captured by a camera that captures a four-circle area is preferentially extracted (YES in S1104). In the gaming hall 1 of each arcade, the face authentication number 583, the suspected data 584, and the photographing date/time data 585 are supplied in advance from the face authentication server 80 along with data for distinguishing between high rate and low rate (for example, unit price of 4 yen, 1 yen, rental tokens, etc.). 20 yen, 5 yen per unit price) is attached to the face authentication server 581 of the chain store head office 500 .
With the above structure, goto groups often target high-rate gaming machines and engage in goto acts, and it is possible to verify events in which the amount of damage caused by goto acts is large, and quickly identify goto groups from a large amount of data. It becomes easier and quick delivery to each shop becomes possible.

Next, the store data 582 determines whether or not the extracted data (S1103) are data shot at the same store (S1105). Here, if it is determined that the data is not taken at the same store (NO in S1105), it is less likely that a general customer who happens to be photographed is a member of the person requiring caution. Register (S1113) and end. In the case of the data of other shops, compared with the case of the same shop, the general person is less likely to be misidentified as a person requiring caution, so the judgment is highly accurate.

Next, if it is determined that the data was shot at the same store (YES in S1105), it is determined from the shooting date/time data 585 whether or not the data was shot on the same day (S1107). Here, if it is determined that the data was not taken on the same day (NO in S1107), it is unlikely that a general customer who happened to be photographed is misidentified as a member of the person requiring caution, so it is registered as data for discrimination. (S1113) and ends. In the case of data shot on other days, compared to the data shot on the same day, there is less chance of misidentifying a general person as a person requiring caution, so the determination is highly accurate.

Next, if it is determined that the data was shot on the same day (YES in S1107), it is determined whether the data is data after a predetermined time has passed since the shooting date/time data 585 (S1109). Here, the predetermined time may be freely set from about 10 minutes to about 1 hour.
If it is determined that the data has not passed the predetermined time (NO in S1109), the continuously captured face image data 606 may have been erroneously transmitted. It returns to collation of number 583 (S1115). With this processing, it is possible to eliminate the misidentification of ordinary people as one of the persons requiring caution due to continuous photographing, and it is possible to accumulate highly accurate data.
Next, if it is determined that the data has passed the predetermined time (YES in S1109), there is a high possibility that the caution person MB has been in contact with the caution person MB after the predetermined time has passed after entering the store. Since there is a high possibility that the user is a member of the group, the user is registered as discriminating data and ends (S1113). With such control, it is possible to discriminate members of the goto group in the same store from data obtained in a short period of time.

In addition, on the same day at the same store, a person requiring caution MB approaches a person MG other than the face image data 605 of the person requiring caution MB after a predetermined time, for example, 10 minutes, approaches a predetermined number of times (for example, three times), and the face image data is displayed. 606, the suspected data 584 may be rewritten as the suspected person M with the highest suspicion, and the group code 584 may be assigned to the person requiring caution MB for management. By doing so, even if an ordinary person happens to appear in an image as a person to be watched MB, it can be quickly grasped without being misidentified as a goto group at the same store on that day.

Next, FIGS. 63 to 65 show an example of notifying the employee MS of the goto group when the above-mentioned person requiring caution MB visits the store.
FIG. 63 or FIG. 64 shows an alarm information detail screen 3901 of the display screen 43 of the portable terminal device 40 described above, and a face image display section 3903 displaying a face image or appearance captured by the surveillance camera system 60 . It shows the goto group of MB. A group code 584 and a face authentication number 583 are used to notify the employee MS of the goto group and the person requiring attention MB.

FIG. 65 shows an alarm information detail screen 3910. FIG. The alarm information detail screen 3910 expresses the layout of the game hall 1, and displays the position of the person requiring caution MB. It is displayed that the person requiring attention MB is in the corridor of three courses, and the position of the SIP client 36 is represented by MS. The position (CH3) of the camera that captured the person requiring attention MB is also represented. The alarm information detail screen 3910 displays the captured camera position (CH3), so that the employee MS can recognize the state in which the sent image was taken, so that the employee MS can accurately grasp the situation. be able to.

With the above configuration, by notifying the employee MS of accurate information, it is possible to move while confirming image information such as the face and appearance of the person requiring attention MB on the display screen 43 of the mobile terminal device 40. Therefore, it is possible to rush to the site while quickly grasping the person MB requiring attention. In addition, it is possible to call attention to the employee MS who is close to the person to be careful MB based on the information such as the position and distance from the person to be careful MB. In addition, since it is also possible to notify by moving images, it is possible to grasp the situation of the trouble more clearly than the image, and it is possible to respond more quickly.
In addition, since a group of caution-requiring persons MB gathering at a specific place in the game hall 1 is displayed, it is possible to predict in advance the danger that the goto group will gather and cause some kind of dishonesty. Furthermore, it is also possible to inform the employees MS that a group call is gathering among the employees through a group call.

In particular, a cautionary person MB with a group code 586 is located in an area where gaming machines with a high rental unit price, such as a pachinko machine P with a rental ball unit price of 4 yen or a slot machine S with a token rental unit price of 20 yen, are installed. is staying and another person to be careful MB with the same group code 586 intrudes into the same area with a high rental unit price, display it on the monitor of the mobile terminal device 40, the hall computer 90, or the monitoring camera system 60, The employee MS may be notified. With the above configuration, it is possible to prevent damage caused by goto group's cheating to a game machine installed in an area with a high rental unit price. In particular, in areas where gaming machines with high rental unit prices are installed, there is a high probability that cheating will occur, and the amount of damage will also be large. effect is higher.
Note that the display of the alarm information detail screen 3910 may express not only a still image but also the movement of the person requiring attention MB and the employee MS in real time by performing two-way communication in real time.

In addition, when there is the above-mentioned "unauthorized door opening", the monitoring camera 61 mainly uses the above-described processing of S800 and S1000 to detect the persons requiring caution MB who are visiting the store, mainly the persons assigned the group code 586. may be monitored for their location and behavior, and may be alerted to employees.

In this system, the chain store amusement center 1 and the chain store head office 500 are separate systems, but there is no particular limitation, and the configuration is such that it is completed within one amusement center 1 or within the face authentication server 80. It may be a system with
In addition, this system may be used as a system for grasping GOTO Groups nationwide in cooperation with a third party organization.

<Control of Individual Face Authentication Device in Game Hall System>
A detailed description of how the individual face authentication device 800 used for fraud monitoring and sales in the game hall 1 is controlled will be described in detail using the sequence diagrams, flow charts, schematic diagrams, explanatory diagrams, etc. shown in FIGS. 74 to 93. do.
FIG. 74 is a flowchart of main processing. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of member processing. FIG. 76 is a flow chart of non-member processing. FIG. 77 is a flow chart of non-member processing. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of common processing. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of recorded data capture processing. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of face authentication matching processing. FIG. 81 is a time chart of recorded data capture images. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of face authentication server matching processing. FIG. 83 is a flow chart of leaving processing. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of abnormality processing. FIG. 85 is a flow chart of the personal identification number registration process. FIG. 86 is a sequence diagram showing processing when a member takes a seat. FIG. 87 is a sequence diagram showing processing when a non-member takes a seat. FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram of a capture image instruction list 823. As shown in FIG. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing a state of inputting a personal identification number. FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram of the input state of the personal identification number viewed from above. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing items determined by the face authentication engine installed in the individual face authentication device 800. FIG. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram of a form output from the hall computer 90. FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram of a form output from the face authentication server 80. FIG.

<<main processing>>
FIG. 74 shows a flowchart of the main process (S2000) of individual face authentication device 800. As shown in FIG. When a player sits down in front of the pachinko machine P, each camera 69 of the individual face recognition device 800 equipped with a face recognition engine captures the face of the person and determines whether or not the person is seated ( S2101), when it is detected that a person is seated (YES in S2101), it enters a standby state and starts video recording (S2102). Then, it is determined whether or not the membership card 550 has been inserted, and the process proceeds to membership processing (S2200). If it is determined that the membership card 550 has not been inserted (NO in S2103), the process proceeds to non-membership processing (S2300). After that, regardless of which processing is completed, the process shifts to the common process (S2400), and these processes (S2103 to S2104) are repeated until the user leaves the seat (shift from NO in S2104 to S2103). When the member card 550 or the guest card 551 is ejected and leaves the seat, or when the valuable value is all consumed and the player leaves the seat normally without any balls, the leaving process described later is performed (S2500). Main processing ends.

<<Membership processing>>
FIG. 75 shows a flowchart of member processing (S2200) of individual face authentication device 800. As shown in FIG.
A personal identification number is stored in the IC chip 553 of the member card 550 to ensure security against theft, etc. When the personal identification number is entered and matched, processing starts (YES in S2201). Also, this process waits until the password is entered (NO in S2201).
Next, when the personal identification number is entered and matched, the process starts (YES in S2201), and the recording data capture process, which will be described later, is started (S2800). After the recording data capture process (S2800) is performed, the individual face authentication device 800 generates face image data 559 from the captured capture image 600 (S2203), and converts the face image data 559 shown in FIG. Store in area 865 (S2205). At the same time, the individual face authentication device 800 reads the face image data 555 stored in the member card 550 and compares it with the face image data 559 stored in the capture data area 865 (S2209). If the face image data 555 stored in the member card 550 matches the face image data 559 stored in the capture data area 865 (YES in S2209), the individual face authentication device 800 sets the monitoring level to 1 (S2210). , the face image data 559 is stored in the storage data area 864 of the HDD 855 (S2211). In addition, the individual face authentication device 800 transmits the success of face authentication and the machine number to the face authentication server 80 (S2213), and ends the member processing.

In this way, by using the face image data 555 stored in the member card 550, it is possible to compare with the highly reliable and clear face image data 555 without accessing the face authentication server 80. , the processing speed can be increased, and the processing load on the face authentication server 80 can be reduced. In addition, the monitoring level is set to 1 for members who have few troubles at the game hall 1 and whose contact information can be confirmed. It is possible to focus on the monitoring of
In addition, when the face image data 555 stored in the member card 550 and the face image data 559 stored in the capture data area 865 do not match (NO in S2209), the individual face authentication device 800 detects the stolen member card 550. There is a suspicion that there is a problem with the device, so the process shifts to abnormality processing (S3000) and terminates the member processing.

<< Recorded data capture processing >>
FIG. 79 shows a flowchart of recorded data capture processing (S2800) of individual face authentication device 800. FIG.
The individual face authentication device 800 has monitoring levels in consideration of security as shown in FIG. 88, and the timing of capturing the captured image 600 from the recorded data is varied according to the monitoring level. A capture image instruction list 823 is a list representing the instruction signals for this capture. Low monitoring levels are set for highly trusted individuals, such as members and regular customers. Conversely, the higher the monitoring level is, the more the person MB needs attention. By setting the monitoring level in this manner, unnecessary storage is not required, and a large data storage area is not required. In addition, since the processing does not become complicated, the number of accesses to the face authentication server 80 is reduced, and the processing of the individual face authentication device 800 is speeded up. In terms of security, this system can concentrate on monitoring the person who needs attention MB.

When the individual face authentication device 800 receives a capture signal for capturing a face image from the ball lending machine PT, the table information display device K, or the hall computer 90 as shown in FIG. 81 (S2801), the individual face authentication device 800 The recorded data for a total of 3 seconds, ie, 2 seconds after the capture signal is received from the recorded data stored in the recorded data area 863 of the HDD 855 of the HDD 855 of 1 second before, is stored in the captured image extraction area 824, and the captured image extraction area 824 Still image data is extracted from the frames stored in (S2802). The individual face authentication device 800 extracts the best captured image 600 for authentication from the still images (S2803). In particular, by going back one second and collating, it is possible to capture the moment when the face is to be reliably captured in a scene such as an abnormality in the game machine or an operation of the personal identification number without missing. It is also possible to capture and select the clearest image in this frame. These are processed by incorporating software that instantly judges the front view rate and the degree of sharpness.
The individual face authentication device 800 determines whether the captured image 600 is a face facing the front (S2804), and if the face is facing the front (YES in S2804), extracts a front view image. (S2805) If the face is profile (NO in S2804), the profile image is extracted (S2806), and the recorded data capture process (S2800) ends.

<<Face authentication matching process>>
FIG. 80 is a flowchart of face authentication matching processing. The face authentication matching process (S2600) first shifts to the above-described recorded data capture process (S2800), extracts an image from the recorded data, and generates face image data 559 (S2601). Then, it is determined whether or not there is face image data 559 already stored in the individual face authentication device 800 (S2603). When the face image data 559 is not saved (NO in S2603), the individual face authentication device 800 is in the initial state of sitting in front of the gaming machine, so the individual face authentication device 800 checks with the face authentication server 80 to identify the person requiring attention MB. In order to determine whether or not the monitoring level is , the process proceeds to face authentication server matching processing, which will be described later (S2900). If face image data 559 is stored (YES in S2603), individual face authentication device 800 extracts face image data 559 from storage data area 864 of HDD 855 (S2605).

Then, it is determined whether or not the stored face image data 559 and the seated person are the same each time the capture signal is output (S2606). If the person is not the same person (NO in S2606), the process proceeds to an abnormality process described later and ends (S3000). In this manner, fine-grained monitoring can be performed.
If the person is the same person (YES in S2606), the individual face authentication device 800 outputs to the ball lending machine PT an ejectable command to make the card ejectable (S2607). The status is displayed on the liquid crystal operation unit 801 and the LED display section 812 of the ball lending machine PT (S2608). In addition, the individual face authentication device 800 cancels the function of stopping other functions of the ball lending machine PT (supply operation, display of the number of balls held, etc.) (S2609), and sends the matching result and machine number to the face authentication server 80. Send and end (S2613).

<<Face authentication server matching process>>
FIG. 82 is a flowchart of face authentication server matching processing. The face authentication server matching process (S2900) is mainly for the face authentication server 80 to select the monitoring level of non-members.
First, the individual face authentication device 800 saves the face image data 559 of the player M sitting for the first time in the saved data area 864 of the HDD 855 (S2901). The saved face image data 559 is sent to the face authentication server 80 together with the serial number (S2903). The face authentication server 80 first determines whether or not a person requiring caution MB is likely to interfere with business. The facial image data 605 and the transmitted facial image data 559 are collated (S2905). If the face authentication server 80 determines that the person is a person MB requiring attention (YES in S2905), it extracts the face ID (FID) (S2915) and sets the highest monitoring level to 4 (S2917).

Next, when the face authentication server 80 is not the person requiring attention MB (NO in S2905), the face authentication server 80 determines whether the person is a regular customer (S2907). If the customer is a regular customer (YES in S2907), the face authentication number 583 (FID) is extracted (S2911), and the monitoring level is set to the same low monitoring level as the member (S2913). Next, the face authentication server 80 determines whether or not the player M is a new player (S2909) if the player M is not a good player (NO in S2907). If the customer is a new customer (YES in S2909), the face authentication number 583 is newly registered in the table analysis data area 88 or the customer analysis data area 89 of the face authentication server 80 (S2910), and the monitoring level is set to medium level. Level 3 is set (S2923). If the player is a general player M who is not a new player (NO in S2909), the face authentication server 80 sets the monitoring level to middle monitoring level 3 (S2923).
Then, the face authentication server 80 stores the extracted face authentication number 583 (FID) and the face image data 559 sent from the individual face authentication device 800 (S2925), and monitors the extracted face authentication number 583 (FID) and the face image data 559 sent from the individual face authentication device 800 (S2925). The level is transmitted to the individual face authentication device 800 (S2927).

<<Non-member processing>>
76 and 77 show a flowchart of non-member processing S2300.
In non-member processing, it is determined whether or not there is a monitoring level setting (S2301). Since the monitoring level is not set for all non-member players M seated in the first process (NO in S2301), the above-described face authentication matching process is performed (S2600).
Here, if the monitoring level is set (YES in S2301), the individual face authentication device 800 proceeds to each process according to the monitoring level (S2303).

The monitoring level 4 (4 in S2303) is a monitoring level for monitoring the caution required person MB. As one of the monitoring targets, the number of game machine starts is monitored. When the number of start times of the game machine reaches a predetermined number or more (YES in S2305), the process proceeds to face authentication collation processing (S2600) to confirm whether the person is the same person. With such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 is effective in causing a big win by erroneously activating the magnetic sensor by a radio-controlled goto or the like and erroneously activating the switch for judging a big win in a short period of time. Therefore, by determining whether or not the persons playing the game are the same or not based on a predetermined number of times, it is possible to deal with the change of persons in the act of playing a game by a group by means of anomaly processing, which will be described later. intimidating to those who do it.

Monitoring level 3 (S2303-3), or when the number of times the gaming machine has been started has not reached a predetermined number or more (NO in S2305), is a monitoring level for monitoring a person requiring attention MB or a general player M. . As one of the targets of monitoring, the number of difference balls is monitored. When this number reaches the predetermined number or more (YES in S2307), the process proceeds to face authentication matching processing (S2600) to confirm whether the person is the same person. With such a process, the individual face authentication device 800 can determine how much the game machines in which the same person is playing are different, and in particular, it is possible to obtain game media in a short period of time. It is also possible to monitor silly behaviors, and it can also be used as sales information for analysis of new machines.
Next, when there are a predetermined number of balls in hand (YES in S2309), the process proceeds to face authentication matching processing (S2600), and confirms whether it is the same person. With such processing, it is possible to determine how many balls the same person is playing on a gaming machine. It is also possible to monitor behavior. It can also be used as business information for analysis of new machines. In particular, when the balls on hand are the balls acquired today, it is possible to analyze which gaming machine the player is currently playing through.

Next, when the player M wins the jackpot (YES in S2311), the individual face authentication device 800 shifts to face authentication matching processing (S2600) and confirms whether it is the same person. Through such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 can monitor the state in which the same person wins the jackpot. Since the captured image 600 described above captures the recorded data from one second before receiving the jackpot signal, it is determined whether or not the person is the same person, and the image from before the jackpot is stored, so that there is no occurrence of cheating or the like. In some cases, it is also possible to check later. It can also be used as business information for analysis of new machines.

Next, the individual face authentication device 800 divides the balls to the player accompanied by the player M, and if the companion is allowed to play (YES in S2313), the individual face authentication device 800 proceeds to face authentication collation processing (S2600). Make sure you are a person. Through such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 can prevent the stolen guest card 551 from being used, and can also prevent mischief while the user is away from the seat, such as during a break or meal.
Next, when the player M inserts the guest card 551 into the ball lending machine PT (YES in S2314), the process proceeds to face authentication collation processing (S2600) to determine whether it is the same person or whether it is the first processing. After confirmation, the face image data 559 is stored. Through such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 prevents the stolen guest card 551 from being used, and registers a personal identification number to be described later to prevent mischief during breaks, meals, etc. be able to.

Next, when the player M inserts money into the ball lending machine PT (YES in S2315), the individual face authentication device 800 shifts to face authentication matching processing (S2600), and confirms whether it is the same person. . Through such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 prevents the stolen guest card 551 from being used, analyzes how much money has been used by the same person, and uses it to limit the use of money and to call attention. In addition, it can be used as sales information for new machine analysis and the like.
Next, the individual face authentication device 800 shifts to face authentication collation processing when the player M causes the counting unit 805 of the pachinko machine P to activate the counting unit 805 by throwing the obtained balls (YES in S2316). (S2600) to confirm whether it is the same person. Through such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 prevents the stolen guest card 551 from being used, analyzes how much the same person has obtained, and uses it as sales information for analysis of new cards. be able to. Also, even if the counting unit 805 is erroneously operated to increase the number of balls in hand for a period of time, it is possible to capture the criminal act or person, generate and store the face image data 559, and use it for later verification. is possible.

Next, when the player M registers the personal identification number in the guest card 551 on the liquid crystal operation unit 801 of the ball lending machine PT (YES in S2319), the face authentication verification process is started (S2600), and the person is the same person. or whether it is the first processing, and the face image data 559 is stored. Through such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 prevents the stolen guest card 551 from being used, and also prevents mischief by registering a personal identification number, which will be described later, while you are away from your seat for breaks, meals, etc. can do.
When the face authentication process ends (S2600), the individual face authentication device 800 shifts to the personal identification number registration process (S2700), and the non-member process ends.

<<PIN registration process>>
FIG. 85 shows a flow chart of the personal identification number registration process (S2700).
In the ball lending machine PT, not only the member card 550 but also the guest card 551 are provided with a personal identification number in order to prevent theft or mischief during breaks, meals, etc. is registered and the operation of the ball lending machine PT can be stopped. In order to use the lock function, it is necessary to enter a personal identification number (S2701) and register the personal identification number in the ball lending machine PT (S2703). In addition, in order to prevent the user from forgetting the personal identification number or the mischief of notifying the registered personal identification number on purpose, the serial number and the personal identification number are transmitted to the face authentication server 80 or the hall computer 90 and stored (S2705). ). Through these processes, the individual face authentication device 800 can prepare for future troubles.
FIG. 93 shows an example of the personal identification number registration form 81 output when managing the personal identification number stored in the face authentication server 80 when the personal identification number is registered. Items saved by face authentication are face authentication number 583, membership card ID, password, and communication history. By outputting the personal identification number registration form 81, it is possible to quickly deal with the case where the personal identification number is forgotten, or when the personal identification number is intentionally reported while being registered.

<<Common processing>>
FIG. 78 shows a flowchart of common processing (S2400) common to members and non-members.
When an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine (YES in S2401), the individual face authentication device 800 shifts to face authentication matching processing (S2600), confirms whether the person is the same person, and if not the same person, performs abnormality processing. can also be done. In addition, updating and recording of the face image data 559 is possible even for the same person. With such a process, the individual face authentication device 800 can deal with troubles in the gaming machine such as goto, and it is also possible to check the trouble later with an image.
Next, when the player M enters the personal identification number (YES in S2403), the individual face authentication device 800 shifts to face authentication matching processing (S2600) and confirms whether it is the same person. Through such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 can prevent the stolen member card 550 and guest card 551 from being used, and can also prevent mischief while the user is away from the seat during a break, meal, or the like. .
In particular, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the camera 69 is operated until the enter button 843 is pressed after entering the password in the password input display section 845 shown on the liquid crystal operation unit 801 of the ball lending machine PT. Since there are many scenes in which the face is viewed from the front, and the time in which the face is facing the camera 69 is long, capturing an image during this period provides an opportunity to reliably capture the front view. In addition, by extracting the face image during this period, there is a high possibility that a clear image can be obtained, which has the effect of intimidating against theft. In particular, in the capture process (S2800), the image can be captured one second before the password is entered, so it is possible to reliably capture the front view.
Next, when the player M ejects the member card 550 and the guest card 551 (YES in S2405), the individual face authentication device 800 shifts to face authentication collation processing (S2600) and confirms whether it is the same person. do. By such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 can prevent theft of the member card 550 and the guest card 551 and prevent mischief while the user is away from the seat such as during a break or meal.

<<Exit processing>>
FIG. 83 shows a flow chart of the leaving process (S2500) when the player M leaves the seat.
First, it is determined whether or not the membership card 550 is being inserted (S2501). If the member card 550 is being inserted (YES in S2501), the individual face authentication device 800 does not send the member card 550 to the ball lending machine PT until the personal identification number is entered (NO in S2502). is prohibited (S2513) and the ball lending function is stopped (S2515). With such processing, the individual face authentication device 800 can prevent theft of the member card 550 and the guest card 551 and prevent mischief while the user is away from the seat such as during a break or meal.
While the membership card 550 is being inserted (YES in S2501), if the personal identification number is entered (YES in S2502), the individual face authentication device 800 ejects the membership card 550 (S2504), sets the serial number and face authentication number 583. And an end signal is transmitted to the face authentication server 80 and the individual face authentication server 120 (S2509). Then, the face image data 559 is saved in the face authentication server 80 and the individual face authentication server 120 (S2511). In this way, the individual face authentication device 800 can check the image or the like after trouble has occurred. In addition, since it is possible to confirm the replacement of personnel, it can be used as sales information for analysis of new machines.

Next, if there is a guest card 551 or the like and the lock function described above is activated (YES in S2503), the discharge of the member card 550 to the ball lending machine PT is prohibited (S2513) and the ball lending function is activated. Stop (S2515). With such a process, the individual face authentication device 800 can prevent the guest card 551 from being stolen, and can prevent the user from being mischievous while he/she is away from his/her seat such as during a break or meal.
Next, if the guest card 551 or the like is inserted and there is a balance while the guest is away (YES in S2505), the ball lending machine PT is prohibited from discharging the member card 550 (S2513) and the ball lending function is disabled. Stop (S2515). With such a process, the individual face authentication device 800 can prevent the guest card 551 from being stolen, and can prevent the user from being mischievous while he/she is away from his/her seat such as during a break or meal.
Next, when the guest card 551 or the like is inserted and there is a ball in hand while the guest is away (YES in S2507), the member card 550 is prohibited from being ejected from the ball lending machine PT (S2513) and the ball lending function is performed. is stopped (S2515). With such a process, the individual face authentication device 800 can prevent the guest card 551 from being stolen, and can prevent the user from being mischievous while he/she is away from his/her seat such as during a break or meal.

If the non-member leaves the seat other than the above, the individual face authentication device 800 determines that the game is over because the ball lending machine PT has no balance, balls, etc., and recognizes the machine number and face. The number and end signal are transmitted to the face authentication server 80 and the individual face authentication server 120 (S2509). Then, the face image data 559 is saved in the face authentication server 80 and the individual face authentication server 120 (S2511). In this way, the individual face authentication device 800 can check the image or the like after trouble has occurred. In addition, since it is possible to confirm the replacement of personnel, it can be used as sales information for analysis of new machines.

<<Error processing>>
FIG. 84 shows a flowchart of abnormality processing (S3000) which is processing when an abnormality occurs in the control of individual face authentication device 800. FIG.
The individual face authentication device 800 discriminates the type of abnormality described above (S3001), and when prohibiting the discharge of the member card 550 and the guest card 551 of the ball lending machine PT (YES in S3003), the ball lending machine PT In response, a card discharge prohibition command is output (S3005), and the ball lending machine PT cancels a card discharge signal such as a return button from the gaming machine (S3007). In addition, in order to display that the ball lending machine PT prohibits card ejection, the LED display section 812 and the operation display section 802 display card ejection prohibition (S3009). The machine number and an abnormality code for determining the type of abnormality are transmitted to the face authentication server 80 and the individual face authentication server 120 (S3011). The individual face authentication device 800 prohibits ejection of the card until the abnormality that has occurred is processed and the prohibition of ejection of the card is released (NO in S3013). When the abnormality that has occurred is processed and the prohibition of card ejection is lifted (YES in S3013), the individual face authentication device 800 outputs a card ejection enable command to the ball lending machine PT (S3015). In order to display that the card can be ejected, the PT displays the possibility of card ejection on the LED display section 812 and the operation display section 802 (S3017).

<Processing from when a member sits on a gaming machine to when he/she leaves>
Data processing from when the member takes a seat in the gaming machine to when the member leaves the seat in the control of the individual face authentication device 800 will be described with reference to the sequence diagram shown in FIG.
When the individual face authentication device 800 detects that a person is seated by the individual camera 69 by moving body detection, a human body sensor, or the like, the individual face authentication server 820 enters a standby state and starts recording. Then, if the password is entered (YES in S2201), the process shifts to recorded data capture processing (S2800), and the captured image 600 is saved. The individual face authentication server 820 generates face image data 559 from the captured image 600 (S2203). The individual face authentication server 820 reads the face image data 555 stored in the member card 550 and compares it with the face image data 559 stored in the capture data area 865 (S2209). If the face image data 555 stored in the member card 550 matches the face image data 559 stored in the capture data area 865 (YES in S2209), the individual face authentication server 820 sets the monitoring level to 1 (S2210). , the face image data 559 is stored in the storage data area 864 of the HDD 855 (S2211). The individual face authentication server 820 transmits to the face authentication server 80 the machine number, the member ID, and the start signal together with the successful face authentication (S2213). The face authentication server 80 saves the transmitted member ID, serial number, verification result, and start time.

Next, the individual face authentication server 820 starts end processing by pressing the return button 402 of the game machine or the end button of the ball lending machine. begins. When the leaving process ends normally, the individual face authentication server 820 transmits the member ID, the machine number, and the end signal to the face authentication server 80 (S2213). The face authentication server 80 saves the transmitted member ID, serial number, and end time, and ends the control.

<Processing from when a non-member sits on a gaming machine to when he/she leaves>
Data processing from when a non-member sits on a gaming machine to when he/she leaves the seat under the control of the individual face authentication server 820 will be described with reference to the sequence diagram shown in FIG. do.
When the individual face recognition device 800 detects that a person is seated by the camera 69 through motion detection, a human body sensor, or the like, the individual face recognition server 820 enters a standby state and starts recording. Then, since the monitoring level is not set at first, face authentication matching processing is performed to set the monitoring level (S2600), then recording data capture processing is performed (S2800), and the captured image 600 is saved. do. The individual face authentication server 820 generates face image data 559 from the captured capture image 600 (S2601), and stores the face image data 559 in the capture data area 865 (S2901). The individual face authentication server 820 transmits the machine number, the face image data 559 and the start signal to the face authentication server 80 (S2903).

The face authentication device server 80 checks whether the transmitted face image data 559 is a person requiring caution, a regular customer, a new customer, or a general customer (S2905, S2097, S2909), and sets the monitoring level of the player M. (S2913, S2921, S2915). The face authentication device server 80 saves the machine number, face image data 559 and start time (S2925). The face authentication device server 80 transmits the face authentication number 583 and the monitoring level to the individual face authentication server 820 .

Next, the individual face authentication server 820 starts end processing by pressing the return button 402 of the game machine or the end button of the ball lending machine. The individual face authentication server 820 transmits the face authentication number, the serial number and the end signal to the face authentication server 80 . The face authentication server 80 saves the transmitted member ID, serial number, and end time, and ends the control.

<Data saved in the hall computer in the above process>
FIG. 92 shows an example of data stored in the hall computer 90 output as a form 99 .
Shows member ID, face recognition number 583, machine number, game start time and end time, game data "jackpot number, start number (S), number of balls held, number of difference balls" used for new machine analysis and sales analysis can do.

Although the guest card 551 has been described in the present invention, a coin type with an IC chip or a mobile phone with an IC chip may be used instead of the card type.

<Control of scrap processing device in game hall system>
A mode of controlling the scrap processing device 70 when processing the scrap in the game hall 1 will be described in detail using sequence diagrams, flow charts, schematic diagrams, explanatory diagrams, etc. shown in FIGS. 94 to 108. . The chip processing device 70 includes a chip ball server 71 mainly installed at the chain store head office 500, a ball lending machine PT installed for each pachinko machine P of the game hall 1, and a personal portable terminal SM. It is composed by

<<Registration processing of the odd ball by the odd ball processing device in the system for the game hall>>
94 to 98 and 105 to 107 show sequence diagrams, flow charts, outline diagrams, explanatory diagrams, etc. for the control of the scrap ball processing device 70 when the player M in the game hall 1 registers the scrap balls. A detailed description will be given centering on the sequence diagram shown in FIG.
FIG. 94 is a flow chart of application scrap registration processing for registering scrap by application software installed in the personal mobile terminal SM. FIG. 95 is a flow chart of a ball lending machine registration process for registering a ball by the ball lending machine PT. FIG. 96 is a flow chart of a corner ball server registration process for registering a corner ball by the corner ball server 71. FIG. FIG. 97 is a sequence diagram of the process of registering a ball. FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram for registering the edge ball. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of special code creation processing when creating the special code 75 . 106 and 107 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of data stored in the ball server 71. FIG.

First, the player M operates the scrap processing display section 802h of the ball lending machine PT in order to register the remaining scrap after finishing the game (YES in S3221). At that time, the ball lending machine PT shifts to a special code creation process (S3350) and creates a special code 75. Next, the ball lending machine PT displays the address of the ball server 71, the special code 75, the number of balls, the machine number, and the store code in a QR code (registered trademark), which is difficult to identify at a glance, on the ball processing display section 802h. is displayed on the information display unit 815 (S3223). At the same time, the ball lending machine PT transmits the special code 75, the number of balls to be registered, the machine number, the parlor code, and the ball lending unit price to the edge ball server 71 and the hall computer 90 (S3225).

In addition, the player M who started the application software of the personal mobile terminal SM selects the scrap registration process, and the ball lending machine PT reads the information displayed on the information display section 815 of the scrap processing display section 802h. When reading from the camera 872 (S3203), it automatically accesses the edge ball server 71 (S3205), and the personal mobile terminal SM transmits the application code 76, the special code 75, the store code, the machine number and the number of balls ( S3207).

When receiving a registration instruction from the personal mobile terminal SM or the ball lending machine PT, the ball server 71 starts processing (YES in S3241), and receives the special code 75, the machine number, the shop number from the ball lending machine PT. The code, unit price for renting balls and the number of balls are received and stored (S3243).
The card server 71 waits until data for verification is transmitted from the personal mobile terminal SM (NO in S3245). If the data for matching from the personal portable terminal SM is transmitted (YES in S3245), the ball server 71 receives the special code 75, the machine number, the shop code and the number of balls sent from the ball lending machine PT. is collated (S3247).

If the collation result is normal (YES in S3249), the ball server 71 instructs display (S3209) of the number of balls to be registered in the personal mobile terminal SM and whether or not to register (S3211) (S3251). ). The personal portable terminal SM displays whether or not to register (S3211) (S3209), and if so (YES in S3211), instructs the edge ball server 71 to register (S3213). If there is a registration instruction from the personal portable terminal SM (YES in S3257), the ball server 71 stores the application code 76, the special code 75, the machine number, the store code, the unit price for renting balls, and the number of balls (S3259). ). Then, the ball server 71 notifies the personal portable terminal SM and the ball lending machine PT of normality (S3261).
On the other hand, if the collation result is abnormal (NO in S3249), the ball server 71 notifies the personal mobile terminal SM and the ball lending machine PT of the abnormality (S3253), and it is possible that the communication is abnormal. Temporary registration is performed just in case, and the transmitted data is stored for a certain period of time (S3255).
In this way, since the number of balls to be registered is collated by the ball lending machine PT and the ball server 71, even if the player M falsifies the data, the number of balls of the game media to be registered does not match. Registration is not performed, and the game hall 1 can use the system with enhanced security.

The ball lending machine PT waits until notification of a normal signal or an abnormal signal is received from the edge ball server 71 (NO in S3229 and NO in S3231), and if a normal signal is notified from the edge ball server 71 (YES in S3229). , terminate the process. Also, if the ball lending machine PT is notified of an abnormal signal from the ball server 71 (YES in S3231), it saves the data in the hall computer 90 and ends the process (S3233). By storing the data in the hall computer 90 in this way, it is possible to prevent data from being erased due to an abnormality in communication, which is effective for later collation, so that troubles with the player M can be avoided.
If the personal mobile terminal SM receives a normal notification from the card server 71 (S3261), it terminates this process (YES in S3215), and if abnormal notification is received, returns to the process from the beginning (NO in S3215). .
The player M accesses the terminal ball server 71 in advance and downloads the application software of the personal portable terminal SM. At that time, when downloading or performing initial registration, an application code 76 that replaces an ID and a personal identification number required for accessing the edge ball server 71 are registered. In particular, since the application code 76 can be used as an ID without registering personal information such as an address, it is possible to register anonymously by registering a personal identification number in order to improve security, and no troublesome operation is required. It is possible to easily register even a mobile phone that does not have an IC chip.

Here, the above-described special code creation processing (S3350) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special code creation process (S3350), a program to be created is installed in the ball server 71 or the ball lending machine PT. A hexadecimal code generated from random numbers is generated (S3353). The ball server 71 or the ball lending machine PT also encodes the date (S3355). Furthermore, a hexadecimal number generated from random numbers and a code encoding the date are added and encoded (S3357). Then, the ball server 71 or the ball lending machine PT creates the special code 75 by these processes, stores it, and terminates (S3359).
The special code 75 created in this way can be encrypted by using random numbers, and even if it is generated at the same time, the same code will never exist. By using 75 as a key for collation, security is enhanced. Also, by mixing the date data with the special code 75, there is no need to send the date data separately, thereby speeding up the processing.

<<Processing to pay out the oddballs by the oddball processing device in the game hall system>>
99 to 105 and 108, sequence diagrams, flow charts, outline diagrams, explanatory diagrams, etc. are used to control the edge ball processing device 70 when the player M in the game hall 1 pays out edge balls, A detailed description will be given centering on the sequence diagram shown in FIG. FIG. 99 is a flow chart of the application scrap payout process when the scrap payout is performed by the application software installed in the personal portable terminal SM. FIGS. 100 and 101 are flowcharts of the edge ball server payout process by the edge ball server 71. FIG. FIG. 102 is a flow chart of ball lending machine payout processing by the ball lending machine PT. FIG. 103 is a sequence diagram of the process of paying out the odd ball. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram for paying out the odd ball. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display displayed when accessing the terminal server 71 displayed on the personal portable terminal SM.

First, the player M activates the application software of the personal portable terminal SM (YES in S3271), and the personal portable terminal SM inquires the terminal ball server 71 about the application code 76 and the personal identification number (S3273). If there is an inquiry about the personal mobile terminal SM (YES in S3291), the terminal ball server 71 inquires about the application code 76 and the personal identification number (S3293). SM has successfully accessed the terminal server 71 .
The edge ball server 71 reads the data held from the application code 76 (S3297), and displays the number of accumulated balls held by the player M on the reading display screen 871 of the personal mobile terminal SM of the personal mobile terminal SM (S3299). .
The player M operates the reading display screen 871 of the personal mobile terminal SM, selects a store, inputs the machine number, unit price of balls to be paid out, and number of balls to be paid out, and the personal mobile terminal SM receives the store code. , the machine number, the ball unit price and the number of balls to be paid out are transmitted to the odd ball server 71 (S3277). The tip ball server 71 waits until there is a payout instruction (NO in S3301), and if there is a payout instruction from the personal portable terminal SM as described above (YES in S3301), the tip ball server 71 receives the store code, the table Receives the number, unit price of balls and number of balls to be paid out (S3305), compares the number of payouts with the number of stored balls in the edge ball server 71 (S3307), and confirms whether or not the number of balls can be paid out (S3309). If the number of balls to be paid out is not the number that can be paid out (NO in S3309), a confirmation instruction is issued to the personal portable terminal SM to confirm the number of balls to be paid out (S3311). It is urging that there is an error in the setting of the ball unit price or the number of payout balls. In this way, by prompting the player M to make a mistake, the game parlor 1 can reduce troubles with the player M.

When the number of balls that can be paid out is the number (YES in S3309), the edge ball server 71 shifts to special code creation processing and creates a special code (S3350). The terminal ball server 71 transmits the access code, the special code 75, the unit price of balls and the number of balls to be paid out to the personal mobile terminal SM, and the access code, the special code 75, the unit price of balls and the number of payouts are displayed on the reading display screen 871 of the personal mobile terminal SM. An instruction is given to display information such as the number of balls on the information display section 875 (S3315).
The personal portable terminal SM receives the data of the access code, the special code 75, the ball unit price and the number of balls to be paid out from the terminal ball server 71 (S3281), and displays the information display unit 875 as the access code, the special code 75, the ball unit price, and the application data. The information on the code 76 and the number of balls to be paid out is displayed in a display form such as a QR code (registered trademark) that is difficult to identify at a glance (S3283). In this way, by using a display mode that is difficult to distinguish at a glance, it is possible to prevent surrounding players from stealing and pretending to pay out the stored chips.

The player M operates the odd ball processing display section 802h of the ball lending machine PT, and displays the information displayed on the information display section 875, such as the access code, the special code 75, the ball unit price, the application code 76, and the number of payout balls. As indicated by 104, each camera 69 of the ball lending machine PT is instructed to read (YES in S3331).
The ball lending machine PT prepares for reading information from each camera 69 (S3333), reading is performed (S3335), waits until the reading of each camera 69 succeeds (NO in S3337), and each If the reading of the platform camera 69 is successful (YES in S3337), the terminal ball server 71 is automatically accessed using the access code.
The ball lending machine PT transmits the information on the special code 75 read by each camera 69, the ball unit price, the application code 76 and the number of balls to be paid out to the edge ball server 71. If the personal mobile terminal SM succeeds in reading the information on the information display unit 875 from the individual cameras 69, the personal mobile terminal SM ends the process (YES in S3285).
In this way, by using the reading of each camera 69 of the ball lending machine PT, information is transmitted and received with the terminal ball server 71, thereby enhancing the security of communication with other devices and allowing the player M to use the game machine. It is highly convenient because it can be processed while sitting in front of the . In addition, the personal mobile terminal SM can be used as long as it is a mobile phone equipped with a camera for capturing information and a function for displaying information, so even a mobile phone without an IC chip can be used.

The ball server 71 waits until information is received from the ball lending machine PT (NO in S3317), and when the information is received (YES in S3317), the information on the ball lending machine PT is set from the personal portable terminal SM. It compares with the received information and verifies it (S3319). As a result of collation, when the information matches (YES in S3321), the end ball server 71 approves the payout to the ball lending machine PT (S3323). The ball lending machine PT, which has been on standby until receiving approval for dispensing (NO at S3341), receives the approval for dispensing (YES at S3341), and then pays out the balls (S3343). is transmitted (S3345). The ball lending machine PT displays the number of paid out balls on the odd ball processing display section 802h (S3347).
As a result of collation, if the information does not match (NO in S3321), the ball server 71 notifies the ball lending machine PT of the abnormality (S3323), and the ball lending machine PT pays the player M. The processing is ended after urging that there is an error in the setting of the unit price of balls to be put out or the number of balls to be put out. In this way, by prompting the player M to make a mistake, troubles with the player M can be reduced.
In addition, by performing such collation (S3319), since the number of balls to be paid out is collated by the ball lending machine PT and the ball server 71, even if the player M falsifies the data, the number of balls to be paid out is Since the number of balls of the game media does not match, the payout is not performed, and the game hall 1 can use the system with enhanced security.

After approving the payout to the ball lending machine PT (S3323), the ball server 71 updates the data by subtracting the number of balls paid out from the data of the ball server 71 (S3325). The completion is notified to the personal portable terminal SM by e-mail (S3327).
In addition, the e-mail sent to the personal mobile terminal SM contains not only information on the amount of accumulated balls, but also information on registration from the game hall 1 or institution that manages the accumulated balls, and information on various changes such as management. may be notified.

The information from the ball lending machine PT is stored in the hall computer 90, and the processing of the ball lending machine PT (processing of S3225 to S3233, S3339 to S3347) is performed by the hall computer 90 instead. and processing (S3225-S3233, S3339-S3347) may be performed to give instructions to each ball lending machine PT.
By having the hall computer 90 perform processing in place of the ball lending machine PT in this way, not only is the transmission/reception with the ball server 71 faster, but also the security can be enhanced because it is independent from the operation of the player M.
Information such as the access code, special code 75, ball unit price, application code 76 and the number of balls to be paid out, as well as face image data 559 and money sales data from the ball lending machine PT, are stored in the machine computer 93 and the island computer 91. is sent to the hall computer 90 via. By using the same data communication line in this way, no special retrofitting is required.

Next, an example of data stored in the scrap server 71 of the scrap processing device 70 is shown in FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG.
FIG. 106 shows the data stored in the edge ball server 71 as a edge ball server list table 72 . "Application code" 76 indicates a unique number of application software to be installed in the personal mobile terminal SM. The "password" is a number for authorization when accessing the ball server 71. After access, the number of game media held by the player M can be checked and the number of payouts to be paid out from the ball lending machine PT. can be set. The "e-mail address" indicates the address of the personal mobile terminal SM of the player M, and is used to send notifications that registration processing and payout processing have been completed, notifications that the expiration date and arrival are approaching, and business information. be.
“Number of stored balls (1 yen)” describes the number of balls stored in the edge ball server 71 converted at a lending unit price of 1 yen. The "update date and time" stores the last update date and time, which is the starting date of the expiration date. "Special code" stores the special code 75 at the time of the last processing. The "store code" stores the store number of the last processing.

FIG. 106 shows an individual edge ball server list table 72 showing data by application code 76 stored in the edge ball server 71 .
The individual ball server list 72 includes data displayed in the ball server list 72, as well as "date of birth" and "visit history". Stored in the store visit history are "year and month", "date and time", "number of deposited balls", "corner" indicating the unit price of game medium rental, and "expiration date" indicating the state of the expiration date.
In this way, by providing an expiration date, the card server 71 can keep the accumulated amount of data constant. Also, it can be used for management to inform the player M that the expiration date is near by e-mail or the like. A predetermined period can be set for the expiration date.

The ball server 71 is provided outside the game hall 1 and connected to the ball lending machine PT using the Internet network E. It may be a small-scale one to be used.
In this embodiment, the case of storing the odd balls has been described, but the present system can also be applied to a ball storage system in which the number of stored balls is increased and the balls acquired by the player M are stored.
The installation of the application software of the personal portable terminal SM itself, the registration with the ball server 71, the registration of the number of balls, and the above-described series of operations on the personal portable terminal SM are performed by the ball lending machine PT on each machine. , the QR code (registered trademark) displayed on the liquid crystal screen or the like of the ball lending machine or table information display device K installed in the game hall 1 is read with the camera 872 and photographed, and the personal mobile terminal SM Registration of application software and the above-described payout operation may be performed automatically. With the above configuration, even if the operation of the personal portable terminal SM is complicated, anyone can easily perform the operation of registering and paying out accumulated balls. Alternatively, a sticker or the like with a QR code (registered trademark) may be photographed by the reading camera 872, and the application software of the personal mobile terminal SM may automatically operate the registration and payout operations.

<Sales analysis system using individual face authentication device>
Details of analysis of data obtained by controlling the individual face authentication device 800 and the hall computer 90 in the game arcade 1 will be described in detail using cheats and forms shown in FIGS.
FIG. 109 is a payout ball chart 650 showing the change in the difference ball of the gaming machine P and the individual ball possession. FIG. 110 is an individual income and expenditure form 655 of an individual using the individual face authentication device 800 . FIG. 111 is an analysis form 660 for each gaming machine P that is aggregated for each individual using the individual face authentication device 800 . FIG. 112 is a correction value form 680 for each balance using the individual face authentication device 800 . FIG. 113 is an analysis form 670 for each gaming machine that is aggregated for each individual using the individual face authentication device 800 and analyzed based on the correction value.

First, the payout ball chart 650 shown in FIG. 109 represents the payout ball difference of the pachinko machine P of the 503 series by means of a payout ball slump graph 651 represented by a line graph. The difference ball indicates the difference between the number of safe balls and the number of out balls, and when disclosed to the player M, indicates the value obtained by subtracting the number of out balls from the number of safe balls (difference ball = safe number of balls minus number of out balls). Therefore, for the player M, if the number of balls obtained is greater than the number of balls used, it is represented as a plus. The payout chart 650 shows a diagram displayed on the table information display device K, but it may be displayed on the monitor of the hall computer 90 or on a form. may be displayed in

Also, the dashed line on the vertical axis shown in the drawing indicates the boundary where the people are replaced. Face authentication numbers 583 (FID006, FID007, FID005, FID004, FID003) and personal mascots (654a to 654e) are used to protect personal information. The individual mascot 654 may be arbitrarily determined, or may be automatically determined by the machine information display device K or the individual face authentication device 80 and displayed in consideration of personal information. The individual mascot 654 may represent gender and age by changing the background color, mascot, etc., and indicate whether it is popular with men or women, so that it is possible to change the table in the future. It can also be used as an index.

A positive balance chart 652 derived from the horizontal dashed line from points A to D is shown. The positive income/expenditure chart 652 starts from point A in the state of 0, and enters the negative area until there is a big hit, etc., and the point B represents the minimum number of balls held, and point C It shows the maximum number of balls on hand, and point D shows the state of the balls on hand when the game ends. The positive income/expenditure chart 652 is represented by a white bar graph in the case of individuals FID006, FID005, and FID004, and indicates that the income/expenditure is positive.
Also shown is a negative balance chart 653 derived from the horizontal dotted line from point E to point H. FIG. The negative income/expenditure chart 653 starts from the point E in the state of 0, and the point F indicates the maximum number of winning balls. In addition, the number of balls used in the case of winning a big hit or the like is large and falls into the negative range, point G represents the minimum number of balls held, and point H represents the number of balls held when the game ends. It shows the state, but the number of balls used indicates more minus. A negative balance chart 653 is represented by a hatched black bar graph in the case of individuals of FID007 and FID003, indicating that the balance is negative.

With the above configuration, it is possible to confirm at a glance whether the result of each game is a negative balance or a positive balance, so that the player M and the game parlor 1 can immediately judge the state of the game machine. In addition, since individual results can be confirmed while considering the protection of personal information, it can be used as an index for the player M to play the game with peace of mind.
FIG. 110 shows an example of an individual income and expenditure form 655 in which the hall computer 90 aggregates individual information. The individual balance sheet 655 indicates the time period in which the player M played games, the machine number of the gaming machine, and the balance.

Next, FIG. 111 shows an analysis form 660 classified by gaming machine. The analysis form 660 for each game machine has a column for each day in the upper vertical column, and the horizontal column is arranged for each player M represented by the face authentication number 583 . In each column, information is displayed for each player M and for each day.
For example, the player M whose face authentication number 583 is represented by FID004, on May 6, shows a positive balance "+" in the balance result column 662 in the 503 series, and the correction value column 661 indicates "1" because there is no previous data. On May 7, the balance result column 662 indicates a negative balance "Δ", and the correction value column 661 indicates "0.8" because the previous day, which is the previous time, had a positive balance. Player M of FID004 enjoyed the game, but since the balance was positive last time, the impact of the balance is large. Conversely, since the balance result column 662 for May 7 is negative balance "Δ", the correction value column 661 for May 8 indicates "1.2". In this way, the pachinko machine P is considered to be an interesting game machine by playing the game while having the impression that the balance was negative last time and the balance is not good. By giving it as a reward, it is possible to check the interest of the gaming machine without being affected by the income and expenditure. Therefore, these indicators can be used to evaluate the gaming machine, and can be used as an indicator of the timing of replacing a new machine or disposing of an existing gaming machine to a second-hand machine.

In particular, player M with FID007 continues to play pachinko machines P in the 503 series even though the balance continues to be negative. ” and it is expensive. Thus, not only the player M but also the game parlor 1 can grasp that the game machine is interesting, so that the player M can play the game as an interesting game machine while obtaining a sufficient profit. Therefore, it can be used as an index of how much profit can be returned to the player.

Next, FIG. 113 shows an analysis form 670 by gaming machine as another example of analysis method, and FIG.
The correction value form 680 gives different points according to the balance of the number of balls acquired or used. In the case of a positive balance, the points to be given are described in the positive balance correction value column 681, "0.97" is given from 0 to +2500, and "0.94" is given from +2501 to +5000. , +5001 to +7500 is given "0.91", +7501 to +10000 is given "0.88", and +15000 or more is given "0.80" and points subtracted from 1 are given.
In the case of a negative balance, the points to be given are described in the negative balance correction value column 682, "1.03" is given from 0 to -2500, and "1.06" is given from -2501 to -5000. , -5001 to -7500 gives "1.09", -7501 to -10000 gives "1.12", -10001 to -15000 gives "1.12" However, for -15000 or less, points are given by adding "1.20" to 1.
In this way, by providing correction values in a plurality of stages and giving points, detailed analysis becomes possible, and individual tastes can be analyzed in more detail. In addition, by adding the above-mentioned tendencies by gender and age to this information, not only can it be used as an indicator of the timing of replacing new machines or disposing of existing machines to second-hand machines, but also the region of the store. Sexual tendencies can also be analyzed.

Next, FIG. 113 shows an analysis form 670 for each gaming machine using this correction value form 680 . The analysis form 670 for each game machine has a column for each day in the upper vertical column, and the horizontal column is arranged for each player M represented by the face authentication number 583 . In each column, information is displayed for each player M and for each day.
The information is, for example, the player M whose face authentication number 583 is represented by FID004, on May 6, shows the number of balls "+3300" which is a positive balance in the balance result column 671 in the 503 series, and is corrected. The value column 662 indicates "1" because there is no previous data. On May 7, the balance result column 671 shows the number of balls of "-6110", which is a negative balance, and the correction value column 672 shows "0" because the previous day, which is the previous day, had a positive balance of "+3300". .94”. Player M of FID004 enjoyed the game, but had a positive balance last time. Conversely, since the balance result column 662 for May 7 is negative balance "-6110", the correction value column 672 for May 8 is "1" by adding 0.09 points to 1. .09".

In this way, by playing the game while having the impression that the balance was not so good as the balance was negative last time, this pachinko machine P is considered to be an interesting game machine, so that 0.09 points are added and given. By doing so, it is possible to confirm the interest of the gaming machine without being affected by the income and expenditure. Therefore, these indicators can be used to evaluate the gaming machine, and can be used as an indicator of the timing of replacing a new machine or disposing of an existing gaming machine to a second-hand machine. In addition, since the correction value has a greater impact on the balance when the positive balance is large, it is possible to evaluate the interest of the pachinko machine itself by adding the impact of the balance by reducing the points. Conversely, if the negative balance is large, it can be understood that the game machine is being played even with the influence of the negative balance, and that the game machine is interesting. Therefore, by adding the number of points according to the number of balls with a negative balance or a positive balance and giving points, the tendency of interest in the gaming machine becomes clearer.

In addition, as shown in the game machine analysis form 670 in FIG. 113, the total number of players M who have played the 503 series pachinko machine P in a certain period and the total number of times per player can be grasped. The total number of players and the number of games played can also be grasped. Although these are described for each day, it is possible to analyze how many times an individual has played in a day from the individual income and expenditure form shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to analyze the gaming machine using such a correction value even for a short period or a long period.
Although the correction values and the like are given as points, they may be expressed as the number of times or the like. Also, although the correction value represents reduction or addition within the range of "0.2", this range is not limited, and any correction value within the range that allows the interest of the gaming machine to be analyzed may be used. In addition, points may be awarded using other gaming machine-related information, not limited to the number of games played. good.

<Control of intruder monitoring system>
114 to 132, schematic diagrams, explanatory diagrams, etc., will be used to explain in detail how control is performed when detecting and notifying an intruder in the game arcade 1. FIG.
The intruder monitoring system is a system for monitoring intruders during times other than business hours, and is often used particularly at night. Configured by a system that selects and controls. A nighttime monitoring system 860, which will be described later, is a system that monitors the opening and closing of the gaming machine during times other than business hours, particularly at nighttime, using the battery BA in view of energy saving. Each representative system will be described below.

<<Control of intruder monitoring system by surveillance camera>>
114 to 118. First, a detailed description will be given of how the monitoring camera system 60 controls the detection of an intruder in the game arcade 1 with reference to schematic diagrams or explanatory diagrams shown in FIGS.
FIG. 114 is a schematic diagram of the arrangement of surveillance cameras 61 during operation in the intruder surveillance system. FIG. 1115 is a layout schematic diagram of the monitoring camera 61 in the intruder monitoring system, which is operated by the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing an imaging position list 881 indicating positions to be imaged by the monitoring camera 61 in the intruder monitoring system. FIG. 117 is a schematic diagram showing a monitor 882 connected to the surveillance camera system 60 in the intruder surveillance system. FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram showing a recording area 883 of a recording device provided in the intrusion monitoring system.
The monitoring camera system 60 is provided with monitoring cameras 61 (A to Q) above the aisle positions of the game area 3 of the game hall 1, and during business with players, as shown in FIG. The monitoring cameras 61 (A to Q) always take images of the players M playing the game or equipment such as the counter JC, and record the images. 117(A) connected to the camera monitoring system 60 in the management area 2 (FIG. 1), It monitors whether there are any troubles caused by man-made troubles or troubles in equipment such as safes (GB1 and GB2) including game machines.

Next, a description will be given of the control for monitoring intruders, especially at night, after the player M is gone except during business hours.
After the player M is gone, the monitoring camera system 60 detects the intruder MF, which is the in-store entrance (EX1 to EX5) or the safe (GB1 and GB1 and GB2) and the reception counter UK where the money and goods are stored. In addition, the monitoring cameras 61 (K to O) in the game area 3 are put into a power saving mode and stop taking pictures and recordings to save energy.

FIG. 116 shows an imaging position list 881 showing changes in the positions at which the monitoring cameras 61 (A to J, P and Q) regularly take images so as not to miss the intrusion point and to eliminate blind spots. there is The positions captured by the monitoring cameras 61 (A to J, P and Q) change from a to b in FIG. For example, the monitoring cameras 61A and 61P first capture an image of the store entrance EX2, and after a predetermined time of about 10 minutes, capture an image of the store entrance EX3. In FIGS. 116a and 116b, all imaging positions are specified so that there is no omission of desired positions. By switching the monitoring cameras 61 (A to J and P and Q), the monitoring camera system 60 can change the imaging angle of the designated imaging position to capture and record images. can be recorded. In addition, since it is possible to change according to the object to be imaged during business hours and outside business hours, it is possible to variously change the position to be imaged by one surveillance camera 61 .
The monitoring camera 61 may have a structure in which a drive mechanism for driving a lens such as pan/tilt or zoom is provided, or may be a system in which a wide-angle lens is used for wide-angle imaging and image processing is performed for monitoring.

FIGS. 117 and 118 describe processing when the monitoring camera 61 (K to O) is in the power saving mode.
In FIG. 117, a monitor 882 connected to the surveillance camera system 60 is displayed. FIG. 117(A) shows the display of the monitor 882 during business hours, in which the images picked up by the nine monitoring cameras 61 (A to C, F to H and KL) are divided into nine and displayed. (A1-A9). In FIG. 117B, when the monitoring cameras 61 (K to O) are in the power saving mode, the images captured by the six monitoring cameras 61 (A to C and F to H) are displayed in a six-segment display. (A1-A3 and A7-A9). In FIG. 117(B), since the monitoring camera 61 (K to O) is in power saving mode, the monitor 882 monitors the display area (A4 to A6) of the monitoring camera 61 (K to O). It is a state (A1-A3 and A7-A9) assigned to cameras 61 (A-C and F-H). Therefore, the display area of the monitor 882 is enlarged and displayed, making it easy to see details. In another example, it is possible to divide the display area (A1 to A9) into 9 parts as it is, and to display them by inserting the other monitoring cameras 61 (C to E), so that they can be displayed at once. The number of surveillance cameras 61 can be increased.

FIG. 118A shows a recording area 883 of a recording device provided in the monitoring camera system 60, and a recording area 884 records images captured by the monitoring camera 61A. The recording area 885 records images captured by the monitoring camera 61K. The recording area 886 records images captured by the monitoring camera 61F.
In FIG. 118B, when the monitoring camera 61 (K to O) is in power saving mode, the recording area 883 is assigned to the other operating monitoring cameras 61 (A to C and F to H). It is a state. Recording areas 887 and 889 are areas where images captured by the monitoring cameras 61A and 61F are recorded, and the recording capacity is expanded. Therefore, by allocating the capacity of the monitoring cameras 61 (K to O) in the standby state, the recording capacity is increased, and sufficient recording capacity can be secured in preparation for an intruder. In another example, by allocating the recording area 883 as it is to the other monitoring cameras 61 (A to C and F to H), the recording capacity per monitoring camera 61 is expanded and the lack of recording capacity is eliminated. By eliminating this, it is possible to monitor by the monitor camera 61 even in a time zone when no employees are present. Also, even if you want to check the recording later, the recording capacity is not wasted, so you can save the recorded data for a long time by maximizing the recording capacity.
It is also possible to appropriately select and use not only the monitor camera 61 but also each stand camera 69 .

<< Control of the intruder monitoring system by each camera >>
119 to 125 and 128 are flow charts, outline diagrams, explanatory diagrams, etc., showing how control is performed when an intruder is detected in the game arcade 1 by the surveillance camera system 60 and each stand camera 69. will be used to describe in detail.
FIG. 119 shows a system diagram of power supply lines for game machines and equipment. FIG. 120 shows a control mode transition diagram in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 121 is a flow chart of night monitoring mode processing in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 122 is a flow chart of playback mode processing in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 123 is a schematic diagram showing transition of the focal position of each camera 69 in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 124 is a conceptual diagram showing how the intrusion monitoring system captures an intruder. FIG. 125 is a conceptual diagram showing how the intrusion monitoring system captures an intruder. FIG. 128 is a schematic diagram showing how a recorded image is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen 891 of the machine information display device K in the intrusion monitoring system.

FIG. 119 shows a system diagram of power supply lines for game machines and equipment. A power line 863 to the pachinko machine P and the machine information display device K and a power line 865 to the ball lending machine PT are separately provided. At the end of the island facility HS, a power distribution facility DT for switching ON/OFF each power supply line (863, 865) is provided. The power distribution equipment DT is provided with a switchboard DL1 and a switchboard DL2 for each supply target, and supplies AC 100V to each device. AC 100V supplied from the power supply line 863 connected to the switchboard DL1 is transformed by the transformer TR, and the transformed AC 24V is supplied to the pachinko machine P and the table information display device K. Also, AC 100 V supplied from a power line 865 connected to the switchboard DL1 is supplied to the ball lending machine PT having a camera 69 for each stand.

By separately providing the switchboard DL1 and the switchboard DL2, power can be supplied only to the ball lending machine PT used as a surveillance camera in the night surveillance mode, and the power line not required for the pachinko machine P and the like in the night surveillance mode can be removed. Energy saving can be realized by setting it as an OFF line.
In addition, the switchboard DL1 provided at the end of the island is provided with one ON/OFF switch for each game machine such as a pachinko machine P, so that the switch can be operated independently when replacing a new machine, when a failure occurs, when an inspection is performed, or when an event occurs. Convenience is enhanced because it can be turned on and off.

The monitoring camera system 60 including the ball lending machine PT equipped with each camera 69 operates in the above-described normal business mode S2000 (processing of the individual face authentication device 800), the night monitoring mode, as shown in the state flow chart of FIG. The processing is switched between S3370 and the reproduction mode S3380, and it is possible to select or automatically switch depending on the object to be monitored and the reproduction processing.

As shown in FIGS. 121 to 125 and 128, when the process shifts to the night watch mode, night watch mode processing S3370 is executed. First, a standby state is entered, as shown in FIG. 124, of the individual monitoring cameras 69, the cameras 69 at both ends of the island facility HS are operated, and the other individual cameras 69 are placed in a standby state (S3371). By activating only the cameras 69 at both ends of the island facility HS, it is possible to accurately detect the intruder MF while achieving energy saving while accurately encroaching on the passage to the game area 3 .
As shown in FIG. 123(A), in the operating mode (S2000), the focus position 892 of each stand camera 69 is near the center of the chair C on which the player is sitting, that is, the face of the player M is imaged. ing. However, as shown in FIG. 123(B), when the process shifts to the night monitoring mode, at least the cameras 69 at both ends of the island facility HS have their focal positions 893 switched to the central side of the passage (S3372). . In addition, at that time, the lens is changed to a wide angle in order to capture a wide range of objects to be photographed, or the viewpoint is switched to a wide angle, etc., and the focus is switched, which is not possible during business hours, so that the intruder MF can be imaged even a little.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124, the cameras 69 of the ball lending machines (PT1, PT2, PT3 and PT4) installed at both ends of the island facility HS do not image or record until the intruder MF appears. Then, the moving body detection mode is set (S3373). In the moving body detection mode, this state is maintained until a moving object such as an intruder MF is captured by each camera (NO in S3374).
If a moving object such as an intruder MF is captured by each camera (YES in S3374), the recording mode is entered (S3375). The recording mode is set not only for the cameras 69 of the ball lending machines PT1 and PT2 in the aisle that detected the moving object, but also for all the cameras 69 or all the cameras 69 in the aisle that detected the moving object. You may shift to the state of imaging and recording. Also, as shown in FIG. 125, each camera 69 of the ball lending machine PT5 installed in the pachinko machine P with the pachinko machine P opened and closed, and the balls installed on the opposite side of the pachinko machine P with the pachinko machine P opened and closed. Images and recordings are performed for several rental machines PT6, PT7, and PT8. This is to enable the intruder MF to be captured accurately while minimizing the number of cameras 69 on each stand.

Then, if a moving object such as an intruder MF is detected, a nighttime flag is set (S3376) and the process ends. After the end, if the mode is switched, the mode is shifted to the reproduction mode, and the reproduction mode process is executed (S3380).
The reproduction mode process S3380 determines whether or not the monitor camera system 60 including the ball lending machine PT has a nighttime flag (S3381). If there is no nighttime flag (NO in S3381), the reproduction mode process S3380 ends. If there is a nighttime flag (YES in S3381), the monitoring camera system 60 including the ball lending machine PT transmits imaged recording information to the machine information display device K as shown in FIG. 128 (S3383). As shown in FIG. 128, on the liquid crystal display screen 891 of the machine information display device K, the scene of the intruder MF entering the passage between the island facilities HS and approaching the pachinko machine is reproduced based on the received recorded information ( S3384).
In this way, the situation captured by each camera 69 of the ball lending machine PT is reproduced by the machine information display device K provided near each camera 69 installed in the passage into which the intruder MF entered. Therefore, images to be reproduced differ depending on the position of each camera 69, and what happened at night can be analyzed while being reproduced in a state as if one were watching it on the spot. Also, by using a large liquid crystal monitor or the like for the liquid crystal display screen 891, it is possible to check the state at a glance. In addition, reproduction between these table information display devices K can reproduce the state of the site as it is by synchronizing the reproduction, and it is possible to confirm the state at a glance.

<< Control of a system that detects the opening and closing of a game machine at night using a battery >>
Next, a detailed description will be given of the manner in which the night monitoring system 860 using the battery BA controls when detecting the opening/closing of the game machine with reference to flowcharts, schematic diagrams or explanatory diagrams shown in FIGS. 126 to 132. do.
FIG. 126 is a flowchart of night monitoring mode 2 processing in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 127 shows a system diagram such as power supply lines for game machines and island facilities HS. FIG. 128 is a schematic diagram showing how a recorded image is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen 891 of the machine information display device K in the intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 129 shows a configuration diagram of a nighttime monitoring system 860 in an intrusion monitoring system. FIG. 130 is a conceptual diagram showing how the nighttime monitoring system in the intrusion monitoring system captures an intruder. FIG. 126 is a time chart regarding recording of each camera 69 of the night surveillance system in the intrusion surveillance system. FIG. 132 is a flowchart of power failure processing in the intrusion monitoring system.
First, the configuration of the night monitoring system 860 will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 and 129. FIG. The night monitoring system 860 uses the battery BA as an energy-saving system and is used to detect whether or not a game machine such as a pachinko machine P has been illegally opened or closed during non-business hours, particularly at night.
The ball lending machine PT in which each camera 69 is installed is supplied with AC 100V as described above during normal operation, and each camera 69 is supplied with DC 5V from the power supply unit built in the ball lending machine PT. Alternatively, it is driven by being supplied with DC 12V.

When the nighttime monitoring system 860 is in operation, the supply of AC 100V from the power distribution equipment DT (FIG. 119) to the ball lending machine PT and the pachinko machine P is stopped. Therefore, power is not supplied to each camera 69 for energy saving.
However, the night monitoring system 860 is supplied with DC 12V or DC 5V from the battery BA in order to detect whether or not the game machine such as the pachinko machine P has been illegally opened or closed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 127, two night monitoring devices 868 having batteries BA are provided in the island facility HS. In order to monitor the passage between the island facilities HS as described above, one battery BA supplies power to each monitoring camera 69 provided in the facing ball lending machine PT via the island power supply wiring 877 through the ceiling. is supplied. A group of cameras 69 facing each other in this way constitutes a night monitoring device 868 as one system.

As shown in FIG. 129, the nighttime monitoring system 860 comprises a nighttime monitoring device 868, a pachinko machine P as a game machine, a ball lending machine PT equipped with a camera 69 for each machine, and an open/close sensor 864 for nighttime use.
As described above, during normal business hours, 100 VAC is supplied from the switchboard DL1 and transformed to 24 VAC by the transformer TR to supply power to the pachinko machine P, which is a gaming machine. A power supply of AC 100V is supplied from the switchboard DL2 to the ball lending machine PT.

The night monitoring device 868 is supplied with AC 100 V from the switchboard DL1 during normal business hours, and the AC 100 V is converted to DC 12 V or 5 V by the AC-DC converter 870, and the charging circuit 871 charges the battery BA. The charging circuit 871 has a reverse current prevention diode and a circuit that prevents overcharging and overdischarging, and always performs charging and discharging according to the capacity and voltage of the battery BA. The night monitoring control circuit 873 connected to the battery BA stops control during normal business hours, that is, while detecting the voltage from the AC-DC converter 870. It operates by the power supplied from the battery BA.

While the nighttime monitoring control circuit 873 is operating, the nighttime opening/closing sensor 864 detects whether or not the pachinko machine P is opened/closed. The nighttime open/close sensor 864 uses a switching contact, and the nighttime monitoring control circuit 873 energizes the DC power of the battery BA from the sensor terminal board 879 . When the nighttime opening/closing sensor 864 operates, the nighttime monitoring control circuit 873 sends a signal to each camera 69 of the ball lending machine PT connected to the pachinko machine P in which the nighttime opening/closing sensor 864 is energized. The DC power of the battery BA is directly supplied from the terminal board 875 through the battery wiring 877 . In addition, each camera 69 records captured data in an SD card or HDD (855 in FIG. 68).

Next, control of the night monitoring system 860 will be described. Description will be made with reference to FIGS. 127 to 132 based on the night monitoring mode 2 process (S3390) shown in FIG.
The night monitoring system 860 does not operate while detecting the voltage from the AC-DC converter 870 that converts the power supplied from the switchboard DL2 as described above (NO in S3391). When the voltage from the AC-DC converter 870 has decreased, for example, it is determined whether or not it is less than DC 5V. The program of the night monitoring control circuit 873 starts night monitoring control (S3392) The night monitoring control circuit 873 detects the opening and closing of the pachinko machine P until a signal is sent from the nighttime opening/closing sensor 864. (NO in S3393).

The night monitoring control circuit 873 receives a signal from the above-described nighttime open/close sensor 864, that is, when an intruder MF illegally opens the door of the pachinko machine P, the nighttime monitor provided near the pachinko machine P is opened. If the opening/closing sensor 864 detects the opening/closing sensor 864 (YES in S3393), the night monitoring control circuit 873 stores the machine number and the first flag of the pachinko machine P whose door is detected by the opening/closing sensor 864 for nighttime (S3394). . Then, the nighttime monitoring control circuit 873 transmits the DC voltage of the battery BA from the camera terminal board 875 to each camera 69 of the ball lending machine PT connected to the pachinko machine P equipped with the nighttime opening/closing sensor 864 which is energized. Power is supplied directly through battery wiring 877 (S3395). Each camera 69 records captured data. By using the battery BA, the electricity stored during the daytime can be effectively used, so it is possible to save energy. Each stand camera 69 switches the focal position 893 to the center of the passage as described above and takes an image. Incidentally, each camera 69 may switch its position so as to automatically track the intruder MF.

After that, the timer of the night monitoring control circuit 873 is activated (SS3396), and after a predetermined period of time, for example, about 5 seconds has passed (YES in S3397), the night monitoring control circuit 873 turns on all the cars facing the aisle as shown in FIG. The DC power of the battery BA is directly supplied from the camera terminal board 875 to each camera 69 through the battery wiring 877 (S3398). This is to secure the time for recording the first flag without malfunction by operating the timer. By reliably setting the first flag in this way, it is possible to distinguish and recognize which game machine was opened or closed at night when checking in the morning or the like, as will be described later.
Then, the controller 834 (FIG. 68) of each camera 69 records the imaged data, determines that the power supply line is different from the normal time, and stores the nighttime flag as ON (S3399).

FIG. 131 shows a time chart regarding recording by each camera 69 of the night monitoring system 860. As shown in FIG.
When the AC 100V power supply line 865 supplied from the switchboard DL2 is turned off, the control of the nighttime monitoring control circuit 873 is started. When the night monitor control circuit 873 detects that the door is open as described above, the power supply A of the battery BA supplies power to the detected camera 69 via the battery wiring 877 . After a predetermined time has elapsed, DC power is supplied from the camera terminal board 875 to all the cameras 69 to which the power source B of the battery BA is connected. Each camera 69 starts recording as soon as DC power is supplied.
Here, the battery BA may be designed so that it does not have the capacity to operate all the connected cameras 69 until morning, and the charged capacity of the battery BA is used up, and the DC power is naturally no longer supplied. When 80% of the rated voltage of each camera 69 and the recording function is cut, the recording is stopped and stored in the HDD or SD card. The power is turned off while the overwrite control is ON. When the AC100V power line 865 is turned ON in the morning, etc., it is detected that the overwrite control is ON at the time of initial start-up, and recording data stored in the HDD or SD card is prohibited from being overwritten. , and the recorded data is saved. Therefore, there is no fear that the recorded contents will be erased, and events occurring at the site can be confirmed later by reproducing the recorded contents.

Next, the processing when the AC 100V power supply line 865 is turned ON in the morning, etc. will be described with reference to FIG. Until the employee turns on the switchboard DL2 in the morning, the night monitoring control circuit 873 cannot operate if the battery BA has no capacity (NO in SS3401). When AC 100 V is supplied to the power supply line 865, the night monitoring control circuit 873 detects the energization of the power supply from the AC-DC converter 870 (YES in S3401), until the battery BA is fully charged. confirms whether there is the first flag using the power from the AC-DC converter 870, and flashes the call lamp of the information display device K for which the first flag is set (S3403). The employee is notified of the occurrence of an abnormality by blinking the call lamp, and if there is a nighttime flag in the recording data of each stand camera 69, a liquid crystal display screen 891 of the stand information display device K is displayed as shown in FIG. , the scene of the intruder MF entering the passage between the island facilities HS and approaching the pachinko machine P is reproduced based on the received recorded information (S3380).
In addition, the call lamp of the machine information display device K is blinked until the employee confirms it (S3403), and the recorded information is reproduced on the liquid crystal display screen 891 of the machine information display device K (S3380). NO). When the employee cancels the notification of the power failure by the battery BA of the night monitoring device 868, the power failure process (S3400) ends.

As described above, in the present invention, the use of the battery BA charged during the daytime for nighttime monitoring leads to energy saving. Especially in the case of nighttime surveillance, if there is a game machine P such as a pachinko machine that is opened and closed, 69 power is supplied to each machine camera to start recording, thereby accurately capturing the state of the intruder and pachinko. Since imaging and recording are performed only when the machine P opens and closes in an abnormal state, it is useful for saving energy. Moreover, it is possible to sense an abnormality at night not only by the abnormality in opening and closing of the door but also by the abnormality in the power source of the battery BA that is not normally used.
In addition, although all the cameras 69 facing the aisle were operated, as shown in FIG. A longer time or recording time can be ensured, which contributes to energy saving.

The monitoring camera 61 and each stand camera 69 are equipped with an infrared camera, and by image processing at the time of playback or recording, etc., so that people can be recognized even at night, and images can be captured and played back. It is

<Configuration and Control of Disablement Detection System>
133 to 142 for the configuration and control of the disablement detection system 920 that detects when each stand camera 69 in the game arcade 1 is disabled, please refer to the flow charts, sequence diagrams, schematic diagrams, explanatory diagrams, etc. shown in FIGS. will be explained in detail. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the location of the same structure as the structure mentioned above.

<<Configuration of Disablement Detection System>>
FIG. 133 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged plan view of a part of each camera 69 in the disablement detection system 920. FIG.
A disabling detection system 920 as a means for detecting disabling of the cameras 69 in the game arcade system mainly includes the monitoring cameras 61, the cameras 69 provided in the ball lending machine PT, the monitoring camera system 60, and the individual faces. It is composed of a face authentication server 820 provided in the authentication device 800 . The disabling detection server 66 connected to the monitoring camera system 60 includes the monitoring camera 61, each stand camera 69 provided in the ball lending machine PT, the monitoring camera system 60, and the face authentication server 820 provided in the individual face authentication device 800. controlling.

Each stand camera 69 is provided in the ball lending machine PT in this embodiment (FIG. 67), but the position where each stand camera 69 is installed is not particularly limited and may be the stand information display device K. FIG. As shown in FIG. 133, the front surface of each camera 69 is made of thick smoked resin as a half mirror as a first semi-transmissive means so that the player M does not notice that each camera 69 is installed. It is covered with a first front cover 837 formed. The left side surface of the camera housing 839 is also covered with a second front cover 838 made of dark smoky resin for a half mirror as a second semi-transmissive means. The second front cover 838 is a see-through window for taking an image of the player M on the left with the camera 69 for each machine. The second front cover 838 takes an image instead of the left camera 69 when the left camera 69 is out of order or when the front of each camera 69 is blocked due to mischief or the like which will be described later. It becomes a transparent window for

In this way, by covering the camera 69 with the two front covers 837 and 838, the position of the lens 836 of each camera 69 can be switched without being noticed by the player M even if the position of the lens 836 is switched. Since it is possible, it becomes easy to collect data for the player M. Also, by using the first and second translucent means, it becomes difficult for the player M to know that the camera 69 is installed on each stand.

Also, the first and second front covers 837 and 838 have been described as half mirrors, but there is no need to limit them in particular, and they may be made of mesh-like metal or resin, and the state in which the camera is installed is acceptable. It's okay if it's hard to recognize.
Also, if the present invention is used, it is possible to detect that the front of the camera is covered by mischief or the like. You may install it in a state where you can see that it is installed.

In addition, since each camera 69 can be panned, tilted, zoomed, etc. by a driving unit 835 with a lens 836, the object or focus can be changed.
FIG. 133(A) shows the camera position A of each stand camera 69, which captures an image of a player M playing a game machine with the same stand number assigned. Also, the camera position A is set as an initial value. FIG. 133(B) shows the camera position B of each stand camera 69, which captures an image of the player M as the subject MH who is playing the game machine on the left side. As for the camera position B, when the blackout signal 921 is sent from the left side, each camera 69 switches the imaging position if the imaging condition is possible. The camera position B may be oriented to the left, and may also be oriented to the right, and can be changed depending on the position of the subject MH.
Although each camera 69 of the present invention uses a camera that switches the imaging position to the left and right, it is not particularly limited and may be a camera with a wide-angle lens or a 360-degree field of view. In addition, even if the camera position is not switched, it is possible to control judgment and detection by image processing.

<<How to detect a blackout>>
Blackout detection will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 134 is an itemized selection column 844 for selecting a method for blackout detection by the blackout detection means 932 of the disabling detection system 920 . FIG. 135 is a schematic diagram of a blackout detection method. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram of a blackout detection method.

The blackout detection means 932 of the deactivation detection system 920 is built in the ROM 851 (FIG. 68) by the CPU 850 (FIG. 68) of each camera 69, and has an application corresponding to the detection method.
The detection method A detects the distance to the object MH or an obstacle 842 as shown in FIG. 135(A). Normally, the detection distance from the lens 836 to the object MH is L3 (range of 50 cm to 100 cm). is L2 (range of 5 cm to 10 cm), and when the obstacle 842b is attached to the first front cover 837, the detection distance from the lens 836 to the obstacle 842 is L1 (3 cm ~5 cm range).

Each stand camera 69 detects a blackout according to the distance to obstacles 842a and 842b. The distance can be measured using the phase difference of the focus of the camera, an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, or the like. In this way, it is possible to detect not only the case where the obstacle 842 is in close contact, but also the obstacle 842a which is placed a little apart, such as when the obstacle 842 is not placed close to it and is installed floating.
The detection distance can be changed and does not need to be particularly limited, but the optimum condition for the blackout detection means 932 is to detect obstacles 842a and 842b within a range of 3 cm to 10 cm.

In the detection method B, as shown in FIGS. 135B-1 and 135B-2, each camera 69 determines blackout by detection based on the difference in the amount of light between the normal state and the obstacle 842. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 135(B-1), the normal amount of light is X1, but the front surface of the lens 836 is blocked by an obstacle 842c, and the amount of light is reduced to X2 as shown in FIG. 135(B-1). Become. Therefore, each stand camera 69 judges when the difference of X1-X2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount. The amount of light is expressed in lumens (lm·s) and may be measured by illuminance expressed in lux (lx). As a method for measuring the amount of light and illuminance, there is a method of detecting with a camera 69 using a CCD camera, a method of detecting using a luminance meter or an illuminance meter, and the like.
In this way, detection based on the amount of light is effective regardless of the shape and size of the obstacle 842c because it can be determined regardless of the shape and size.

In the detection method C-1, as shown in FIG. 136A, when the subject MH is normally imaged, each stand camera 69 detects an image 841 accompanied by face image data 605 in which the face is specified by the face recognition engine. do. However, as shown in FIG. 136(B), each camera 69 detects an image 841a covered with an obstacle 842, and 70% or more of the image is reduced by image processing of the face recognition engine of the individual face recognition device 800. A blackout is determined when the area of the region is covered with a monochromatic or multicolored obstacle 842d.
Further, as shown in FIG. 136(C), each stand camera 69 detects an image 841b covered with an obstacle 842e, and even if a part of the image 841b is covered and the subject MH is hidden, A blackout is determined when 70% or more of the area of the image is covered with a monochromatic or multicolored obstacle 842 by the image processing of the face recognition engine.

Further, the detection method C-2 is determined when the moving object detection of each stand camera 69 does not function for a certain period of time. The detection process employs the detection method C-1, and the trigger for determination is when the moving object detection of each camera 69 does not function for a certain period of time. When a person is imaged, the movement of the person is captured. This is the case when it is blocked by an object 842 or when each camera 69 is out of order. Therefore, the blackout detection means 932 detects a state in which the front surface of each camera 69 is blocked by an obstacle 842 or a failure of each camera 69 by judging when the moving object detection does not function for a certain period of time. It can be detected quickly.

In detection method D, each stand camera 69 uses the face recognition engine of each stand camera 69 to identify the face of player M, but face data 605 is detected even though the gaming machine is in operation. is not specified, it is determined as a blackout.
Detection of whether the gaming machine is in operation can be done by using the count of the out ball signal as described above, the sales signal from the ball lending machine PT, the number of starts, and the number of safe balls of the gaming machine. There is also a way to detect if there is a payout.
The detection method D is effective as a detection method because it can make a determination regardless of the shape and state of the obstacle 842, and can detect a failure of each camera 69 as well.
As described above, the blackout detection means 932 has been described up to the detection methods A to D, but it may be used selectively, or the methods of the detection methods A to D may be used in combination at the same time.

<<Control of Disablement Detection System>>
The control of the disabling detection system 920 will be described with reference to the flow charts and sequence diagrams of FIGS. 137 to 142. FIG.
FIG. 137 is a schematic diagram showing an enlarged plan view of a portion of the island facility HS in the disablement detection system 920. FIG. FIG. 138 is a flowchart of blackout detection processing in the disablement detection system 920. FIG. FIG. 139 is a flow chart of blindfold countermeasure processing in the disabling detection system 920 . FIG. 140 is a sequence diagram in the disablement detection system 920. FIG. 141 is a time chart of each camera 69 in the disablement detection system 920. FIG. FIG. 142 is a time chart in the disablement detection system 920. FIG.

First, the blackout detection process (S3410) shown in FIGS. 138 and 140 will be described. During a predetermined time (TB), each camera 69H detects whether the front surface of each camera 69H is covered (S3411). It is considered that the predetermined time (TB) is optimally about 1 to 2 minutes in consideration of a malfunction, a case where the front surface of each camera 69 is simply touched with a hand, and preparations for a fraudulent act. If even the action of touching the player is judged for a moment, it will conversely cause a malfunction and a decrease in the service to the player. Malfunctions can also be prevented.

Blackout detection is constantly detected by the blackout detection means 932 provided in each stand camera 69 (NO in S3411), and when a blackout is detected (YES in S3411), the blackout signal 921 is sent to the stand. It is output to the disable detection server 66 together with the number (S3412).
Although detection methods A to D have been described for the blackout detection means 932 described above, they may be used selectively, or a plurality of methods may be used in combination at the same time.
In this way, it is possible to prevent malfunctions while keeping a watchful eye against deteriorating services for players and cheating.

Next, the blindfold countermeasure processing (S3413) shown in FIGS. 137, 139 and 140 will be described. When the deactivation detection server 66 receives a blackout flag ON from each camera 69H that has detected a blackout (YES in S3415), it turns the blackout flag ON (S3416). The deactivation detection server 66 identifies the area of each camera 69H that detected the blackout (S3417). For example, as shown in FIG. 137, from each camera 69H (301 series) installed in the island facility HS1 that detected a blackout, to the adjacent 302 series and 303 series, and to the island facility HS2 behind the 301 series. Adjacent six cameras 69 in the 206th, 207th, and 208th series installed are specified as area ARI1. For these areas (ARI1, ARI2, and ARI3), the closest distance that can be imaged by each camera 69 is selected, but the number is not limited to six, and a larger number may be set. Defining these areas (ARI1, ARI2, and ARI3) makes control processing quick and easy.

Next, the disabling detection server 66 identifies nearby cameras 69 that are not disabled (YES in S3418), switches the identified cameras 69 to the subject HM (S3419), The platform camera 69 images the subject MH (S3421), and the face recognition engine of the individual face authentication device 800 built into each platform camera 69 determines whether the face data 605 can be created (YES in S3418).
In addition, when all the cameras 69 in the area cannot capture images, the disabling detection server 66 moves the monitoring camera 61 connected to the monitoring camera system 60 to the subject MH. (S3420). The monitoring camera 61 captures an image of the subject MH (S3421), and determines whether the face data 605 can be created by the face recognition engine built in the monitoring camera 61 or the face recognition server 80 (YES in S3418).

Next, each stand camera 69 and the monitor camera 61 extract face image data 605 from the image capturing the subject MH by the face authentication engine installed therein, and transmit the data (S3423). The data to be transmitted are recording data, face image data 605 created by the face authentication engine, and time data indicating the time when the image was captured. As long as there are at least time data capturing the features of the player M, recorded data, and a camera number (CH) as an identification number of each camera 69 and surveillance camera 61, even if the face image data 605 is not particularly saved, Since it is possible to check the recorded data later, it is possible to store the face image data more securely from the viewpoint of personal information protection such as information leakage than directly storing the face image data by the store.
The recording data stored in the face authentication server 80 or the hard disk HDD of the ball lending machine PT stored in the face authentication server 80 or each camera 69, the face image data 605 and the time data are obtained from each camera 69 or the surveillance camera 61. Data is stored in place of the obtained data (S3424).

The deactivation detection server 66 transmits an abnormal signal to the monitoring camera system 60 and the hall computer 90, displays it on the monitor connected to the monitoring camera system 60 and the hall computer 90 in the management area 2, and informs the employees (S3425). By notifying employees, it is possible to quickly detect and deal with mischief and mischief. In addition, by informing only the management area 2, it is possible to deal with the situation without being noticed by the player, and to prevent troubles with the player M in advance.

Next, the operation of the system under the control described above will be described with reference to schematic diagrams and timing charts shown in FIGS.
Fig. 137 shows the pachinko machine P installed in the island facility HS and the chair C on which the player M sits. . 16 pachinko machines P numbered 206 to 310, which are part of the island facility HS, are shown as an example.

For example, when the front surface of each 307th camera 69H is covered with paper or the like, the blackout detection means 932 by the above-described method detects it, and after a predetermined time (TB) has elapsed, each camera 69H is blacked out. Outputs an out signal 921 to the disable detection server 66 . The deactivation detection server 66 turns on the blackout flag. When each camera 69 in the area (ARI3) receives the camera position switching signal 925, it switches the position of the camera from the camera position A to the camera position B toward the subject MH. Zoom.
When all the cameras 69 in the area (ARI3) are unable to take an image, the monitor camera 61 is used. Since the monitoring camera 61 is away from the player M (subject MH), it is possible to take an image without the player M (subject MH) knowing.

Then, the subject MH is imaged to collect the recording data described above, the face image data 605 created by the face recognition engine, time data indicating the time when the image was taken, and the like. The monitoring camera 61 and each stand camera 69H operate until the blackout signal 921 is turned off or until data collection is completed.
Here, the disabling detection system 920 prioritizes the monitoring of its own pachinko machine P, so when the pachinko machine P is in operation like the 306 series, it prioritizes its own monitoring and does not switch the camera. , when it is determined that the pachinko machine P is not in operation, each camera 69 is switched. In this way, it is possible to effectively use the cameras 69 that are not being monitored while the player M is reliably monitored.
The method of detecting the operation of the pachinko machine P is determined by detecting the out ball signal 931, but it is not particularly limited, and the determination is made by the start signal from the pachinko machine P or the sales signal from the ball lending machine PT. Even better. Further, it may be determined by detecting that the player M is seated by the face authentication engine of each stand camera 69 .

Further, when the 301st series and the 302nd series are generated at the same time, the 303rd series of the cameras 69 in the area ARI1 monitors the player M because the player M is present, and when the player M disappears, each The platform camera 69 is switched to the 301 series or the 302 series. Also, even if there is a player M, if the face data 605 can be saved, each camera 69 may be switched to the 301st series or the 302nd series.
Also, if the face data 605 can be captured by switching the 206th to 208th cameras 69 behind the 301st and 302nd cameras, the face data 605 is collected. Also, if all the individual cameras 69 in the area ARI1 cannot be used, they are switched to the monitoring camera 61 to take an image. The monitor camera 61 is used by switching when all the individual cameras 69 in the area ARI1 cannot be used in order to give priority to opening and closing of the game machine and monitoring of the counter JC.
Also, if the cameras 69 outside the area ARI1 cannot be used, the cameras 69 in the 305s and 210s may be used.

Next, when a blackout is detected, the counter shutter 832 is activated to prohibit the counting of balls in hand in order to prevent cheating. Such prohibited operations can prevent damages caused by fraudulent acts. Similarly, in order to prevent damage caused by cheating, it is also possible to prevent the operation of paying out the balls on hand and the operation of sharing the balls on hand. In addition to prohibiting the operation of the ball lending machine PT, it is also conceivable to stop the display screen of the table information display device K and stop providing information such as the number of jackpots and the number of starts to the player M. Stopping the provision of information from the machine information display device K or the like does not directly affect the game, so it is effective in terms of stopping the service to the player M.

In this way, prohibiting the discharge of game media such as balls purchased by the player M may cause trouble with the player M. By prohibiting an operation that does not affect the game, the occurrence of trouble between the player M and the game hall 1 is prevented.
Although the present invention shows the case where the front surface of each camera 69 is covered with paper, tape, etc., the present invention can also be used when each camera 69 is out of order.

(Island facilities installed in playgrounds)
The island facility HS installed in the game hall 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 154. FIG. FIG. 143(A) shows a schematic plan view of the layout of each island facility (HS1 to HS6) installed in the game center 1, and FIG. HS1 to HS6) shows a schematic diagram of the arrangement of the HS1 to HS6) viewed from the side. FIG. 144 is a schematic side view of a part of the interior of the island facility HS3. FIG. 145 is a schematic perspective view of each device installed in the island facility HS3. FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram showing the storage state of game media stored in the game media storage tank TA3 installed in the island facility HS3. FIG. 147 is a perspective view of a part of the shelf board 407 for collecting game media, viewed from the back side. FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the entire shelf board 407 for collecting game media, viewed from the back side. FIG. 149 is a schematic side view showing how the game media are collected by the shelf plate 407. As shown in FIG. FIG. 150 is a perspective view of a modified version of the shelf board 407, with the game medium storage tank TA partially cut away, viewed from the back side. FIG. 151 is a perspective view of a part of a modification of the shelf board 407a for collecting game media, viewed from the back side. FIG. 152 is a schematic side view of a part of a modification of the shelf board 407a. FIG. 153 is a perspective view showing the upper tank B3 installed in the island facility HS3. 154 is a perspective view showing the inside of the shutter section 440. FIG. FIG. 155 is a schematic side view showing how the shutter section 440 is opened and closed. FIG. 156 is a block diagram showing how devices for controlling the shutter units 440 installed in a plurality of island facilities HS are connected. FIG. 157 is a block diagram showing the connection of devices that control the shutter unit 440. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 143 shows an example of the layout of each island facility (HS1 to HS6) in the game hall 1. As shown in FIG. This layout changes depending on the shape and size of the site of the game arcade 1, and the present invention is not limited to this layout, and may be applied with appropriate changes. KC is displayed for the island facilities HS3 to HS6 provided with the counting unit 805 described above. The counting unit 805 is used to reduce the work of exchanging ball boxes, etc., by employees even when a game machine with a low rental unit price of game media is installed or even when a high rental unit price of game media is installed. are often installed.

The island facilities HS1 to HS3 are labeled with FP and represent the island facilities HS in which the counting unit 805 is not provided. The island facilities HS1 to HS3 on which the FP is displayed place the ball boxes containing the game media acquired by the player M in a state of being stacked on the path near the player M, and the player M is given balls. The counting unit 805 may not be provided when the situation is shown to make the game arcade 1 look more lively or when the desire to play is increased.
Upper tanks B1 to B6 for supplying or collecting pachinko balls Q are provided above the island facilities HS1 to HS6. Between the island facilities HS1 to HS6, transport gutter BR1 to BR10 for transporting pachinko balls Q to or recovering pachinko balls Q from other islands are installed in upper tanks B1 to B6.

Next, the internal structure of the island facilities HS1 to HS6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 149. FIG. Since the internal structures of the island facilities HS1 to HS6 are all the same, the island facility HS3 will be described as an example.
In the vicinity of the center of the island facility HS3, a ball polishing lifting device 401 for polishing the pachinko balls Q and lifting the pachinko balls Q to the upper tank B3 is installed. A transport gutter BR4 for transporting the pachinko balls Q to the adjacent island facility HS2 is provided above the upper tank B3, and the transport gutter BR4 spans over with a slope. Also, the pachinko balls Q sent from the adjacent island facility HS2 are collected by the transport gutter BR3.
The collected pachinko balls Q are passed through an overflow duct 402 which is provided in a cylindrical shape made of metal, wood or resin and which has a hollow interior, and is provided with a slope at the center of the game medium storage tank TA3. It rolls on the bridged overflow shelf 408 and is stored in the game medium storage tank TA3.

The island facility HS3 rolls and conveys the pachinko balls Q with gradients and steps provided by gravity. Therefore, the discharge port of the Tamama lifting device 401 is provided at the highest position.
The gradient for rolling and conveying the pachinko balls Q is about 5% (approximately 2.86 degrees) to 10% (approximately 5.71 degrees). The slope should be gentle. In this embodiment, the shelf board 407, the recovery gutter 403, the transfer gutter BR, and the replenishment gutter 417 are exemplified with a gradient of 5% in order to convey the pachinko balls Q for a long time.

The pachinko balls Q lifted to the upper tank B3 by the Tamama lifting device 401 are supplied to the pachinko machine P or the ball lending machine PT through a sloped metal replenishment gutter 417 having a U-shaped cross section. transported by The pachinko balls Q conveyed by the replenishment gutter 417 are distributed to the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT by the separator 410. 412) to the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT.

An out box BO for collecting out balls discharged from the pachinko machine P is provided for each pachinko machine P below the pachinko machine P. - 特許庁The outbox BO has a resin box shape, collects the pachinko balls Q, counts the collected pachinko balls Q, and outputs the counted information to an external information terminal such as the hall computer 90 or the like. The counted pachinko balls Q are recovered by a sloped recovery gutter 403 and a shelf 407 via a bendable hollow recovery bellows 413 made of metal.

In addition, below the ball lending machine PT, a bendable hollow recovery bellows 413 made of metal is provided. It is recovered by the provided recovery gutter 403 and shelf board 407 .
The recovery bellows 413 has a length that allows it to be installed at a position close to the recovery gutter 403 and the shelf 407 so that the surfaces of the recovery gutter 403 and the shelf 407 made of metal or resin are not damaged by falling pachinko balls Q. The length of each recovery bellows 413 is adjusted according to the inclination of the recovery gutter 403 and the shelf plate 407 .

The upper tank B3 has a structure in which the pachinko balls Q are most preferentially supplied to the replenishment gutter 417 in order to prioritize the replenishment of the pachinko balls Q to the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT, and then an overflow duct. 402 and an overflow shelf 408 to be stored in the game medium storage tank TA3. The collected pachinko balls Q and the pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tank TA3 are conveyed to the upper tank B3 by the ball polishing transfer device 401 via the junction 404. FIG. The pachinko balls Q transported to the upper tank B3 are transported to the supply gutter 417 or to the adjacent island facility HS2 by the transport gutter BR4.

Next, the game medium storage tank TA3 will be described. The game medium storage tank TA3 is made of wood or metal and is shaped like a box with an open top. An upper portion of the game medium storage tank TA3 communicates with an overflow duct 402, and an overflow shelf 408 and a shelf plate 407 whose surfaces are formed of resin or metal are installed with a slope. A space for storing pachinko balls Q is provided inside the game medium storage tank TA3. The bottom part 406 of the game medium storage tank TA3 is provided with a sloped bottom recovery gutter 405 that communicates with the recovery gutter 403 and takes in the recovered pachinko balls Q and the pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tank TA3. .
The confluence part 404 communicates with the bottom recovery gutter 406 and the recovery gutter 403 on the opposite side of the game medium storage tank TA3, and the recovered pachinko balls Q and the pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tank TA3 are polished. It is made to flow into the lifting device 401 .

The game medium storage tank TA3 has a structure capable of storing pachinko balls Q having a larger capacity than the upper tank B3. TA3 has a capacity to store about 150,000 to about 250,000 pachinko balls Q in one tank. By installing a plurality of game medium storage tanks TA3 in the island facility HS in accordance with the number of pachinko machines P installed and business forms, it is possible to increase or decrease the amount of pachinko balls Q stored.
When a plurality of game medium storage tanks TA are provided in the island facility HS, the distance to be conveyed becomes long and it may not be possible to convey only the gradient. In that case, a conveyer-type transport lift or the like, which will be described later, is installed to form a system for lifting or horizontally transporting the pachinko balls Q. FIG.

FIG. 146 shows the order of storage of the pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tank TA3 by numerals "1" to "5". The pachinko balls Q rolling on the shelf board 407 roll to the bottom end of the shelf board 407 and are stored from the end of the game medium storage tank TA3. When the portion "1" of the lowermost storage tank is filled, the pachinko balls Q stay on the shelf plate 407, and while gradually changing the position to drop into the game medium storage tank TA3, the game medium storage tank TA3 is moved to " Fill in order from 1. The game medium storage tank TA3 does not fill the entire capacity with the pachinko balls Q, but sets the initial value SS with a margin in the storage capacity in anticipation of the pachinko balls Q being returned at once after the store is closed. The initial value SS is a set value when all the pachinko balls Q are evenly stored in the island facilities HS of the game hall 1 .
A spare ball detection sensor S7 is attached to the position of the initial value SS, and the ball detection sensor S7 is used as a spare sensor for S4 and S5. The ball detection sensor S7 can be used to quickly respond to emergencies and to detect ball jumping of the sensor due to a foreign object BD. A setting change to the ball detection sensor S7 can be handled by a simple operation such as wiring replacement or control setting change.

Next, the shelf board 407 will be described with reference to FIGS. 148-149. The shelf plate 407 is formed in a long flat plate shape made of hard metal or resin to prevent the surface from being worn, and is attached to the side wall of the game medium storage tank TA3 with a slope.
The shelf board 407 is attached to the game medium storage tank TA3 by an L-shaped support piece 425, and the support piece 425 rotatably supports a rotating rod 424. As shown in FIG. The rotating rod 424 is fixed to the shelf board 407 by a rotating rod fixing piece 422 .
Between the side wall 429 side of the game medium storage tank TA3 and the shelf plate 407, a space 427 smaller than the diameter of the pachinko balls Q (11 mm diameter of the pachinko balls Q) is provided so that the pachinko balls Q do not fall but foreign objects BD and the like can fall. ing.

The angle of the shelf board 407 in the width direction can be adjusted by rotating the shelf board 407 around the rotary bar 424 . By adjusting the angle in the width direction, it is possible to change the rate at which the pachinko balls Q fall toward the game medium storage tank TA3. By slightly inclining this angle adjustment toward the side wall 429 of the game medium storage tank TA3 as shown in FIG. It has a structure that can be stored in Since the pachinko balls Q can be stored in order (1 to 5) in the game medium storage tank TA3, the amount of pachinko balls Q stored can be accurately measured by the ball detection sensors (S1 to S7). In this way, by accurately detecting the storage amount, the storage amount of the game medium storage tanks TA in the entire game hall 1 can be equalized by controlling the transportation of the pachinko balls Q. FIG.
Also, the inclination of the shelf board 407 in the width direction is optimally about 1 degree to 2 degrees. In this embodiment, an angle adjusting portion 421 is provided at the end of the shelf board 407, and the angle adjusting portion 421 as an angle adjusting means is automatically and steplessly provided with an angle adjusting motor 423 and gears (428, 426). Although the angle can be adjusted, the angle may be adjusted in stages using a solenoid or the like.

On the rear surface of the shelf board 407, ball detection sensors (S1 to S7) for detecting the amount of pachinko balls Q stored are installed. As the ball detection sensors (S1 to S7), a photo sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, or a proximity sensor for magnetic force detection is adopted. By using a photo sensor or an ultrasonic sensor, the distance to the pachinko balls Q can be measured, so it is possible to very finely measure the capacity stored in the game medium storage tank TA. Further, by installing ball detection sensors (S1 to S7) for detecting the amount of pachinko balls Q stored on the back surface of the shelf plate 407, it is possible to prevent the pachinko balls Q from falling directly to the ball detection sensors (S1 to S7). prevent. Therefore, the coil of the sensor, the electronic parts, etc. are not destroyed by the impact caused by the pachinko ball Q being dropped, unlike the prior art. In addition, since the ball detection sensors (S1 to S7) are positioned at the top of the game medium storage tank TA3, there is little drop and the ball detection sensors (S1 to S7) are less likely to be damaged by the impact of falling pachinko balls Q. . The effects described above also apply to a mobile sensor, which will be described later.

Next, modified examples of the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) are shown in FIGS. 150 to 152. FIG. The angle adjusting mechanisms (421a, 422a, 425a) have the same structure as described above, so the description is omitted, and the same reference numerals are denoted by a. The ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) are used for control to detect the amount of balls, which will be described later. As for the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2), a photo sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, or a proximity sensor for magnetic force detection is adopted in the sensor unit 433 .
Unlike the structure described above, the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) move on the rail portion 431, so that the two sensors can very finely measure the amount of pachinko balls Q stored. The rail portion 431 includes a rail 436 having a U-shaped cross section and a pulley 435 inside the rail 436 . As the pulley 435 moves on the rail 436, the movable portion 438 moves. The movable portion 438 incorporates the sensor portion 433 and detects the pachinko balls Q. As shown in FIG.

The mobile ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) can accurately measure the amount of pachinko balls Q stored, unlike the above-described fixed type. In the case of the fixed type, when the pachinko balls Q reach the detection distance of the ball detection sensor, it is possible to grasp the amount of balls at a preset position, but the amount of pachinko balls Q stored between the sensors is detected. Can not. However, the mobile ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) are capable of steplessly measuring the amount of pachinko balls Q stored by moving. Since it is possible to measure even the distance of the pachinko balls Q being held, it is possible to grasp the amount of the pachinko balls Q stored more minutely. In addition, in the case of the mobile ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2), the setting can be freely changed depending on the position to move the level at the time of control. becomes possible. Therefore, when it is desired to change the holding amount of the pachinko balls Q in the entire game hall 1 depending on the type of business, it is possible to freely set it, which is effective.

A linear drive system is adopted for the drive system for movement, and a plurality of permanent magnets 437 provided with N and S poles provided inside the pulley 435 are arranged, and a movable part 438 containing a coil flows current. By controlling the movable portion 438 by electromagnetic force, the movable portion 438 performs straight movement in the longitudinal direction of the shelf plate 407a without contact. End sensors 439 for detecting the end of the rail portion 431 are provided at both ends of the rail portion 431 . Adoption of the linear system enables accurate control of rectilinear motion. In addition, there is also a moving mechanism that moves the ball screw nut to move the ball screw nut to perform straight motion by driving a motor connected to the ball screw as another straight motion method.

Next, a structure for conveying pachinko balls Q between island facilities HS will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 155. FIG. As shown in FIG. 153, the pachinko balls Q are conveyed between the island facilities (HS2, HS3, HS4) by conveying troughs (BR3 to BR6) that span with a slope.
Above the upper tank B3, transport gutter BR3 and BR5 are provided for transporting pachinko balls Q stored in adjacent island facilities HS2 and HS4. Further, under the upper tank B3, transport gutter BR4 and BR6 are provided for receiving the pachinko balls Q stored in the adjacent island facilities HS2 and HS4 into the upper tank B3.

A shutter portion 440 provided on the side wall of the upper tank B3 is provided below the transport gutter BR3 and BR5.
The shutter portion 440 is fixed to the side wall of the upper tank B3 with a screw or the like in a shutter mounting hole 447 provided in the shutter mounting portion 443 . As shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, the shutter unit 440 moves up and down a shutter movable unit 442 to which a shutter motor 441 is connected by means of a gear or the like to close or open the conveying passage 451 of the upper tank B3. It controls the transport of ball Q. The shutter motor 441 detects the position of the shutter movable portion 442 by means of an upper limit switch 446, a lower limit switch 445, and a detection piece 448 provided on the shutter movable portion 442, and determines whether the shutter movable portion 442 is at an appropriate position. Then, the shutter movable portion 442 is moved up and down to close or open the transfer passage 451 .

Next, the connection configuration and control of the shutter unit 440 will be described with reference to block diagrams and control flows for controlling the shutter unit 440 with reference to FIGS. 155 to 157. FIG.
First, the connection configuration of the equipment for controlling the shutter section 440 will be described by exemplifying the island facility HS5 in which the counter JC2 shown in FIGS. 156 and 157 is installed. The shutter unit 440 includes a shutter control board 485, an own island shutter unit 440L, a neighboring island shutter unit 440R, a group of own island sensors 483L, and a group of neighboring island sensors 483R. If the controls shown in FIG. 157 are connected in a daisy chain as one unit, the configuration shown in FIG. 156 is obtained. In FIG. 156, one structural unit centering on the island facility HS5 is indicated by a solid line, and another structural unit is indicated by a broken line.

The shutter control board 485 provided in the island facility HS5 is connected by wiring to the self-island shutter section 440L provided on the right side of the upper tank B5. It is connected via a substrate 485 to the adjacent shutter portion 440R provided on the left side of the upper tank B6 by wiring.
In addition, the shutter control board 485 is connected by wiring to the own island sensor group 483L installed in the game medium storage tank TA5. It is connected by wiring to the adjacent island sensor group 483R installed in the game medium storage tank TA6 provided in the . The self island sensor group 483L and the neighboring island sensor group 483R may employ either the above-described fixed type ball detection sensors (S1 to S7) or mobile type ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2).

Next, control of the shutter section 440 of the shutter control board 485 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 158. FIG. The control of the shutter section 440 used for the control of equalizing the amount of pachinko balls Q stored, which will be described later, will be described.

The shutter section opening/closing process (S3501) is control when controlling one shutter section 440. FIG. If a shutter control signal is transmitted from the shutter control board 485 (YES in S3503) when equalizing the amount of pachinko balls Q stored, the shutter motor 441 is driven to move the shutter movable part 442 up and down ( S3504). The detection piece 448 of the shutter movable part 442 contacts the upper or lower limit switch (445, 446), and the shutter motor 441 is driven until the sensor of the upper or lower limit switch detects (NO in S3505). If the upper limit switch (445, 446) is turned on (YES in S3505), the driving of the shutter motor 441 is stopped and the operation of the shutter movable portion 442 is stopped (S3506). After that, the timer is activated (S3507), and the operation of the shutter movable portion 442 is stopped (NO in S3508 to S3506) until the timer elapses for a predetermined time (YES in S3508). Although the set value of the timer depends on the specification of the shutter motor 441, it is optimal to set the timer to about 1 to 3 minutes. The timer prevents the shutter motor 441 from burning due to the sensitive reaction of the ball detection sensors S and Sa.

<Control for averaging the amount of pachinko balls stored in the game medium storage tank of the island facility>
Next, by controlling the shutter unit 440 described above, the amount of pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tanks (TA1 to TA6) of the island facilities (HS1 to HS6) installed in the game hall 1 is The overall averaging control will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 167. FIG.
FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing the storage state of game media stored in the game media storage tank TA installed in each island facility HS. FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing the storage tank averaging process. FIG. 161 is a flow chart showing the shutter processing for ball transport. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing closing processing mode processing. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing sensor position setting processing. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing sensor position setting processing. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing sensor position setting processing. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing initialization processing. FIG. 167 is a schematic bottom view of movement of the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) installed on the shelf 407a.

The game medium storage tank averaging process (S3510) will be described. The game medium storage tank averaging process (S3510) is the main process, and is roughly divided into a closing process mode (S3540) and a ball conveying shutter process (S3520). The ball conveying shutter processing S3520 is used during normal operation, and the closing processing mode (S3540) may return a large number of pachinko balls Q to the counter JC in a short time at the time of closing. The process used when expected. In the closing processing mode (S3540), the amount of pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tanks (TA2, TA5) in which the counters JC are installed is adjusted in order to smoothly count the pachinko balls Q obtained by the customers, especially when the store is closed. is a control that adjusts

The game medium storage tank TA averaging process (S3510) branches into a closing process mode (S3540) and a ball conveying shutter process S3520 (S3511). When the closing processing mode (S3540) is selected (YES in S3511), the closing processing mode (S3540) is selected (NO in S3515) until an initial value flag, which will be described later, is turned ON. When the initial value flag is turned on, the process proceeds to the shutter processing for ball transport (S3520) (YES in S3515). As shown in FIG. 159, the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) is set in five stages, and the amount of pachinko balls Q stored is divided into five sensor levels, and the pachinko balls Q are conveyed and controlled for averaging. ing.

First, the ball conveying shutter process (S3520) will be described with reference to FIGS. 156, 157 and 161. FIG.
In the ball conveying shutter process (S3520), the pachinko balls Q are conveyed by controlling the shutter unit 440 described above, and the game medium storage tanks (TA1 to TA6) of the island facilities (HS1 to HS6) installed in the game hall 1 ) is averaged over the entire game hall 1 .

In the ball conveying shutter process (S3520), the game medium storage tank TA5 of the own island and the game medium storage tank TA6 of the neighboring island are compared, and if the sensor level of the adjacent ball detection sensor (S or Sa) is low (S3521 YES), that is, if the amount of pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tank TA5 of the own island is larger than that of the neighboring island, the shutter section 440L of the own island is opened (S3523), and the shutter section 440R of the neighboring island is closed ( S3524).

Next, the game medium storage tank TA5 of the own island and the game medium storage tank TA6 of the neighboring island are compared, and if the sensor level of the adjacent ball detection sensor (S or Sa) is not low (NO in S3521), game medium storage tank TA5 and the game medium storage tank TA6 of the neighboring island, and if the sensor level of the ball detection sensor S·Sa of the neighboring island is high (YES in S3522), that is, the game medium storage tank TA5 of the own island If the amount of pachinko balls Q stored in is smaller than that of the neighboring island, the shutter section 440R of the neighboring island is opened (S3526), and the shutter section 440L of the own island is closed (S3527).
If the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) of the neighboring island is not high (NO in S3522), it indicates that the sensor levels are the same, that is, the amount of pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tank TA5 of the own island. is the same as that of the neighboring island, the shutter section 440R of the neighboring island and the shutter section 440L of the own island are closed (S3525).

In this way, the island facilities HS5 and HS6 have been exemplified and explained, but the island facilities HS1 to HS6 are controlled in the same way, and the amount of pachinko balls stored in the game medium storage tanks TA of the own island and the adjacent island is always adjusted. Control is performed so that the game medium storage tanks TA of the island facilities HS are evenly distributed throughout the game hall 1 by comparison using the detection sensors S and Sa. Therefore, the pachinko balls Q stored in the island facilities HS connected by the transport gutter BR can be transferred between the island facilities HS. Therefore, the pachinko balls Q stored in the entire game hall 1 can be efficiently used, and the shortage of pachinko balls Q to the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT does not occur.

Next, the closing processing mode processing (S3540) will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 and 162 to 167. FIG.
In the closing processing mode processing (S3540), first, the control differs depending on whether or not the island facility (HS2, HS5) in which the counter JC is installed (S3541). If it is the island facility HS where the counter JC is installed (YES in S3541), the lower limit level "lower" is set to the sensor level "2" as shown in FIG. 159(B) (S3542). If the island facilities (HS1, HS3, HS4, HS6) are not equipped with counters JC (NO in S3541), the upper limit level "up" is changed to sensor level "4" as shown in FIG. 159(A). and "5" (S3551).

Next, the island equipment (HS2, HS5) determines whether or not the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) on the neighboring island is at the upper limit level (S3543). If the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) on the neighboring island is not at the upper limit level (NO in S3543), the island facility (HS2, HS5) will set the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) on the island itself to It is determined whether or not it is at the lower limit level (S3545).
If the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) on the own island is lower than the lower limit level (YES in S3545), the island equipment (HS2, HS5) opens the shutter section 440 of the neighboring island (S3553), By closing the shutter section 440 (S3554), it is possible to always secure the necessary amount of storage in the own island. Also, if the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) on the own island is not lower than the lower limit level (NO in S3545), the island equipment (HS2, HS5) closes the shutter section 440 on the neighboring island (S3555). , by opening the shutter unit 440 of the own island (S3556), pachinko balls of a lower limit level or more that is equal to or more than the required storage amount of the own island so that it can be handled even if it is returned to the counter JC at once after the store is closed. Q can be transported to secure the necessary free space in the game medium storage tank TA. In this way, by switching the mode to the closing processing mode, it is possible to secure the necessary free space in the game medium storage tank TA of the island facility HS in which the counter JC is installed in advance.

In addition, when the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) on the neighboring island reaches the upper limit level (YES in S3543), the island equipment (HS2, HS5) activates a timer to prevent malfunction of the sensor (S3544). . It is always determined whether or not the sensor level of the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) on the neighboring island has reached the upper limit level until the timer elapses for a predetermined time (NO in S3546, S3544, S3546). If the timer has elapsed for a predetermined period of time (YES in S3546), the island equipment (HS2, HS5) turns ON the sensor level increase flag of its own island used for control described later (S3547). As shown in FIGS. 159(B) to 159(C), by turning ON the sensor level increase flag for the own island, control is performed to raise the sensor position of the lower limit level by one step. By increasing the sensor level, it is possible to follow the stored amount of returned pachinko balls Q in real time, and to reduce wasteful traffic of pachinko balls Q.例文帳に追加
Until the lower limit level of the own island rises and becomes the same as the initial value (YES in S3548), the rise flag for raising the lower limit level sensor position by one step is turned ON (S3547). If the lower limit level of the own island becomes the same as the initial value SS (YES in S3548), the initial value flag is turned ON (S3549).
By raising the pachinko ball Q to the same value as the initial value SS, it is possible to guide the pachinko balls Q to accumulate up to the initial value SS without the need for wasteful movement of the pachinko balls Q. Also, the installed ball detection sensor (S or Sa) can be effectively used.

In this way, by changing the level position of the sensor from the currently set sensor level position to another sensor level position corresponding to the business form of the game hall 1, the movement of the pachinko balls Q can be realized. can be reduced and the pachinko balls Q can be efficiently stored. In particular, the time during which the game hall 1 is in operation after closing is not so long, and by adopting the above-described system, it is possible to move the pachinko balls Q in advance. can be realized. As a result, when the store opens on the next day, it is possible to operate the game with the amount of pachinko balls Q stored in the whole game hall 1 being equalized.

If the sensor level does not reach the upper limit level (NO in S3552), the island facilities (HS1, HS3, HS4, HS6) in which the counter JC is not installed open the shutter section 440 of the neighboring island (S3553 ), and closes the shutter unit 440 of its own island (S3554). By opening the shutter unit 440 of the neighboring island (S3553) and closing the shutter unit 440 of the own island (S3554), even if the counter JC is returned to the island equipment (HS2, HS5) at once, In order to be able to respond, the pachinko balls Q are quickly transported to the upper limit level, that is, the initial value SS, to the island facilities (HS1, HS3, HS4, HS6) where the counter JC is not installed, and the counter JC is installed in advance. Necessary free space can be secured in the game medium storage tanks TA of the island facilities (HS2, HS5). In this way, by moving the pachinko balls to the initial value SS in advance, it is not necessary to provide time for equalizing the reserves of the pachinko balls Q which are separated after closing of the game hall 1 among the island facilities HS.

As a modified example, the island facility HS2 in which the counter JC is installed among the island facilities HS in which the counting unit 805 is not installed will be described with reference to FIG.
As shown in FIG. 176, the island facility HS2 is provided with a small tank RTA2 capable of storing the pachinko balls Q under the counter JC, communicated with the small tank RTA2, and conveyed by a conveyor lift 473 to store the pachinko balls Q in the small tank RTA2. is conveyed by the recovery gutter 403, the amount of pachinko balls Q stored can be increased. Further, by providing the ball detection sensor S5 in the small tank RTA2, the control described above is possible.
In this way, by providing the small tank RTA2, even if pachinko balls Q exceeding the lifting capacity of the Tamama lifting device 401 are thrown into the counter JC, once stocked in the small tank RTA2, the counter JC can be discharged. The discharge capacity is not lowered, and the player M is not kept waiting even if the count is concentrated just before the closing of the store.

The island facility HS2 is often installed with a pachinko machine P that can be expected to obtain a large number of pachinko balls at once. The game hall 1 may not have the counting unit 805 in order to create a lively atmosphere by stacking the ball boxes. Conversely, the island facility HS (KC) in which the counting unit 805 is installed returns the acquired pachinko balls Q on the spot, so the movement of the pachinko balls Q is small. Therefore, the storage amount of the game medium storage tank TA may be small.
The amount of pachinko balls Q stored in at least an island facility HS2 in which a counter JC is installed among the island facilities HS in which the counting unit 805 is not installed is made larger than that in the island facility HS (KC) in which the counting unit 805 is installed. As a result, it is possible to immediately respond to the return processing of the pachinko balls Q counted by the counter JC and the replenishment of the pachinko machine P when the processing after the store is closed or the number of balls to be paid out is large.

Next, the sensor position setting process (S3560) used for controlling the shutter unit 440 described above will be described with the movable ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) as an example, but there is no particular need to limit it, and fixed type sensors will be described. It goes without saying that it can be applied to the sensors (S1-S7).

In the sensor position setting process (S3560), an initialization process (S3580) for determining the amount of pachinko balls Q stored in the game medium storage tank TA and the position of the sensor is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the closing processing mode processing (S3540) (S3561). If it is during the closing processing mode processing (S3540) (YES in S3561), it is determined whether it is the island facility (HS2, HS5) in which the counter JC is installed (S3562). If it is an island facility (HS2, HS5) where the counter JC is installed (YES in S3561), the linear operates (S3563), and the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) move along the rail portion 431 to the sensor level " 2” position (“2” in FIGS. 159 and 167) (YES in S3564), and sets the lower limit level (FIG. 167(A), S3542 in FIG. 162).
The lower limit level does not move until the sensor level rise flag turns ON (S3547 in FIG. 162) (NO in S3565), but if the sensor level rise flag turns ON (S3547 in FIG. 162) (YES in S3565), linear is activated (S3563), the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) raise the sensor level by one step along the rail portion 431 and move to the sensor level "3" position ("3" in FIGS. 159 and 167). ) (YES in S3569), the lower limit level is set ("Lower" in FIG. 162), and the sensor level is stored (S3571). This series of operations (S3565 to S3572) is repeated until the sensor level rise flag is turned ON and the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) move to the initial values (SS in FIG. 167) (NO in S3572).
If the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) move to the initial value (SS in FIG. 167) (YES in S3572), the initial value flag is turned ON (S3573), and the sensor position setting process (S3560) ends.

If the island facilities (HS1, HS3, HS4, HS6) are not equipped with counters JC (NO in S3562), the linear system operates (S3566), and the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) are detected by the rail section 431. , to the position of the initial value (SS in FIG. 167) (NO in S3567). If the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) have moved to the initial value SS (YES in S3567), the upper limit level is set ("UP" in FIG. 162), and the sensor level is stored (S3574). Then, the sensor position setting process (S3560) for the island facilities (HS1, HS3, HS4, HS6) in which the counter JC is not installed is terminated.

Also, if the island facilities (HS1 to HS6) are not in the closing processing mode processing (S3540) (NO in S3561), the ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) perform detection at a preset distance, and perform ball detection. It moves to the sensor level where the sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) are turned on (FIG. 167(B), S3575). Then, the sensor level is stored (S3576) and the linear is operated (S3577). Since it is not possible to predict whether the amount of pachinko balls Q will decrease or increase during operation, the stored sensor level is moved up and down (Fig. 167(C)), and the ball detection sensor Sa1 moves to the position where the amount of the stored pachinko balls decreases. Then, the ball detection sensor Sa2 moves to a position where the storage amount increases and monitors the storage amount. (FIG. 167(B), S3575), the sensor level is stored (S3576), and the linear is operated (S3577). The same processing (S3575 to S3577) is repeated during business hours.
In this way, the mobile sensor can detect whether the amount of pachinko balls Q on hold is currently decreasing or increasing, so detailed control can be performed while grasping the trend of increase or decrease. becomes possible.

As described above, the mobile ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) do not need to install many sensors unlike the conventional stepped fixed type, and can detect even a small number of sensors. is. In addition, the mobile ball detection sensors (Sa1 and Sa2) are capable of stepless control as well as stepless control, so the amount of pachinko balls Q stored can be controlled in five steps. In addition, it is possible to realize real-time control according to the amount of storage. In particular, it is most suitable for equalizing the amount of balls in the entire game medium storage tank TA5 of the game hall 1 within the limited time until the employees return home after the store is closed.

Next, the initialization process (S3580) will be described. The game medium storage tank TA of the island facility (HS1 to HS6) actually throws in the pachinko balls Q to be stored to determine the level position of the sensor. It is determined when designing the storage tank TA (S3581). The sensor level "5" is set in consideration of a slight margin from the position where the pachinko balls Q cannot enter. In addition, in the island facility HS where the counter JC is installed, when the amount of pachinko balls Q stored reaches the sensor level "5", the counter JC is blocked or displayed to refuse to accept the counter JC. is also possible. The sensor level "1" is set to the minimum number of balls that can be secured within the own island until the pachinko balls Q are transported.
Next, the pachinko balls Q to be stored are actually stored in the game medium storage tank TA, and the sensor levels "2" to "4" are set to a good amount of balls and stored (S3583 to S3585). In the case of this embodiment, 50,000 sensor level "1", 100,000 sensor level "2", 150,000 sensor level "3", 200,000 sensor level "4", and sensor level A storage amount of 250,000 "5" is optimal.

<Detection control of ball clogging on shelf board of island facility>
FIG. 168 to FIG. 168 to FIG. 168 to FIG. Description will be made with reference to FIG.
FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing ball clogging detection processing. FIG. 169 is a flow chart showing ball clogging abnormality processing. FIG. 170 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a foreign matter BD is mixed in the shelf board 407. FIG. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram showing the state when the shelf board 407 is activated. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram showing the state when the shelf board 407 is activated. FIG. 173 is a perspective view showing a ball detection sensor 460 and a vibration device 470 of a modification installed on the shelf board 407. FIG. FIG. 174 is a perspective view showing the inside of a modified vibrating device 470 installed on the shelf board 407. FIG.

A state in which a foreign matter BD is mixed in the shelf board 407 will be described with reference to FIG. 170 . Normally, the pachinko balls Q are stored from the storage area TAC1 to the storage area TAC2 according to the slope of the shelf board 407, and are gradually stored in the left direction. However, if the foreign object BD is present, the pachinko balls Q2 will fall from the middle due to the foreign object BD acting as a barrier, disrupting the proper storage order of the pachinko balls Q, causing the ball detection sensor (S or Sa) to make an erroneous detection. The control for equalizing the game medium storage tank TA will not work well.

Therefore, the ball clogging detection process (S3590) shown in FIG. 168 is necessary. The ball clogging detection process (S3590) stores the current sensor level (S3591). It waits until there is movement in the sensor level (NO in S3592). If the sensor level has moved (YES in S3592), it is determined whether or not the sensor level is +-1 from the previous sensor level (S3593). If it is in the range of +-1 from the previous sensor level (YES in S3593), it is the normal order of the pachinko balls Q to be stored, and the ball clogging detection process (S3590) ends.

If it is not in the range of +-1 from the previous sensor level (NO in S3593), there is a possibility that the balls are clogged due to foreign matter BD, so there is an undetected sensor between the ball detection sensors that are ON. (S3594). If there is no undetected sensor among the ball detection sensors that are ON (NO in S3594), it is the order of the normal pachinko ball Q storage, and the ball clogging detection process (S3590) ends.
If there is an undetected sensor among the ball detection sensors (S or Sa) that are ON (YES in S3594), there is a possibility that a ball jam has occurred, so the ball jam flag is turned ON. As (S3595), the ball clogging detection process (S3590) is terminated.

As described above, by recognizing an undetected sensor, ball clogging can be detected quickly, and the trouble in control can be quickly restored to normal. In addition, in the case of the mobile ball detection sensor Sa, by measuring the distance to the pachinko ball Q while moving as shown in FIG. It is possible to quickly detect whether or not it has been done. A sensor that detects a distance can detect a distance using an ultrasonic sensor, a photosensor, or a laser beam that picks up reflected waves or reflected light.

Next, the ball clogging abnormality process (S3600) will be described as a process for dealing with the case where ball clogging occurs. The ball clogging abnormality process (S3600) waits until the ball clogging flag of the ball clogging detection process (S3590) becomes ON (S3595) (NO in S3601). If the ball jam flag in the ball jam detection process (S3590) is ON (S3595) (YES in S3601), the ball jam elimination control is turned ON (S3602). When the ball jam clearing control is turned on, the ball jam clearing device, which will be described later, is driven.

In the ball jam abnormality processing (S3600), the ball jam clearing device is operated (NO in S3605, S3602) until the ball jam flag is turned OFF (YES in S3603), and the result of operating the ball jam clearing device a predetermined number of times. (YES in S3605), it is determined that the ball jam has not been cleared, the ball jam abnormality flag is turned ON (S3606), and an employee is notified in the vicinity of the island equipment HS or in the management area 2, and the ball jam Abnormality processing (S3600) ends.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, as a ball clogging clearing device, the shelf plate 407 is built in an L-shaped support piece 425 to a position where the stored pachinko balls Q and the like do not interfere with rotation. After being lifted by the solenoid 428, the supporting piece 425 rotatably supports the rotating rod 424, so that the angle adjustment motor 423 is driven to adjust the angle of the shelf plate 407 to an angle at which the foreign matter BD can be removed. By changing, the foreign object BD can be dropped and eliminated. The angle adjuster 421 can also be tilted left and right around the axis of the rotating rod 424 . In addition, it is possible to drop and remove the foreign matter BD by inclining not only in one direction but also in the right and left directions many times.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, a ball detection sensor 460 equipped with a vibrating device 470 that can be employed in the ball detection sensors (S1 to S7) can be used as a modified ball jam clearing device.
The ball detection sensor 460 can be attached to the back surface of the shelf board 407 by screws or the like through attachment holes 466 formed in a plate-shaped sensor attachment piece 467 . The sensor part 461 is mounted in the mounting hole 466 by means of the mounting base 463 . Further, the sensor unit 461 incorporates a photosensor 462 and outputs an ON signal in response to the pachinko ball Q according to a set detection distance. A vibrating portion 470 surrounded by a vibrating case 465 generates vibration by rotating a weight eccentrically supported by a small motor 472 .
This ball clogging clearing device vibrates a plurality of ball detection sensors 460 provided on the rear surface of the shelf board 407, thereby causing the foreign matter BD to drop or move to the end of the path of the pachinko balls Q, thereby clearing the ball clogging. It is a mechanism that performs A compact design is also possible, especially by using a vibrator. In addition, by being integrated with the ball detection sensor 460, it is possible to remove foreign matter in places where abnormalities should not occur (such as above the ball detection sensor), and at the same time detect and eliminate ball clogging. Therefore, it is possible to design a compact solution system including control.

(Modified island facility)
A modification of the island facility HS will be described with reference to FIG. Since the structure above the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT is the same as the structure shown in FIGS. The pachinko balls Q discharged from the outbox BO or the ball lending machine PT are distributed to the left and right by mountain-shaped distribution shelves 471 made of metal, resin, or the like. The distributed pachinko balls Q drop from a shelf plate 407b, which is a flatly spread metal plate provided with holes through which the pachinko balls Q pass, into the game medium storage tank TAb.
The game medium storage tank TAB is made of metal or wood and has a box-like shape, is open at the top, and is closed at the top with a shelf board 407b. In addition, the island facility HS is provided with a plurality of game medium storage tanks TAb, and a conveyor lift 473 is provided between the game medium storage tanks TAb so that the island facility HS can be transported even in a long island facility HS where a natural slope cannot be obtained. . The bottom recovery gutter 405b lifts the pachinko balls Q in the game medium storage tank TAb by the conveyor lift 473, and finally lifts them to the upper tank B via a ball polishing lifting device (not shown).

(Structure of platform information display device)
The table information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 67. FIG. The platform information display device K is attached to the curtain plate 894 by a mounting base (not shown). The curtain plate 894 is made of aluminum or stainless steel in a U-shape and fixed to the island facility HS with screws, nails, bolts, or the like. Above the curtain plate 894, a separator 410 connected to the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT shown in FIG. ing.
In addition, the machine information display device K displays information output from the pachinko machine P, the ball lending machine PT and the outbox BO to the player M via the machine computer 93, such as big wins and the number of starts. there is The platform computer 93 also transmits the collected information to the hall computer 90 via the island computer 91 .

<Modification 1>
Next, the structure of Modified Example 1 of the platform information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 186. FIG.
FIG. 177 is a schematic diagram showing end faces of the machine information display device Ka and the pachinko machine P of Modification 1 viewed from the side with the island facility HS cut. FIG. 178 is a perspective view of the platform information display device Ka of Modification 1 as seen from the front side. FIG. 179 is a perspective view of the platform information display device Ka of Modification 1 as seen from the back side. FIG. 180 is a schematic front view of a state in which information is displayed by the machine information display device Ka of Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 181 is a schematic side view showing a state in which the platform information display device Ka of Modification 1 attached to the island facility HS is closed. FIG. 182 is a schematic side view showing a state in which the platform information display device Ka of Modification 1 attached to the island facility HS is open. FIG. 183 is a perspective view showing from above a state in which the platform information display device Ka of Modification 1 attached to the island facility HS is open. FIG. 184 is a perspective view showing the call lamp portion 620a attached to the machine information display device Ka of Modification 1 from the front side. FIG. 185 is a perspective view showing the call lamp portion 620a attached to the machine information display device Ka of Modification 1 from the back side. FIG. 186 is an explanatory view showing a cut end face of the call lamp portion 620a attached to the machine information display device Ka of Modification 1. As shown in FIG.

The table information display device Ka will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 177 to 183 and 197. FIG. The machine information display device Ka is roughly composed of a machine information control board 601 (FIG. 197), a liquid crystal display section 610, a housing 611, a call lamp section 620a, a hinge 613 and an electronic key holding section 614. FIG.
The machine information display device Ka is formed with a width that includes the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT, and further extends in the vertical direction from above the pachinko machine P to the upper end of the island equipment HS.
When a plurality of machine information display devices Ka are installed in the island facility HS, they can be brought into close contact with each other so that the plurality of machine information display devices Ka can express one connected and related performance. Moreover, even if the machine information display device Ka is used alone, the performance expression is possible.

Most of the front surface of the table information display device Ka is covered with a liquid crystal display section 610 , and the side surfaces, lower end, and upper portion of the liquid crystal display section 610 are covered with a metal casing 611 .
The liquid crystal display unit 610 includes a transparent liquid crystal display substrate 612 surrounded by a housing 611, and includes a transparent liquid crystal display screen 891a by controlling the liquid crystal to be transparent. In addition, various effects and data can be displayed by control.
The machine information display device Ka has a call lamp portion 620a, which will be described later, on the lower side surface of the housing 611 in the horizontal direction.
In addition, the platform information display device Ka has hinges 613 attached to the housing 611 at both upper ends so that the platform information display device Ka can be opened and closed vertically. Electronic key holders 614 are attached to both ends of the housing 611 below the hinges 613 .

The electronic key holder 614 is attached to the housing 611 by a screw or the like using a holder attachment piece 617 . The holding portion attachment piece 617 is connected to a first arm portion 617 that is rotationally supported, and the first arm portion 617 and the second arm portion 617 are rotationally supported. A torque fixing portion 615 containing an electronic key is rotatably supported by a second arm portion 617 .
As shown in FIG. 177, a hinge 613 is fixed to a metal or wooden horizontal beam 491 of the island equipment HS, and an electronic key holder 614 is fixed to a metal or wooden vertical beam 492 of the island equipment HS with screws or the like. there is

The electronic key holding part 614 can fix the platform information display device Ka at a certain angle when the platform information display device Ka is opened and closed vertically (FIGS. 182 and 183). By fixing the platform information display device Ka in an upwardly open state, the employee MS does not need to hold the platform information display device Ka with his/her hands, and can work with both hands, so that troubles and the like can be dealt with quickly. be.
In addition, in the closed state (FIG. 181), it is possible to fix the opening/closing operation with a built-in electronic key. When releasing the electronic key, the electronic key cannot be released without authentication such as fingerprint authentication, which will be described later, to identify a person, or input of a personal identification number by a signal from a remote control or the like.

As described above, the electronic key holder 614 is controlled by the base information control board 601 and has the function of fixing the base information display device Ka by the fingerprint authentication reader 627 and the fingerprint authentication board 628 . Therefore, after opening and closing the machine information display device Ka, reaching from above the pachinko machine P, operating the lock of the door on the back of the pachinko machine P, opening and closing the pachinko machine P, the main board and the payout board, It is possible to prevent the act of attaching ROMs, substrates, etc., and the act of grabbing banknotes from the banknote transport gutter after purchasing the game media of the ball lending machine PT.

Next, the call lamp portion 620a will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. FIG. The call lamp portion 620a has a cylindrical shape with a diameter of about 35 mm, and is formed with a length close to the full width of the platform information display device Ka. Lamp attachment portions 622a at both ends of the call lamp portion 620a are attached to the side surfaces of the housing 611 below the table information display device Ka.
A columnar lamp housing 621a is formed of a metallic material such as stainless steel so as to cover the call display 623a. The center of the lamp housing 621a is partially cut out to expose the call display 623. As shown in FIG. The call display portion 623a is made of milky-white or diamond-cut transmissive transparent resin, and allows light from LEDs 625 mounted on an LED substrate 624 incorporated in the call lamp portion 620a to pass therethrough.
By attaching the lamp casing 621a of the call lamp 620a to the table information display device Ka integrated with the work door as described above, the employee MS can easily lift the work door upward, For M, it became easier to grab and stand up. In addition, since the portion to be grasped has a cylindrical shape, it is easy to grasp. Further, by mounting the call lamp portion 620a on the platform information display device Ka in the horizontal direction, the work door can be easily lifted upward.

A fingerprint reader 627 for reading fingerprints is provided in the center of the rear surface of the lamp housing 621a. The fingerprint reader 627 can read the fingerprint at the same time when the call lamp section 620a is gripped. Therefore, the operation of releasing the electronic key and the operation of grasping the call lamp portion 620a and raising the table information display device Ka can be performed simultaneously, so that the employee can quickly proceed with the work.
A fingerprint authentication board 628 connected to a fingerprint reader 627, a touch sensor board 626, and an LED board 624 on which an LED 625 is mounted are provided inside the lamp housing 621a. Each of these boards is controlled by a platform information control board 601 .

The touch sensor substrate 626 connected to the metal lamp casing 621a uses a capacitive touch sensor or a photoelectric photosensor to detect whether a human hand touches the lamp casing 621a. Alternatively, the lighting of the call display portion 623a can be controlled by a person's hand.
In this way, since it is a simple operation that a person only needs to touch with his or her hand, the call display portion 623a can be turned on at the same time that the call lamp portion 620a is gripped. The operation of turning on the light and the operation of turning off the light are quick and easy.
In particular, an elderly player M can hold the call lamp portion 620a and simultaneously turn on and off the call display portion 623a when standing up. Further, for the employee MS, it is possible to turn off the call display section 623a at the same time as opening and closing the machine information display device Ka.

The LED board 624 incorporated in the calling lamp section 620a can control the LED 625 to emit light in red or the like in response to a signal from the touch sensor board 626, and to control various patterns such as blinking and lighting. By blinking or lighting the call display section 623, notification for calling the employee MS is possible.
In addition, at the time of a big hit, etc., the function of lighting the call display part 623 in rainbow colors by the output from the pachinko machine P, and the call display by connecting the call lamp part 620a to the island end as a runner function by cooperation with the adjacent call lamp part 620a. It also has an effect function such as lighting the part 623 .
In this embodiment, the call lamp portion 620a is provided below the table information display device Ka. If so, there is no need to limit the mounting location.

<Modification 2>
Next, the structure of Modification 2 of the platform information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 and 188. FIG.
FIG. 187 is a perspective view of the platform information display device Kb of Modification 2 as viewed from the front side. FIG. 188 is a front view of a part of the machine information display device Kb and the pachinko machine P of Modification 2 as seen from the front side.

The machine information display device Kb is roughly composed of a liquid crystal display section 610, a housing 611, a call lamp section 620b, a hinge 613, and an electronic key holding section 614. FIG.
Since the same reference numerals are assigned to the same structures and functions as those of Modification 1 described above, description thereof will be omitted, and the call lamp portion 620ba, which is a different portion, will be described in detail.
The machine information display device Kb has a plurality of call lamps 620b arranged side by side in the vertical direction.
The machine information display device Kb can provide a space above the pachinko machine P by providing the call lamp part 620b in the vertical direction on the side, and the accessories etc. are protruding above the pachinko machine P in recent years. It is possible to secure a space that does not come into contact with

Also, since the position where the call lamp portion 620b is turned on is deviated from the center position of the pachinko machine P, the player M can easily turn on and off the call display portion 623b by touching it with his/her hand.
In addition, by extending the lower end of the lamp housing portion 621b of the call lamp portion 620b in a direction closer to the player M, the player M can easily turn on and off the call display portion 623b by touching it with his or her hand. ing.

In the lighting operation of the LED 625b (not shown), the two call display sections 623b at both ends of the machine information display device Kb are alternately blinked to make the display easy to see even from a distance. The position of this call display section 623b is at the line of sight of the employee MS, and the call display section 623b extends long in the vertical direction. Because of the operation, the display operation looks large and the notification is easy to notify to the employee MS.
Although the machine information display device Kb has the width of the pachinko machine P, it may have the width including peripheral devices such as the ball lending machine PT. Furthermore, a dynamic display operation becomes possible, which makes it easy to notify the employee MS.

<Modification 3>
Next, the structure of Modified Example 3 of the platform information display device K will be described with reference to 204 .
FIG. 204(A) is a front view showing the call lamp portion 620c, and FIG. 204(B) is a rear view showing the call lamp portion 620c.
The structures and functions that are the same as those of Modification 1 and Modification 2 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, so description thereof will be omitted, and the call lamp portion 620c, which is a different portion, will be described in detail.
The call lamp portion 620c forms a columnar metal lamp housing portion 621c. The lamp housing portion 621c is partially cut out at both ends to expose the call display portion 623c. The call display portion 623c is made of milky-white or diamond-cut transmissive transparent resin, and transmits light from LEDs 625 mounted on an LED substrate 624 (not shown) incorporated in the call lamp portion 620c.
A fingerprint reader 627c for reading fingerprint authentication is provided in the center of the rear surface of the lamp housing 621c. The fingerprint reader 627c can read a fingerprint at the same time when the call lamp portion 620c is gripped.
Since the two call display portions 623c located at both ends of the large-sized liquid crystal display portion 610 light up, the display operation looks large and the notification is easy to notify to the employee MS.

In modifications 1, 2 and 3, the call lamp units 620a, 620b, and 620c are the work doors with the liquid crystal display unit 610, and the table information display device K is used. A device or system that displays information about a gaming machine in 620 may also be used. Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the device and system may be such that call lamp units 620a, 620a, 620b, 620b, and 620c are attached to the work door 895 without the liquid crystal display unit 610. FIG. In that case, the information display of the game machine is provided on the upper part of the island equipment HS, or as shown in FIG. is also possible.
Although the cross sections of the lamp housing portions 621a, 621b, and 621c are circular in Modifications 1, 2, and 3, they may be elliptical or square, as long as they are easy to grip as a handle.

(Display control of platform information display device)
189 to 203 for the display control of Modification 1 and Modification 2 of the machine information display device K, since Modification 1 and Modification 2 show the same display contents, the machine information display of Modification 1 is performed. The device Ka will be described as an example. 189 to 193 are front views showing how a plurality of platform information display devices Ka of Modification 1 are arranged on the island facility HS to display information. 194 to 196 are explanatory diagrams showing how information is displayed on the liquid crystal display section 610 of the machine information display device Ka of Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 197 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the machine information display device Ka of Modification 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 198 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of the machine information display data 644 used when controlling the machine information display device Ka of Modification 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 199 is a sequence diagram for controlling the machine information display device Ka of Modification 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing manual display processing when controlling the machine information display device Ka of Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing manual transmission processing when controlling the machine information display device Ka of Modification 1. FIG. 202 and 203 are explanatory diagrams showing how information is displayed on the liquid crystal display section 610 of the machine information display device Ka of Modification 1. FIG.

FIG. 197 shows a block diagram of the machine information display device Ka. Main control of the table information display device Ka is performed by the table information control board 601 . The information display device Ka has a built-in CPU, ROM, RAM, and SSD, and includes an electronic key holder 614, a transparent liquid crystal display board 612, a fingerprint reader 627, a fingerprint authentication board 628, an LED board 624, and a touch sensor board 626. controlling.
The table information control board 601 is finally connected to the hall computer 90 via the table computer 93 . Information displayed on the liquid crystal display section 610 and maintenance information, which will be described later, are transmitted from the hall computer 90 to the table information control board 601 . The table information control board 601 is also connected to a transparent liquid crystal display board 612 that controls the liquid crystal display screen 891 . Further, the table information control board 601 is also connected to the fingerprint reader 627, the fingerprint authentication board 628, the LED board 624 and the touch sensor board 626 of the calling lamp section 620a.

As shown in FIG. 189, each machine information display device Ka displays information on the game machine, such as the number of times of big wins and the number of starts, on the liquid crystal display section 610 . As the background of the liquid crystal display section 610, fishes swimming in the sea are displayed across a plurality of platform information display devices Ka as an effect. These effect displays are controlled by the table information control board 601 which cooperates with the adjacent table computers 93 by connecting them. Further, it is also possible to display advertisements on a plurality of table information display devices Ka installed in the island facility HS by the linked table information control board 601 from one end to the other of the island facility. In this way, the end to end of the island facility becomes a large screen, and it is possible to display an advertisement with impact.
As shown in FIG. 190, not only notification by the call lamp portion 620a but also notification to call the employee by the liquid crystal display portion 610 is possible.

<Controlling the display of errors in each device and the display of processing methods>
191 to 201, sequence diagrams and flow charts for control regarding display and coping method display when equipment such as the ball lending machine PT installed in the game machine or island facility HS becomes an error due to trouble. and explanatory diagrams.

First, as shown in FIGS. 199 and 200, the manual display process (S3430) will be described. If an error occurs in the target equipment (pachinko machine P, ball lending machine PT, Tamama lifting device 401, separator 410, etc.), the target equipment can be sent via the machine computer 93 or directly to the machine information display Ka An error code is sent to the table information control board 601 . Alternatively, when the employee MS notices it, it is possible to send the error code 646 from the remote controller of the table information control board 601 or the portable terminal device 40 described above to call up the manual display (S3466). When the machine information display device Ka receives the error code 646 (YES in S3431), the machine information display device Ka checks the history to see if the same error code 646 has been sent (S3432). If the same error code 646 is stored in the history (YES in S3433), the machine information display device Ka displays a coping method on the liquid crystal display unit 610 (S3434).

If the same error code 646 is not stored in the history (NO in S3433), the machine information display device Ka inquires the hall computer 90 about the error code 646 (S3438). When the machine information display device Ka receives the manual data 649 from the hall computer 90 (S3438), it stores the manual data 649 (S3439), and displays the manual of coping methods on the liquid crystal display unit 610 (S3434). The machine information display device Ka displays the coping method on the liquid crystal display unit 610 (NO in S3435, S3434) until it receives the cancellation signal of the error code 646 from the target device or the employee's remote controller (YES in S3435). . When the table information display device Ka receives the cancel signal of the error code 646 from the target equipment or the employee's remote controller (YES in S3435), it transmits the end signal to the hall computer 90 (S3436). At the same time, the machine information display device Ka transmits the target equipment code 645 and the machine number data 648 of the machine information display device Ka to the hall computer 90 together with the end signal.

Next, manual transmission processing (S3440) as shown in FIGS. 199 and 201 will be described. The hall computer 90 waits until there is an inquiry about the error code 646 from the table information display device Ka (NO in S3441), and when the inquiry is received from the table information display device Ka (YES in S3441), the error code 646 is displayed. It confirms (S3442), and transmits the manual data 649 to the machine information display device Ka (S3443).
The hall computer 90 waits until an end signal is sent from the table information display device Ka (NO in S3444), and when the end signal is received from the table information display device Ka (YES in S3444), an example of recording of transmission/reception is performed. The machine information display data 644 shown in FIG. 198 is recorded (S3445).

An example of the table information display data 644 is shown in FIG. The table information display data 644 is recorded in the hall computer 90, and includes the event code 644, the target equipment code 645, the error code 646, the occurrence time data 647, the table number data 648 of the table information display device Ka, and the manual data 649. etc. are recorded. In this way, the previous record can be called up at any time to display the manual, and the manual data 649 can be customized independently.
The stored manual data 649 includes original data and data downloaded from the manufacturer's homepage via the Internet for repair manuals from the manufacturers of each machine including the pachinko machine P and the like.

194 to 196 show an example of a manual display 640 displayed on the liquid crystal display section 610 of the machine information display device Ka under the control described above.
FIG. 194 shows a manual display 640 displayed on the liquid crystal display section 610 of the machine information display device Ka when the upper tank of the pachinko machine P is not replenished with pachinko balls Q. As shown in FIG. The manual display 640 presents a simulated target device display 634 as a display simulating the target device so that even an employee MS who is unfamiliar with the device can easily understand it. In the manual display 640 , an error location display 635 indicating an abnormality at a location corresponding to the error code 646 is shown in the simulated target device display 634 . In this case, the position of the upper tank of the pachinko machine P and a coping method such as "Open and close the table information display device and shake the bellows."

FIG. 195 shows a manual display 640 displayed on the liquid crystal display section 610 of the table information display device Ka when bills cannot be put into the bill collecting device of the ball lending machine PT. The manual display 640 presents a simulated target device display 634A as a display simulating the target device so that even an employee MS who is unfamiliar with the device can easily understand it. An error location display 635A indicating an error at a location corresponding to the error code 646 is shown in the target device simulation display 634A. In this case, the position of the banknote recovery device of the ball lending machine PT and the coping method such as "Please open the pachinko machine P, take out the ball lending machine and check the banknote recovery part" are described.

FIG. 196 shows a manual display 640 displayed on the liquid crystal display section 610 of the machine information display device Ka when pachinko balls are not paid out as prize balls from the payout device of the pachinko machine P. FIG. The manual display 640 presents a simulated target device display 634B as a display simulating the target device so that even an employee MS who is unfamiliar with the device can easily understand it. An error location display 635B indicating an error at a location corresponding to the error code 646 is displayed in the simulated target device display 634B. In this case, the position of the payout device of the pachinko machine P and "1. Open the pachinko machine and check if the payout device on the back is clogged" and "2. Turn off the power and unlock the payout device. Please clear the blockage." In addition, the table information display device Ka has an additional position display 638B that shows the shape of the dispensing device and an operation position display that displays the lock operation position for unlocking so that even an employee MS who is unfamiliar with the equipment can understand the details. Position 638B is indicated.

The additional position display 638B, the operation position display position 638B or the countermeasure display of "1...." and "2...." may be displayed at the same time. "1...." and "2...." can also be displayed according to the procedure for performing the work. If displayed according to the procedure, even an employee MS who is unfamiliar with the equipment will have few mistakes and the work will be easy to understand, and it will be possible to troubleshoot quickly. In this case, the display may be switched in order by a remote control or the like, or the order may be switched automatically at regular intervals. It is also possible to switch the order of work procedures by sending signals from each device such as a game machine.

Next, when the ball lending machine PT or the pachinko machine P is carried out from the separator 410 via the supply bellows (411, 412), it is checked that the supply bellows (411, 412) or the like is clogged. 191 to 193, an example of displaying the location of clogging when is detected will be described.
The liquid crystal display unit 610 of the base information display device Ka is equipped with the liquid crystal display screen 891 whose rear surface is transparent by control as described above. It is possible to control the transparency and display the object on the back side.
As shown in FIG. 191, the liquid crystal display section 610 is shown by making a part of the liquid crystal display section 610 transparent. The liquid crystal display unit 610 has an error location display 630 in which the actual separator 410 on the back side is surrounded by a red circle or the like and the inside is made transparent. The error location display 630 has a confirmation display portion 631 surrounded by a red circle so that the employee MS can easily understand. In this manner, the employee MS can display the actual location of the abnormality in an easy-to-understand manner without opening and closing the machine information display device Ka, so that quick processing is possible.

As shown in FIG. 192, the liquid crystal display section 610 is made transparent on the entire surface of the liquid crystal display section 610, and includes not only the separator 410, which is the actual error location display 630 on the back side, but also the replenishment bellows (411, 412). can be displayed in its entirety.
As described above, the employee MS can confirm at a glance which of the plurality of machine information display devices Ka has an abnormal rear surface without opening and closing the machine information display device Ka. Further, since the minimum number of jackpots and the number of starts are displayed as the information of the gaming machine, the player M can confirm the information of the gaming machine regardless of the trouble.
As described above, when all or part of the liquid crystal display section 610 is made transparent to display the actual abnormal section, the manual display section 640 and the error section display 630 are simultaneously displayed on the same liquid crystal display section 610. By doing so, the employee MS can confirm the location of the abnormality and at the same time how to deal with it, so even if the employee MS is unfamiliar with the equipment, it is easy to understand the location of the abnormality and the work procedure, and the trouble can be dealt with quickly. It can be carried out.

As shown in FIG. 193, the liquid crystal display section 610 has a plurality of liquid crystal display sections 610 whose entire surfaces are made transparent, and not only the separator 410 that serves as the actual error location display 630 on the back side, but also the replenishment bellows (411, 412). can be displayed in its entirety.
As described above, the employee MS can confirm at a glance which of the plurality of machine information display devices Ka has an abnormal rear surface without opening and closing the machine information display device Ka. In addition, it is possible to check whether there is any abnormality after the store is closed without opening and closing the table information display device Ka.

202 and 203 show another function of the liquid crystal display section 610, which is the function of moving the display position of the information displayed on the liquid crystal display section 610. FIG.
FIGS. 202A and 202B show how the position for displaying the number of big wins is moved. The liquid crystal display unit 610 can operate the display screen by a touch panel type by a capacitive type or a photoelectric type photosensor type. As shown in FIG. 202(A), the number-of-big-hit display portion 641 can be moved to the position shown in FIG. 202(B) by touching it with the hand ha.

Also, although the background pattern 642 has a picture of an octopus, the number-of-big-wins display portion 641 is arranged above the background pattern 642, and the background pattern 642 moves below the empty area. In addition to moving in this way, the number-of-big-hit display section 641 can be set in preference to the background pattern 642 by setting the number-of-big-hit display section 641 to a higher layer. As described above, by setting the number-of-big-hit display portion 641 with priority over the background pattern 642, information desired by the player M can be displayed in an easy-to-read manner.
When viewed from below, the player M sitting on the chair C can see game information such as the number of jackpots displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 610 by the accessory projecting from the upper part of the pachinko machine P and the lamp display unit. When the game information cannot be confirmed, the game information can be easily confirmed by moving the position of the number-of-big-hit display portion 641 upward.

As shown in FIG. 203(A), the manual display section 640 can be moved to the position shown in FIG. 203(B) by touching it with the hand ha.
When the employee MS, who is sitting on the chair C and solving the trouble of the game machine or the like, sees from below, the manual display unit 640 is difficult to see because it is too close or too far away. It is possible to freely move the portion 640 vertically and horizontally. By changing the position of the manual display section 640 so that the manual display section 640 can be easily viewed, the employee MS can easily view the manual and work while looking at the manual.

In addition, although the background pattern 642 includes a picture of an octopus, the manual display section 640 is positioned above the background pattern 642, and the background pattern 642 moves below the empty area. In addition to moving in this manner, the manual display portion 640 can be set with priority over the background pattern 642 by setting the manual display portion 640 to a higher layer. As described above, the manual display section 640 can be set with priority over the background pattern 642, so that the information desired by the employee MS can be displayed in an easy-to-read manner.

In addition to the jackpot frequency display section 641 and the manual display section 640, an operation button for lighting the notification function of the call lamp 620 is displayed on the liquid crystal display section 610, and the setting position of the operation button can be moved. is. In this way, when it is difficult to press the operation buttons due to the accessory or the lamp display part protruding from the upper part of the pachinko machine P, the player M changes the setting position of the operation button to a position that is easy to press. It is possible to change it.

(counting unit)
The counting unit 805 is described with reference to FIGS. 67-69. The ball lending machine PT has a counting unit 805 which can receive pachinko balls (game media) acquired by the player M from the lower tray of the pachinko machine P and count them by a counting counter 806 . The ball lending machine PT counts the number of balls counted by the counting counter 806 as possession balls, and displays the number of balls currently reserved by the possession ball number display section 802d.
The counting unit 805 has a rectangular box-shaped storage section provided below the lower plate of the pachinko machine. The pachinko balls received by the receiving part are received in the lower part of the ball lending machine PT through the counting passage communicating with the receiving part, and the received pachinko balls are counted by the counting counter 806. - 特許庁In addition, the counted pachinko balls can be used as possession balls in a game, and can be paid out from the pachinko machine P by operating the ball lending machine PT.

(Modified example of counting unit)
A modified example of the counting unit 805 will be described, and portions having the same structure will be described with the same reference numerals.
<Modification 1>
Next, the structure of Modification 1 of the counting unit 805 will be described with reference to FIGS. 205 to 210. FIG.
FIG. 205 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit 805a of Modification 1 is attached to the ball lending machine PT. 206 is a perspective view showing a counting unit 805a of Modification 1. FIG. 207 is a perspective view showing a counting unit 805a of Modification 1. FIG. 208 is a side view showing the counting unit 805a of Modification 1. FIG. 209 is a plan view showing a counting unit 805a of Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 210 is a cross-sectional view of the counting unit 805a of Modification 1 shown in FIG. 209 taken along line AB.

FIG. 205 shows a state in which the ball lending machine PT attached to the pachinko machine P is equipped with the counting unit 805a. The counting unit 805a is arranged below the lower tray 857 of the pachinko machine P. As shown in FIG. The lower plate 857 is provided with a lower plate accommodating part 858 which serves as a space for temporarily accommodating the pachinko balls acquired by the pachinko machine P. The lower tray 857 is further provided with a circular lower tray opening 856 for allowing the pachinko balls contained therein to flow into the housing section 710 of the counting unit 805a. The lower tray opening 856 is normally closed by a lower tray shutter 859 . Further, when counting pachinko balls from the lower tray 857 , the lower tray opening 856 is opened by sliding the lower tray shutter 859 to the left and right, and the pachinko balls are dropped into the storage section 710 .

The counting unit 805a will now be described with reference to Figures 206-210. The counting unit 805a is roughly composed of a housing portion 710, a counting passage portion 720a, a locking mechanism portion 730a, a rotating passage portion 740a, and a counting strut portion 750. As shown in FIG. Details of the housing portion 710 and the counting strut portion 750 will be described later.

First, the counting passage portion 720a includes a first box-shaped passage portion 721a whose length can be adjusted in four steps, and a second box-shaped passage portion having a size capable of accommodating the outer shape of the first passage portion 721a. 722a. The counting passage portion 720a is formed with a box-shaped second passage portion 722a having a size capable of accommodating the outer shape of the first passage portion 721a, so that the counting passage portion 720a can be operated without exposing the pachinko balls to the outside. The length can be adjusted, and pachinko balls can be transported without being mischievous or cheated.
The first passage portion 721a and the second passage portion 722a receive the pachinko balls from the accommodation portion 710 and move from the accommodation portion 710 toward the ball lending machine PT in order to roll the pachinko balls to the ball lending machine PT at a natural gradient. A first passage 725a and a second passage 726a shown in FIG. 210 having a downward slope are provided. The inclination of the first passage 725a and the second passage 726a is preferably about 5% (approximately 2.86 degrees angle) to 10% (approximately 5.71 degrees angle).

The first passage portion 721a communicates with the housing portion 710 through a housing portion connecting passage 724a which is a box-shaped passage. As shown in FIG. 210, the first passage portion 721a is provided with four adjustment holes 734a on the ceiling surface at regular intervals. The first passage portion 721a and the second passage portion 722a are fixed by fitting the fixing piece 732a projecting from the fixing piece insertion hole 733a into the adjustment hole 734a. The length of the first passage portion 721a can be adjusted in four stages within the range of the distance L1 depending on the position where the fixing piece 732a is inserted.

The second passage portion 722a is provided with a circular cover portion 728a integrally formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the columnar rotary passage 741a supported by the counting strut portion 750. As shown in FIG. The circular cover portion 728a of the second passage portion 722a is partially cut away, and has a structure that rotates about the center line X of the rotation passage portion 740a shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 209, the rotation angle α1 can be rotated up to about 90 degrees. When the pachinko machine P is replaced, the counting unit 805a can be attached easily.

In addition, as described above, the length of the counting unit 805a can be adjusted and it can be rotated. The counting unit 805a can align the center of the storage section 710 with the center of the lower plate 857 of any pachinko machine P by adjusting the length and angle. As a result, the center of the receiving portion 710 of the counting unit 805a can be aligned with the center of the lower plate opening 856 of the pachinko machine P, so that the pachinko balls can be installed in a state where they do not bounce and spill. Therefore, since the accommodation part 710 is not affected by the position of the lower plate opening 856 of the pachinko machine P lower plate 857, it can be formed compactly.

Next, the rotary passage portion 740a is connected to a ball lending machine connection passage 723a that communicates with the bottom of the ball lending machine PT. As shown in FIG. 210, the rotary passage portion 740a is provided with a rotary passage 741a having a space 743a through which pachinko balls pass in the cylindrical interior thereof. The rotation passage portion 740a is provided with a lock mechanism portion 730a above.

The lock mechanism section 730a has a key cylinder lock 739a, and can be switched between locking and unlocking by inserting a key (not shown). In the case of locking, rotation of the circular cover portion 728a is fixed. A fixing pin 738a, which is a piece connected to a key cylinder lock 739a, is inserted into a fixing groove 727a provided in the circular cover portion 728a, thereby fixing the rotation of the circular cover portion 728a.

Furthermore, in the case of locking, a biasing fixing piece 326a, which is a piece connected to the key cylinder lock 739a, fixes the vertical movement of the upward biasing means 737a which is formed of a spring, rubber, or the like and biases upward. . Therefore, in the first passage portion 721a and the second passage portion 722a, the fixing piece 732a protruding from the fixing piece insertion hole 733a is fitted into the adjustment hole 734a, and vertical movement is fixed, thereby making it impossible to adjust the length. It becomes possible, and the 1st passage part 721a and the 2nd passage part 722a are fixed.
Since the vertical movement of the fixing piece insertion hole 733a is prohibited until the key cylinder lock 739a is unlocked, the holding section 710 is moved to count pachinko balls brought in from other corners or other stores. such actions may be prohibited. Further, as shown in FIG. 205, a fixed piece cover 735a is provided as a cover for covering the fixed piece 732a so that the fixed piece 732a is not manipulated by mischief or the like.

As described above, locking prohibits rotation of the circular cover portion 728a and at the same time prohibits adjustment of the lengths of the first passage portion 721a and the second passage portion 722a. It is possible to prohibit an act such as counting pachinko balls brought in by a person, and it is possible to deal with mischief and the like.
Further, by releasing the lock, the counting unit 805a can be freely rotated and adjusted in length up to the pachinko machine P, so that the accommodation section 710 can be adjusted to the center of the drop opening of the lower tray 857 of the pachinko machine P. It is possible to prevent pachinko balls from jumping and falling from the counter unit 805a, and installation such as replacement of the pachinko machine P is facilitated.

The lock mechanism section 730a is electrically connected to the ball lending machine PT as shown in FIG. 730a can be locked and unlocked. In addition, the lock mechanism section 730a can be locked and unlocked by operation from the hall computer 90 in the management area 2 via the interface 808 and the stand computer 93. FIG.
A lock state detection sensor 744a shown in FIGS. 68 and 210 detects the locked and unlocked states of the lock mechanism portion 730a, and the hall computer 90 can grasp the locked state.

<Modification 2>
Next, the structure of Modification 2 of the counting unit 805 will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 218. FIG. FIG. 211 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit 805b of Modification 2 is attached to the ball lending machine PT. 212 and 213 are perspective views showing a counting unit 805b of Modification 2. FIG. FIG. 214 is a side view showing a counting unit 805b of modification 2. FIG. FIG. 215 is a plan view showing a counting unit 805b of modification 2. FIG. FIG. 216 is a cross-sectional view of the counting unit 805b of Modification 2 shown in FIG. 215 taken along line C--D--E. FIG. 217 is a perspective view showing a lock mechanism 731b of a counting unit 805b of Modification 2. FIG. FIG. 218 is a cross-sectional view showing a locking mechanism 731b of a counting unit 805b of modification 2. FIG.

FIG. 211 shows a state in which the ball lending machine PT attached to the pachinko machine P is equipped with the counting unit 805b. The counting unit 805b is arranged below a lower plate 857 formed in a box shape with an open top. The lower plate 857 is provided with a lower plate accommodating part 858 which serves as a space for temporarily accommodating the pachinko balls acquired by the pachinko machine P. The lower tray 857 is provided with a circular lower tray opening 856 for allowing the pachinko balls contained therein to flow into the housing section 710 of the counting unit 805a. The lower tray opening 856 is normally closed by a lower tray shutter 859 , and when counting pachinko balls from the lower tray 857 , the lower tray opening 856 is opened by sliding the lower tray shutter 859 to the left and right, and into the storage section 710 . I'm dropping a pachinko ball.

The counting unit 805b will now be described with reference to Figures 211-218. The counting unit 805b is roughly composed of a housing portion 710, a counting passage portion 720b, a lock mechanism portion 730b, a rotation mechanism portion 770b, a connection passage portion 741b, and a counting strut portion 750. Details of the housing portion 710 and the counting strut portion 750 will be described later.

First, as shown in FIGS. 211 to 215, the counting passage portion 720b is formed in a substantially S-shape as a whole from the storage portion 710 to the ball lending machine PT, and is hollow so that the pachinko balls can pass through. is provided to form an enclosed arcuate passageway. The counting passage portion 720b is composed of an enclosed arc-shaped first passage portion 721b, a second passage portion 722b and a third passage portion 723b. Also, in order to receive the pachinko balls from the storage section 710 and roll the pachinko balls to the ball lending machine PT at a natural gradient, as shown in FIG. A first passage 725b through a third passage 727b are provided. The inclination of the first passage 725b to the third passage 727b is about 5% (approximately 2.86 degrees angle) to 10% (approximately 5.71 degrees angle).

As shown in FIG. 216, the first passage portion 721b to the third passage portion 723b have a joint portion 741b at the end of each passage portion (721b to 723b) having a size to cover the tip of each passage portion (721b to 723b). are provided. As shown in FIG. 216, the joint portion 741b can slide the tip of each passage portion (721b to 723b) within a length L2.
Since the counting passage portion 720b is provided with a joint portion 741b having a size that covers the tip of each passage portion (721b to 723b), the pachinko balls are not exposed to the outside. length can be adjusted.

As shown in FIGS. 211 to 218, side walls of the first passage portion 721b to the third passage portion 723b are fixed to the rotation outer peripheral portions 728b and 772b of the lock mechanism portion 730b and the rotation mechanism portion 770b. By rotating the rotating outer peripheral portions 728b and 772b within the range of length R1 (Fig. 215), the first passage portion 721b to the third passage portion 723b can be slid within the range of length L2 (Fig. 215). 216).
The first passage portion 721b to the third passage portion 723b formed in the S shape in this way can form the entire passage in a compact manner. In addition, since the counting unit 805b can be moved by sliding the first passage portion 721b to the third passage portion 723b along an arc, not only the length but also the angle can be adjusted at the same time, so that various pachinko machines can be used. It is also possible to install the accommodating part 710 in the center of the lower plate opening 856 of the lower plate 857 of P.

The lock mechanism portion 730b employs the key cylinder lock 739b of the mechanism described above (739a in FIG. 210), and the rotation of the outer peripheral portions 728b and 772b is fixed by operating a key (not shown).
Further, as shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the rotation mechanism portion 770b is composed of a rotation outer peripheral portion 772b and a rotation support portion 771b. The rotating outer peripheral portion 772b can rotate around the central axis of the rotating support portion 771b. Inside the rotating outer peripheral portion 772b, eight inner peripheral protruding claws 778b protruding from the inner periphery toward the center are arranged in a circular shape. The inner circumference protruding claw 778b comes into contact with the tips of the eight outer circumference protruding claws 773b provided on the rotating support 771b, rotates the rotation outer circumference part 772b with a little resistance, and climbs over the tips of the outer circumference protruding claws 773b. move while

As shown in FIGS. 68, 217, and 218, the tip of the fixed claw 775b moves back and forth until it protrudes beyond the tip of the outer peripheral protruding claw 773b to a position where the tip of the rotating outer peripheral portion 772b cannot get over. It moves, and the rotation of the rotation outer peripheral portion 772b is fixed.
The fixed claw 775b is fixed by a support shaft 776 inside the rotary support 771b, and rotates about the support shaft to move one end of the fixed claw 775b back and forth. The other end of the fixed claw 775b is connected to an induction piece 777b that is connected to the solenoid SO, and interlocks with the movement of the solenoid SO to move one end of the fixed claw 775b back and forth.

In this way, the rotation mechanism portion 770b has a structure in which the fixing claw 775b protrudes and the rotation of the rotation outer peripheral portion 772b is fixed by vertically moving the solenoid SO electrically connected as shown in FIG. . Further, as shown in FIG. 68, power is supplied from the ball lending machine PT, and the lock state detection sensor 744a (FIGS. 68 and 210) detects the rotation operation of the key of the lock mechanism portion 730b, so that the solenoid It is possible to operate the SO to fix the rotation of the rotating outer peripheral portion 772b. Further, it is possible to operate not only from the ball lending machine PT, but also from the hall computer, from the table information display device K, or from the remote controller.
As described above, it is possible to easily perform the operation of fixing the rotation of the rotation outer peripheral portion 772b in relation to the change in the position of the accommodating portion 710 of the counting unit 805b. It is possible to prohibit an act such as counting pachinko balls brought in from other parlors, making it easy to deal with mischief and the like, and facilitating installation when replacing pachinko machines P or the like.

The rotating outer peripheral portion 772b is mounted above the rotating pedestal 774b, and the rotating outer peripheral portion 772b can be attached to the rotating pillar portion 771b by detaching the components (773b, etc.) above the rotating pedestal 774b. It has a structure that can be inserted and worn.

<Modification 3>
Next, the structure of Modification 3 of the counting unit 805 will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 to 225. FIG. 219 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit 805c of Modification 3 is attached to the pachinko machine P. FIG. FIG. 220 is an enlarged perspective view of the counting unit 805c of Modification 3 attached to the pachinko machine P. FIG. FIG. 221 is a perspective view showing a counting unit 805c of modification 3. FIG. FIG. 222 is a perspective view showing an exploded state of the counting unit 805c of Modification 3. FIG. FIG. 223 is a perspective view showing a counting unit 805c of Modification 3. FIG. 224 is a plan view showing a counting unit 805c of Modification 3. FIG. FIG. 225(A) shows a cross section of the counting passage portion 720c cut along line FG in FIG. 224, and FIG. 225(B) shows the first passage 727c viewed from the left side of FIG. 225(A). A front view is shown, and FIG. 225(C) shows a rear view of the first passage portion 721c. FIG. 225(D) shows how the first passage portion 721c is bent to the left and right, and the state in which the first passage portion 721c is bent to the left and right is indicated by broken lines.

The counting unit 805c is roughly composed of a lower plate cover portion 760, a housing portion 710, a counting passage portion 720c, and a rotation passage portion 740c. Details of the accommodating portion 710 will be described later.

First, the lower tray cover portion 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 219 to 223. FIG. The lower tray cover portion 760 is composed of a lower tray cover 761 matching the shape of the lower tray 857 , a housing portion cover 762 , a first connecting portion 763 and a second connecting portion 764 .
Figures 219 and 220 show the state in which the ball lending machine PT attached to the pachinko machine P is equipped with the counting unit 805c. The lower tray cover 761 is arranged above a lower tray 857 formed in a box shape with an upper opening. The lower tray cover 761 is formed in a square shape to match the shape of the lower tray 857 which is formed in a square shape when viewed from above.
By creating the lower tray cover 761 in accordance with the shape of the lower tray 857, it becomes impossible to throw pachinko balls into the lower tray 857, and it is possible to prevent the act of bringing in and counting pachinko balls. . The lower tray cover 761 is formed one size larger than the lower tray 857 so that it can be easily attached to the lower tray 857 .
The material of the lower plate cover 761 can be resin, metal, or the like, but is not particularly limited, and it is possible to confirm whether the pachinko balls have been ejected from the pachinko machine P by forming it from a transparent resin.

The housing portion cover 762 covers the gap between the housing portion 710 and the lower tray 857 and at the same time connects the lower tray cover 761 and the housing portion 710 . The housing portion cover 762 is formed to match the shape of the side surface of the lower plate 857 . Note that the accommodation section cover 762 is formed in consideration of the position and size that allow the lower tray shutter 859 provided on the lower tray 857 to slide left and right.
The storage section cover 762 has a lower tray cover 761 fixed on the upper side and a second connecting section 764 fixed on the side surface. The material of the housing section cover 762 is not limited, and soft urethane or hard resin may be used. A key cylinder lock 765 into which a key (not shown) can be inserted is provided at the upper end of the second connecting portion 764 .

The first connecting portion 763 is fixed to the side surface of the housing portion 710 and has a connecting portion fitting portion 766 at its upper end. The connecting portion fitting portion 766 can be inserted into the lower end of the second connecting portion 764 and fitted. Further, it has a structure in which the fitting cannot be released by operating the key cylinder lock 765 of the second connecting portion 764 . In this way, since the lower tray cover 761 to the housing section 710 can be integrally fixed and locked, pachinko balls cannot be thrown into the lower tray 857 and the housing section 710, and the pachinko balls cannot be brought into the housing section 710. It is possible to prevent the act of counting. In addition, since it is locked, the lower tray cover 761 and the storage section cover 762 cannot be easily attached and detached.
In addition, by integrally fixing the lower tray cover 761 to the accommodating section 710, the accommodating section 710 can be fixed in close contact with the lower tray 857 of the pachinko machine P. It is possible to prevent the ball from jumping and falling from the housing part 710 .
Note that the lower tray cover portion 760 can be applied not only to the third modification but also to the first and second modifications.

Next, the counting passage portion 720c will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 225. FIG. The counting passage portion 720c is composed of a first passage portion 721c and a second passage portion 722c.
The first passage portion 721c communicates with the housing portion 710 through a housing portion connecting passage 724c that is a box-shaped passage.
The first passage portion 721c is connected to a plurality of first passages 727c that are conical and open at both ends. The first passage 727c has a conical shape with a narrow front end on the second passage portion 722c side and a wide rear end. The first passage 727c has upper and lower pivot pins 729c at its tip, and the pivot pin 729c is pivotally supported in a hole provided in the intermediate portion of the other first passage 727c. In this way, by viewing the axis from two points, it is possible to freely move left and right with the pivot pin 729c as a fulcrum. Therefore, the first passage portion 721c can be bent left and right at an extremely fine angle (FIG. 225(D)).

In addition, the first passage portion 721c is provided with two guide passages 728c formed of bendable material such as metal or resin, extending downward across the plurality of first passages 727c. The guide passage 728c is provided in a rail shape so that the pachinko balls can roll to the second passage portion 722c, and the inclination of the guide passage 728c is 5% (approximately 2.86 degrees) to 10% (approximately 5 degrees). .71 degrees). Further, the guide passage 728c can be bent according to the bending of the first passage portion 721c.
In this way, since the first passage portion 721c can be bent left and right, when installing the accommodation portion 710, the accommodation portion 710 is installed in the center of the lower tray opening 856 of the lower tray 857 of various pachinko machines P. It is also possible to

The second passage portion 722c, one end of which communicates with the first passage portion 721c, is a cylindrical passage, and the other end of the second passage portion 722c is connected to the rotary passage portion 740c. The rotary passage portion 740c communicates with the lower portion of the ball lending machine PT, and pachinko balls passing through the rotary passage portion 740c are counted inside the ball lending machine PT. Further, the rotary passage portion 740c employs a structure similar to that of the rotary passage portion 740a (FIG. 210), so that the first passage portion 721c, the second passage portion 722c, and the housing portion 710 can be rotated.
By rotationally moving the first passage portion 721c, the second passage portion 722c, and the housing portion 710, when the pachinko machine P is moved, parts of the counting unit 805c except for the lower tray cover portion 760 are not removed, Also, when the pachinko machine P is replaced, the counting unit 805c can be easily installed.

<Modified example of housing part in counting unit>
A modified storage portion 710 in the counting unit 805 will be described, and portions having the same structure as those of the above-described Modified Examples 1 to 3 will be described by attaching the same reference numerals. Needless to say, the accommodating portion 710 described below can be applied to Modifications 1 to 3.
226 and 227 are cross-sectional views showing the accommodating portion 710 of the counting units 805a to 805c of the modification. FIG. 228 is a plan view showing the accommodating portion 710 of the counting units 805a to 805c of the modification. FIG. 229 is a plan view showing how the pachinko ball Q rolls in the accommodation portion 710 of the counting units 805a to 805c of the modification.

The housing portion 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 and 207 and FIGS. 226-229. The accommodating portion 710 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open upper end, and accommodates the pachinko balls Q falling from the lower tray opening 856 of the pachinko machine P. The inner side of the housing portion 710 is formed in a circular shape, and by forming the inner side in a circular shape, the pachinko balls Q can be guided in an arc shape, so that the pachinko balls Q can be guided in a spiral shape. It is a shape that makes it easier.
The housing portion 710 is provided with a first receiving portion 714, a second receiving portion 715, a third receiving portion 716, and a fourth receiving portion 717 which are divided into four equal sections when viewed from the top. The first receiving portion 714 is the highest, the second receiving portion 715, the third receiving portion 716, and the fourth receiving portion 717 are lower in order, and the first receiving portion 714, the second receiving portion 715, the third receiving portion 716, and the A step is provided between the fourth receiving portion 717 and the third receiving portion 716 and the fourth receiving portion 717 to easily receive the pachinko ball Q.

As shown in FIG. 227, the first receiving portion 714 and the second receiving portion 715 are arranged such that the first receiving portion 714 is elevated and the angle from the first receiving portion 714 toward the second receiving portion 715 is approximately 2.85 degrees. A slope is provided. Also, the first receiving portion 714 and the second receiving portion 715 are each provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees from the outside toward the third receiving portion 716 and the fourth receiving portion 717 .
Further, below the first receiving portion 714, a receiving portion connecting port 719 connected to the receiving portion connecting passage 724 and guiding the pachinko balls Q to the receiving portion connecting passage 724 opens.

As shown in FIG. 228, the third receiving portion 716 and the fourth receiving portion 717 are elevated, and the angle from the third receiving portion 716 toward the fourth receiving portion 717 is about 5 to 6 degrees. A slope is provided. A step is provided between the third receiving portion 716 and the fourth receiving portion 717 to guide the pachinko ball Q to the receiving portion passage 718 without fail. The receiving section passage 718 is provided with a downward inclination of approximately 2.85 degrees toward the receiving section communication opening 719 in order to guide the pachinko balls Q from the receiving section communication opening 719 to the receiving section connection passage 724 .

As shown in FIG. 229, the storage section 710 formed as described above receives the pachinko balls Q that have fallen from the lower plate opening 856 of the pachinko machine P and guides them to the receiving section communication opening 719 .
In FIG. 229, a path LO1, which shows the rolling path of the pachinko ball Q, is shown with a solid line. Further, when the pachinko ball Q falls into the housing portion 710, the rolling direction RA1 of the first receiving portion 714, the rolling direction RA2 of the second receiving portion, and the third receiving portion are the directions in which the pachinko ball Q rolls. and the rolling direction RA4 of the fourth receiving portion are indicated by solid-line arrows.

In this way, the pachinko balls Q roll while drawing a spiral shape according to the inclination of the accommodating portion 710, so that they are smoothly guided to the receiving portion communication opening 719 while being aligned over time, so that the pachinko balls Q may be jammed. Since the pachinko balls Q are aligned three-dimensionally, it is possible to compactly mold the accommodating portion 710 itself. In addition, there is an advantage that the pachinko balls Q can be reliably guided by the steps provided in the housing portion 710 . Further, the inner side of the housing portion 710 is formed in a circular shape so that the pachinko balls Q can be guided in an arc shape, so that the balls can be easily guided in a spiral shape.
As described above, since the accommodation portion 710 itself can be formed compactly, it is also possible to install the accommodation portion 710 in the center of the lower tray opening 856 of the lower tray 857 of various pachinko machines P.
Incidentally, a shock absorbing material may be attached to the surfaces of the first receiving portion 714 to the fourth receiving portion 717 of the housing portion 710 in order to suppress the impact and vibration of the pachinko balls Q. FIG. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent deterioration due to jumping of the pachinko balls Q and impact of the resin or metal of the housing portion 710 .

The counting strut 750 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 227 and 228. FIG. Although the structure of the counting support 750 is adopted in Modifications 1 and 2, it may be used not only in the housing portion 710 but also in the lock mechanism portions 730a and 730b and the rotation mechanism portion 770b.
The counting column 750 has a circular base 757 to be placed on a counter provided in the island facility HS. The base portion 757 is provided with a cylindrical spring accommodating portion 755 , and the spring 753 is incorporated inside the spring accommodating portion 755 . In addition, the accommodating portion 710 is provided with a cylindrical foot portion 712 that is one size larger than the spring accommodating portion 755 and can be fitted with the spring accommodating portion 755 . Further, the accommodation portion 710 is provided with a cylindrical spring support 754 that can be inserted into the inner diameter of the spring 753 at the center of the accommodation portion 710 . The spring support 754 functions to prevent it from falling off the spring 753 .

As described above, the accommodation portion 710 is constantly urged toward the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P by the spring 753 built in the counting support 750, so that the accommodation portion 710 is in close contact with the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P. Become. With such a structure, it is possible to prevent the pachinko ball Q from falling from the bouncing accommodating portion 710 .

Furthermore, a lower plate contact portion 711 made of elastic rubber (such as silicon rubber) is provided around the upper portion of the housing portion 710 . The lower plate abutting portion 711 has a function as a cushioning material between the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P and the housing portion 710, and urges the housing portion 710 toward the pachinko machine P to push the housing portion 710 toward the pachinko machine P. can adhere. With such a structure, the lower plate abutment part 711 does not damage the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P even if the housing part 710 is brought into close contact with the pachinko machine P, so that the adhesion with the pachinko machine P can be improved. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko ball Q from jumping and falling from the housing portion 710 .

<Modification 4>
Next, Modification 4 of the counting unit 805 will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 to 243. FIG. FIG. 230 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit 805d of Modification 4 is attached to the ball lending machine PT. 231 is a plan view showing a counting unit 805d of Modification 4. FIG. FIG. 232 is a perspective view of the counting unit 805d in Modification 4 showing how the pachinko balls Q are returned from the ball lending machine PT to the return tray 780d. FIG. 233 is a perspective view showing the counting unit 805d obtained by cutting the accommodating portion 710d and the counting passage portion 720d along line LM shown in FIG. 234 is a perspective view showing an enlarged part of the counting unit 805d of Modification 4. FIG. FIG. 235 is a perspective view showing how the pachinko balls Q are returned by enlarging a portion of the counting unit 805d of Modification 4. FIG. FIG. 236 is a perspective view showing how a pachinko ball Q rolls by enlarging a portion of the counting unit 805d of Modification 4. FIG. FIG. 237 is a side view of the counting unit 805d of Modification 4 showing how the pachinko ball Q rolls. FIG. 238 is a side view of Modified Example 4 showing how the pachinko ball Q rolls. FIG. 239 is a perspective view showing how the pachinko balls Q roll in the counting unit 805d obtained by cutting the receiving portion 710d and the counting passage portion 720d along the line OP shown in FIG. FIG. 240 is a perspective view showing how the pachinko balls Q roll in the counting unit 805d obtained by cutting the receiving portion 710d and the counting passage portion 720d along the line OP shown in FIG. FIG. 241 is a perspective view showing how the pachinko balls Q roll in the counting unit 805d obtained by cutting the receiving portion 710d and the counting passage portion 720d along the line OP shown in FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing individual count return processing in the counting unit 805d of Modification 4. FIG. FIG. 243 is a schematic diagram showing the switching state of passages in the counting unit 805d of Modification 4. FIG.

FIG. 230 shows a state in which the ball lending machine PT attached to the pachinko machine P is equipped with the counting unit 805b. The counting unit 805d is arranged below a lower plate 857 formed in a box-like shape with an upper opening. The lower tray 857 is provided with a lower tray housing part 858 which serves as a space for temporarily housing the pachinko balls Q acquired by the pachinko machine P. The lower tray 857 is provided with a circular lower tray opening 856 (not shown) for allowing the pachinko balls Q stored therein to flow into the storage section 710 of the counting unit 805a. The lower tray opening 856 is normally closed by a lower tray shutter 859. When counting pachinko balls Q from the lower tray 857, the lower tray opening 856 is opened by sliding the lower tray shutter 859 to the left and right. A pachinko ball Q is dropped onto 710d, and counted by a counting counter 806 inside the ball lending machine PT via a counting passage portion 720d and a ball lending machine communicating passage portion 740d.

As shown in FIGS. 230 to 232, the counting unit 805d is roughly composed of a storage section 710d, a counting passage section 720d, a return tray 780d, and a ball lending machine communication passage section 740d, which will be described later.
As shown in FIGS. 231 and 232, the box-shaped housing portion 710d receives a large number of pachinko balls Q, and is provided with a bottom plate 749d inclined toward the housing portion passage 745d. The bottom plate 749d is provided with cushioning material such as rubber or urethane in order to absorb the impact from the pachinko balls Q falling from the lower tray 857. As shown in FIG. Also, the bottom plate 749d is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees toward the housing section passage 745d. The accommodation section passage 745d forms a grooved passage for guiding the pachinko balls Q below the bottom plate 749d, and is inclined downward from 2.85 degrees to about 5 degrees toward the lower passage 747d. Also, the housing section passage 745d communicates with the lower passage 747d of the counting passage section 720d.

Next, the counting passage portion 720d will be described with reference to FIGS. 231-241.
The counting passage portion 720d has an upper passage 746d and a lower passage 747d as main passages. 746 d of upper passages and 747 d of lower passages are the passage|passages which each was enclosed, and each is connecting with ball vending machine connection passage part 740d mentioned later.
As shown in FIGS. 233, 234 and 239, the upper passage 746d is a passage that guides the pachinko balls Q from the ball lending machine PT to the return tray 780d. The upper passage 746d includes an upper communication passage 787d that communicates with the ball lending machine communication passage portion 740d, and an upper conversion passage 786d that changes the direction of the pachinko balls Q rolling from the upper communication passage 787d and connects to the return port 748d. are provided.

The upper communication passage 787d has a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees toward the upper conversion passage 786d. Further, the upper conversion passage 786d is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees toward the return port 748d. A step is provided between the upper communication passage 787d and the upper conversion passage 786d, so that the direction of the pachinko balls Q can be easily changed. The return port 748d has a rectangular opening above the return tray 780d.

As shown in FIGS. 233, 234 and 239, the lower passage 747d is a passage that guides the pachinko balls Q from the accommodation portion 710d to the ball lending machine PT. The lower passage 747d includes a lower communication passage 789d having one end communicating with the housing section passage 745d and the other end communicating with the ball lending machine communication passage 740d, and a pachinko ball Q collected from the collection port 783d of the return tray 780d. A lower conversion passage 791d that converts the direction and communicates with the lower communication passage 789d is provided.

The lower connecting passage 789d has a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees toward the ball lending machine connecting passage portion 740d. Further, the lower conversion passage 791d is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees from the recovery port 783d toward the lower communication passage 789d.
A first step 793d that is equal to or slightly larger than the thickness of the movable return passage 784d is provided between the lower communication passage 789d and the housing portion passage 745d. By providing the first step 793d, it is possible to guide the pachinko balls Q without staying in the movable return passage 784d.
A second step 799d is provided between the lower communication passage 789d and the lower conversion passage 791d. By providing the second step 799d, it is possible to guide the pachinko balls Q without causing them to flow back into the storage section conversion passage 791d and without causing the pachinko balls Q passing through the lower communication passage 789d to stay.

As shown in FIGS. 233, 238 and 240, the movable return passage 784d is a substantially L-shaped passage, the bent L-shaped passage faces the recovery port 783d, and the long passage It is provided at a position above the communication passage 789d. The long path of the movable return path 784d is provided with a downward slope of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees along the slope of the lower connecting path 789d. In addition, the L-shaped curved short path is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 to 5 degrees toward the return tray shutter 782d of the return tray 780d. The movable return passage 784d has a triangular guide piece 792d that protrudes in a substantially triangular shape at the tip facing the lower communication passage 789d. The triangular guide piece 792d guides the pachinko balls Q rolling from the accommodation section passage 745d to the return tray shutter 782d.
One side of the movable return passage 784d is connected to a movable return passage solenoid SOd so that it can move up and down. The movable return path solenoid SOd is fixed at a position where it does not interfere with the rolling of the pachinko balls Q in the lower communication path 789d.
Since the movable return passage 784d can move up and down in this way, the lower communication passage 789d when counting the pachinko balls Q and the movable return passage 784d for conveying the pachinko balls Q stored in the storage portion 710d are provided. By arranging them vertically, it is possible to configure the counting passage portion 720d compactly, so that the entire counting unit 805d can be provided compactly.

Next, the return tray 780d will be described with reference to FIGS. 231 to 233. FIG. The return tray 780d is a tray that accommodates the pachinko balls Q returned from the ball lending machine PT and the pachinko balls Q returned from the storage section 710d. The return tray 780d is fixed to the side surface of the counting passage portion 720d, and has a storage bowl 781d that can store about 30 to 150 pachinko balls Q. As shown in FIG. The return tray 780d is provided at a position between the storage section 710 and the ball lending machine PT, unlike the position of the storage section 710 that stores the pachinko balls Q from the lower tray of the pachinko machine P, so that the return tray 780d can be returned from the ball lending machine PT. It is possible to secure a space for accommodating many pachinko balls Q to be fed, and at the same time, to provide a space for accommodating many pachinko balls from the lower tray 857.例文帳に追加
Therefore, since the pachinko balls Q acquired by the pachinko machine P can be temporarily accommodated in the return tray 780d, a preliminary pachinko machine P can be used when purchasing food or drink in the store with the pachinko balls Q or when playing the game of the pachinko machine P. It is possible to utilize it as a storage of ball Q. This is particularly effective for a pachinko machine P that does not have a lower tray 857 or does not have a small capacity for storing pachinko balls.

The receiving bowl 781d has a mortar-shaped inner surface, and has a structure in which the pachinko balls Q are gathered on the bottom surface. In addition, an open recovery port 783d communicating with the lower conversion passage 791d of the counting passage portion 720d is provided on the side surface of the containing bowl 781d.
Further, the return tray 780d is provided with a return tray shutter 782d formed in the same shape as the collection port 783d at the bottom. The return tray shutter 782d has a triangular cross-sectional shape when viewed from the side, and the angle can be changed in three stages around the support shaft 785d by a rotary solenoid RS connected to the support shaft 785d.
By changing the angle of the return tray shutter 782d, the return tray shutter 782d functions as a shutter for stopping the pachinko balls Q accommodated in the return tray 780d and for returning the pachinko balls Q accommodated in the return tray 780d to the ball lending machine PT. It can perform three functions: a role of a passage and a role of a passage for accommodating the pachinko balls Q from the accommodation portion 710d into the accommodation bowl 781.

In this way, by configuring the role of a number of passages with one member, the entire counting unit 805d can be provided compactly without complication.
Further, by providing the return tray shutter 782d, the pachinko balls Q can be accommodated in the return tray 780d without constructing a wasteful flow of the pachinko balls Q.

232 to 243, the operation for returning or counting the pachinko balls Q will be described based on the flow chart of the individual counting return process.
The flowchart shown in FIG. 242 describes the individual count return process (S3450).
First, when the pachinko balls Q acquired by the pachinko machine P are stored in the return tray 780d (YES in S3451), the rotary solenoid RS connected to the return tray shutter 782d rotates, and the return tray shutter 782d moves horizontally. It moves to the position of the angle α (FIG. 243(A), S3452). At the same time, the movable return passage solenoid SOd is turned ON (S3453), and the movable return passage 784d moves downward (FIG. 243(A), S3453). The angle α is an upward inclination of about 2.85 to 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal line (Fig. 243(A)). Therefore, the pachinko balls Q stored in the return tray 780d do not come up, pass through the movable return path 784d and the return tray shutter 782d, and roll along the slope.

When the return plate shutter 782d and the movable return passage 784d are moved as described above, the return plate shutter 782d and the movable return passage 784d move as shown in FIGS. , the pachinko balls Q roll on the return tray shutter 782d and the movable return path 784d. Specifically, the pachinko ball Q that has passed through the storage section passage 745d from the storage section 710d passes through the lowered movable return passage 784d, changes direction by the triangular guide piece 792d, passes through the return tray shutter 782d, and returns to the return tray. Roll towards 780d.
In this way, since the pachinko balls Q acquired by the pachinko machine P can be temporarily accommodated in the return tray 780d, the pachinko balls Q can be used as a backup when purchasing food or drink in the store or when playing the game of the pachinko machine P. It can be utilized as a storage of pachinko balls Q. This is particularly effective for the pachinko machine P without the lower plate 857.

Next, the case of counting pachinko balls Q accommodated in the return tray 780d will be described. When the pachinko balls Q accommodated in the return tray 780d are to be counted by the ball lending machine PT (YES in S3454), the rotary solenoid RS connected to the return tray shutter 782d rotates, and the return tray shutter 782d moves horizontally. It moves to the position of angle β (FIG. 243(B), S3455). At the same time, the movable return passage solenoid SOd is turned off (S3457), and the movable return passage 784d remains in the upper position (FIG. 243(B), S3457). The angle β is downwardly inclined from about 2.85 degrees to about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal line (FIG. 243(B)). Therefore, the pachinko balls Q accommodated in the return tray 780d roll along the slope of the return tray shutter 782d.

When the return tray shutter 782d is moved as described above, as shown in FIGS. The pachinko ball Q that is being held rolls on the return tray shutter 782d. Specifically, the pachinko balls Q on the return tray 780d pass over the return tray shutter 782d, roll along the slope from the lower conversion passage 791d to the lower communication passage 789d, and pass through the ball lending machine communication passage 740d. It rolls to the ball lending machine PT and is counted.
In this way, the pachinko balls Q accommodated in the return tray 780d can also be collected by the ball lending machine PT and counted, which is convenient when the game is stopped and the balance is settled. Also, when the player M forgets to collect the pachinko balls Q left behind, the employee can collect the pachinko balls Q in the island facility HS without opening the pachinko machine P, which facilitates the work. It is also possible to manage the tabulation of the pachinko balls Q that the customer M has forgotten.

Next, the case of counting the pachinko balls Q accommodated in the lower tray 857 of the pachinko machine P or the case of returning the pachinko balls Q from the ball lending machine PT to the return tray 780d will be described. When the pachinko balls Q received from the lower tray 857 of the pachinko machine are to be counted by the ball lending machine PT (NO in S3454), the rotary solenoid RS connected to the return tray shutter 782d rotates, and the return tray shutter 782d It moves to the position of angle γ with respect to the horizontal line (Fig. 243(C), S3456). At the same time, the movable return passage solenoid SOd is turned off (S3457), and the movable return passage 784d remains in the upper position (FIG. 243(C), S3457). The angle γ is an upward inclination of about 30 degrees to 70 degrees with respect to the horizontal line (Fig. 243(C)). Therefore, the pachinko balls Q accommodated in the return tray 780d do not roll into the lower communication passage 789d because the return tray shutter 782d closes the recovery port 783d.

When the return tray shutter 782d is moved as described above, the return tray shutter 782d is closed as shown in FIGS. rolls on the return tray shutter 782d and is accommodated in the return tray 780d. In addition, the pachinko balls Q on the lower tray 857 roll along the slope of the lower connecting passage 789d, pass through the ball lending machine connecting passage portion 740d, roll to the ball lending machine PT, and are counted.
In this way, the pachinko balls Q accommodated in the lower tray 857 can also be recovered to the ball lending machine PT and counted, which is convenient when counting the acquired pachinko balls Q. In addition, the player M can store the pachinko balls Q counted by the ball lending machine PT in the return tray 780d. It is possible to use it as a spare pachinko ball Q storage. This is particularly effective for the pachinko machine P without the lower plate 857.

<Modification 5>
Next, Modification 5 of the counting unit 805 will be described with reference to FIGS. 244 to 254. FIG. FIG. 244 is a perspective view showing a state in which the counting unit 805e of Modification 5 is attached to the ball lending machine PT. FIG. 245 is a perspective view of the counting unit 805e in Modification 5 showing how the pachinko balls Q are returned from the ball lending machine PT to the return tray 780e. 246 is a plan view showing a counting unit 805e of modification 5. FIG. 247 is a perspective view showing how pachinko balls are returned by enlarging a portion of the counting unit of Modification 5. FIG. 248 is a perspective view showing how pachinko balls are returned by enlarging a portion of the counting unit of Modification 5. FIG. 249 is a perspective view showing how pachinko balls are returned by enlarging a part of the counting unit of Modification 5. FIG. FIG. 250 is a perspective view showing the counting unit 805d with the housing portion 710e and the counting passage portion 720e cut along the QR line shown in FIG. FIG. 251 is a perspective view showing how pachinko balls roll in the counting unit 805e obtained by cutting the receiving portion 710e and the counting passage portion 720e along the line ST shown in FIG. FIG. 252 is a perspective view showing how pachinko balls roll in the counting unit 805e obtained by cutting the receiving portion 710e and the counting passage portion 720e along the ST line shown in FIG. FIG. 253 is a perspective view showing how the pachinko balls roll in the counting unit 805e obtained by cutting the accommodation portion 710e and the counting passage portion 720e along the line ST shown in FIG. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing return tray return processing in the counting unit 805e of Modification 5. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 244 shows a state in which the ball lending machine PT attached to the pachinko machine P is equipped with the counting unit 805e. The counting unit 805e is arranged below a lower plate 857 formed in a box shape with an open top. The lower tray 857 is provided with a lower tray housing part 858 which serves as a space for temporarily housing the pachinko balls Q acquired by the pachinko machine P. The lower tray 857 is provided with a circular lower tray opening 856 (not shown) for allowing the pachinko balls Q stored therein to flow into the storage section 710 of the counting unit 805a. The lower tray opening 856 is normally closed by a lower tray shutter 859. When the pachinko balls Q are counted from the lower tray 857, the lower tray opening 856 is opened by sliding the lower tray shutter 859 left and right. A pachinko ball Q is dropped into a ball dispenser PT, and counted by a counter 806 inside the ball dispenser PT via a counting passage 720d and a ball dispenser connecting passage 740d.

As shown in FIGS. 245 and 246, the counting unit 805e is roughly composed of a housing portion 710e, a counting passage portion 720e, a return tray 780e, and a ball lending machine communication passage portion 740e, which will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 245 and 246, the box-shaped housing portion 710e receives a large number of pachinko balls Q, and is provided with a bottom plate 749e inclined toward the housing portion passage 745e. The bottom plate 749e is provided with a cushioning material such as rubber or urethane in order to absorb the impact from the pachinko balls Q falling from the lower tray 857. As shown in FIG. Also, the bottom plate 749e is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 to 5 degrees toward the housing section passage 745e. The housing section passage 745e forms a groove-shaped passage for guiding the pachinko balls Q below the bottom plate 749e, and is inclined downward from about 2.85 degrees to about 5 degrees toward the lower passage 747e. In addition, the housing section passage 745e communicates with the lower passage 747e of the counting passage section 720e.

Next, the counting passage portion 720e will be described with reference to FIGS. 250-253.
The counting passage portion 720e has an upper passage 746e and a lower passage 747e as main passages. The upper passage 746e and the lower passage 747e are enclosed passages, and communicate with a ball lending machine communication passage portion 740e, which will be described later.
The upper passage 746e is a passage that guides the pachinko balls Q from the ball lending machine PT to the return tray 780e. The upper passage 746e includes an upper communication passage 787e that communicates with the ball lending machine communication passage portion 740e, and a movable return passage 784e that changes the direction of the pachinko balls Q rolling from the upper communication passage 787e and connects with the return port 748e. is provided. A side wall portion 779e is provided to change the rolling direction of the pachinko balls Q toward the return port 748e.

The upper communication passage 787e has a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees toward the movable return passage 784e. Also, the short L-shaped passage leading to the return port 748e of the movable return passage 784e is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees toward the return port 748e. Moreover, a step is provided between the upper communication passage 787e and the movable return passage 784e, so that the direction of the pachinko balls Q can be changed easily and the pachinko balls Q do not flow backward. The return port 748e has a rectangular opening above the return tray 780e.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 250 to 253, the lower passage 747e is a passage that guides the pachinko balls Q from the accommodation section 710e to the ball lending machine PT. The lower passage 747e includes a lower communication passage 789e having one end communicating with the housing section passage 745e and the other end communicating with the ball lending machine communication passage 740e, and a pachinko ball Q collected from the collection port 783e of the return tray 780e. A lower conversion passage 791e is provided that changes direction and communicates with the lower communication passage 789e.

The lower connecting passage 789e is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees toward the ball lending machine connecting passage portion 740e. In addition, the lower conversion passage 791e is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees from the return port 748e toward the lower communication passage 789e.
A stepped portion 799e is provided between the lower communication passage 789e and the lower conversion passage 791e. By providing the stepped portion 799e, it is possible to guide the pachinko balls Q without causing them to flow back into the storage section conversion passage 791e and without causing the pachinko balls Q passing through the lower communication passage 789e to stay.

The movable return passage 784e is a substantially L-shaped passage, with a short bent L-shaped passage facing the return port 748e, and a long passage located above the lower connecting passage 789e. there is The movable return passage 784e is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 degrees to 5 degrees along the inclination of the lower communication passage 789e. In addition, the L-shaped curved short path is provided with a downward inclination of about 2.85 to 5 degrees toward the return tray 780e. The movable return passage 784e has a triangular guide piece 792e that protrudes in a substantially triangular shape at the tip facing the lower communication passage 789e. The triangular guide piece 792e guides the pachinko ball Q rolling from the accommodation section passage 745e to the return tray 782e.

Since the movable return passage 784e has two functions as a return passage from the lower tray 857 of the pachinko machine P to the return tray 780e and a return passage from the ball lending machine PT to the return tray 780e, the counting passage portion 720e can be designed compactly. Therefore, since the device itself can be made compact, the storage capacity of the pachinko balls Q in the return tray 780e can also be increased.
One side of the movable return passage 784e is connected to a movable return passage solenoid SOe so that it can move up and down. Also, the movable return passage solenoid SOe is fixed at a position where it does not interfere with the rolling of the pachinko balls Q in the lower communication passage 789e.
In addition, since the movable return passage 784e can move up and down in this way, the lower communication passage 789e when counting the pachinko balls Q and the movable return passage 789e for conveying the pachinko balls Q stored in the storage portion 710e are provided. By arranging the passages 784e vertically, it is possible to configure the counting passage portion 720e compactly, so that the counting unit 805e as a whole can be provided compactly.

Next, the return tray 780e will be described with reference to FIGS. 247-250. The return tray 780e is a tray that accommodates the pachinko balls Q returned from the ball lending machine PT and the pachinko balls Q returned from the storage section 710e. The return tray 780e is fixed to the side surface of the counting passage portion 720e and has a storage bowl 781e that can store about 30 to 150 pachinko balls Q. The return tray 780e is provided at a position between the storage section 710 and the ball lending machine PT, unlike the position of the storage section 710 that stores the pachinko balls Q from the lower tray of the pachinko machine P, so that the return tray 780e can be placed in the empty space on the counter. , a space for accommodating many pachinko balls Q returned from the ball lending machine PT can be secured, and at the same time, a space for accommodating many pachinko balls from the lower tray 857 can be provided.
Therefore, since the pachinko balls Q acquired by the pachinko machine P can be temporarily accommodated in the return tray 780e, a preliminary pachinko machine P can be used when purchasing food or drink in the store with the pachinko balls Q or when playing the game of the pachinko machine P. It is possible to utilize it as a storage of ball Q. This is particularly effective for the pachinko machine P without the lower plate 857.

The receiving bowl 781e is formed in a semicircular shape in a plan view, and has a mortar-like structure in which the pachinko balls Q are gathered on the bottom surface. A side surface of the containing bowl 781e is provided with an open return port 748e that communicates with the upper and lower conversion passages 791e and the upper communication passage 787e of the counting passage portion 720e.
In addition, the return tray 780e is provided with a return tray shutter 782e that closes the return port 748e on its side surface. The return tray shutter 782e is provided with an operation knob 796e on the upper side surface so that it can be manually moved left and right. The return tray shutter 782e moves left and right to open and close the return port 748e. Further, an opening/closing detection sensor 797e for detecting opening/closing of the return tray shutter 782e is provided inside the counting passage portion 720e.

The operation for returning or counting the pachinko balls Q will be described based on the flow chart of the return tray return process with reference to FIGS. 247 to 254. FIG.
The flowchart shown in FIG. 254 describes the return tray return process (S3460).
First, when the pachinko balls Q acquired by the pachinko machine P are stored in the return tray 780e, if the return tray shutter 782e does not open the return opening 748e, the system waits (NO in S3461) and detects opening/closing. If it is confirmed by the sensor 797e that the return tray shutter 782e opens the return opening 748e (YES in S3461), it means that a request signal to return the ball to the return tray 780e has been sent by operating the liquid crystal screen of the ball lending machine PT. is confirmed (YES in S3462), the movable return passage solenoid SOe is turned ON (S3463), and the movable return passage 784e descends. The movable return passage 784e maintains the lowered state as shown in FIG. 250 until the return request signal is turned off (NO in S3464) (S3463). Then, if the return request signal is OFF (YES in S3464), that is, if it is not necessary to store the pachinko balls Q in the return tray, the movable return passage solenoid SOe is turned OFF (S3465), and the movable return path solenoid SOe is turned OFF (S3465). The passage 784e maintains the raised state, and the lower communication passage 789e becomes a state in which the pachinko balls Q can pass.

As described above, when the return tray shutter 782e opens the return port 748e and the movable return passage 784e moves, as shown in FIG. It passes through the lowered movable return passage 784e, changes direction by the triangular guide piece 792e, and rolls toward the return tray 780e.
In this way, since the pachinko balls Q acquired by the pachinko machine P can be temporarily accommodated in the return tray 780e, the pachinko balls Q can be used as a backup when purchasing food or drink in the store or when playing the game of the pachinko machine P. It can be utilized as a storage of pachinko balls Q. This is particularly effective for the pachinko machine P without the lower tray 857.

Next, the case of counting pachinko balls Q accommodated in the return tray 780e will be described. When the pachinko balls Q accommodated in the return tray 780e are counted by the ball lending machine PT, the return tray shutter 782e is opened and closed, and the return opening 748e is opened to guide the pachinko balls Q to the ball lending machine PT.
When the return tray shutter 782e moves as described above, as shown in FIGS. It passes through the passage portion 740e, rolls to the ball vending machine PT, and is counted.
In this way, the pachinko balls Q accommodated in the return tray 780e can also be collected by the ball lending machine PT and counted, which is convenient when the game is stopped and the balance is settled. In addition, when collecting the pachinko balls left behind by the player M, the employee can collect the pachinko balls in the island facility HS without opening the pachinko machine P, which facilitates the work and at the same time, It is also possible to manage the tally of pachinko balls Q that M has forgotten.

Next, a case of counting pachinko balls Q accommodated in the lower tray 857 of the pachinko machine P or a case of returning balls from the ball lending machine PT to the return tray 780e will be described.
When the pachinko balls Q received from the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine are counted by the ball lending machine PT, the movable return passage solenoid SOe is kept OFF as shown in FIG. It is kept in the upper position. The pachinko balls Q on the lower tray 857 roll according to the inclination of the lower connecting passage 789e, pass through the ball lending machine connecting passage portion 740e, roll to the ball lending machine PT, and are counted.
When returning balls from the ball lending machine PT to the return tray 780e, the return tray shutter 782e closes the return opening 748e as shown in FIGS. It rolls on the communication passage 787e, changes direction by the movable return passage 784e and the side wall portion 779e, and is stored in the return tray 780e from the return port 748e.

In this way, the pachinko balls Q accommodated in the lower tray 857 can also be recovered to the ball lending machine PT and counted, which is convenient when counting the acquired pachinko balls. In addition, since the player M can store the balls counted by the ball lending machine PT in the return tray 780e, the player M can use the pachinko ball Q as a spare for purchasing food and drink in the pachinko parlor or for playing the pachinko machine P. It is possible to utilize it as a storage of the pachinko balls Q as a matter of course. This is particularly effective for the pachinko machine P without the lower plate 857.

<Ball lending machine used in the modified example>
The ball lending machine PT and the ball lending machine connection passage portion 740d will be described with reference to FIG. Modifications can be applied to 1 to 5, and the individual counting unit 805e will be described as an example. FIG. 255 is a schematic diagram showing the movement of pachinko balls inside the ball lending machine PT. The ball lending machine P is provided in the vicinity of the pachinko machine P. In addition, the ball lending machine PT has an individual counting unit 805e, and can count the pachinko balls Q discharged from the pachinko machine P. Specifically, the pachinko balls Q ejected by opening the lower plate shutter 859 of the lower plate 857 of the pachinko machine P are stored in the storage portion 710 e of the individual counting unit 805 . The accommodated pachinko balls Q pass through the lower passage 747e of the counting passage portion 720e, pass through the ball lending machine connecting passage portion 740d, and are counted at the counting counter 806 provided in the middle of the counting ball passage 822 of the ball lending machine PT. counted. The counted pachinko balls Q pass through the equipment communication nozzle 819 and are recovered by the bellows 415 into the equipment HS. Also, the counted value is recorded in an IC card or the like as the player M's balls.

Also, the balls on hand can be discharged from the pachinko machine P, and can be discharged from the ball lending machine PT to the return tray 780e. When discharged from the ball lending machine PT to the return tray 780e, the pachinko balls Q ejected from the ball lending machine PT by a sprocket or the like (not shown) pass through the counter discharge passage 821 and reach the ball lending machine connecting passage 740d. , the upper passage 746e, and discharged to the return tray 780e.

The ball lending machine PT is a system that uses a prepaid IC card or magnetic card, a system that inserts a credit card or cash and gives an IC card or IC coin a valuable value that allows the purchase of game media, and a mobile terminal. The present invention can be applied to a system that reads a value stored in a game medium and gives it a value that allows purchase of the game medium, a system that purchases the game medium with cash, and the like.

(Wireless data transmission system for equipment including game machines installed in game halls)
256 and 257, the wireless system for game halls will be described with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257. FIG. FIG. 256 is a block diagram showing transmission and reception of data between devices in the wireless game arcade 1. As shown in FIG. 257A is a block diagram of first communication (BLT) showing transmission and reception of data between the transmission/reception device 94 and the table information display device K. FIG. FIG. 257(B) is a block diagram showing the contents of data of the first communication (BLT) received by the transmitting/receiving device 94 from the machine information display device K. As shown in FIG.

256 and 257 show the transfer of data output from incidental equipment such as a game machine (pachinko machine P) and ball lending machine PT installed in the game arcade. The data output from the pachinko machine P shown in this embodiment is an example. Data output from the pachinko machine P includes game information such as an out signal, a safe signal, a jackpot signal and a start signal.
The data output from the ball lending machine PT includes, for example, a sales signal, a camera ID obtained from each camera 69 mounted on the ball lending machine PT shown in FIG. 104, and imaging time data. The data output from the gaming machine (pachinko machine P) and the ball lending machine PT are collected once on the machine information display device K. FIG. The table information display device K conveys data described in detail in FIG. do. For the first communication (BLT), Class 1 with an output of 100 mW and a reach of about 100 m, Class 2 with an output of 2.5 mW and a reach of about 10 m, etc. are adopted.

The transmitting/receiving device 94 shows the role of the island computer 91 shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, collects the data in the island facility HS, and sends it to the hall computer 90 in the management area 2, for example, by encrypted WIFI which is a wireless standard. The received data is carried through the wireless router 5 and the switching hub 7 by the second communication (WIFI) using the standard.
Note that wireless communication of the first communication and the second communication is indicated by a dashed line, and a solid line indicates that it is a wired communication.
Note that the first communication (BLT) may be not only the Bluetooth (registered trademark) standard wireless communication but also the WIFI standard wireless communication. Also, the first communication and the second communication may be wireless communication using any one of IEEE1451, IEEE802.15, IEEE802.11, IEEE802.16, IEEE802.20, 3GPP, and 3GPP2.

Also, the switching hub 7 connects the hall computer 90, the monitoring camera system 60, and the face authentication server 80, and transfers data among these systems. In particular, the surveillance camera system 60 receives and stores the camera ID and the imaging time data, extracts the imaging data of the recording device 68 from the camera ID and the imaging time data, and compares it with the face data 605 accumulated in the face authentication server 80. Judge a person requiring attention such as a goto master. In this way, by managing images or recorded data using camera IDs and imaging times, there is no need to transmit image data that has been shot each time, and a huge amount of image data can be stored individually. Since the image data can be extracted from the recorded data at any time, the capacity of the face authentication system can be reduced. In addition, personal information can be easily handled because individual face image data is not stored.
It should be noted that although it is possible to distribute the imaged data, which is the data of the recording imaged by each camera 69, by wireless signal, in this embodiment, assuming that the capacity is large, the recording device in the management area 2 is transmitted by wire. I am sending it to 68.

Next, FIG. 257 shows an overview of the form of data transmission/reception between the transmission/reception device 94 and the table information display device K. As shown in FIG. FIG. 257(A) shows a one-to-multiple connection state where a device that initiates communication connection is a master (MA) and a device connected to the master (MA) is a slave (SL). As shown in FIG. 257(B), in this embodiment, the transmitting/receiving device 94 is used as a master (MA), and the table information display device K is connected as a slave (SL) to receive data.
In this embodiment, the frequencies used for communication are provided with a plurality of different frequencies, and one frequency is selected from the plurality of frequencies at regular intervals, and a technique is adopted in which different frequencies are used at regular intervals. Therefore, since radio wave interference with other frequencies is prevented, it is possible to prevent interference with wireless LANs such as WIFI standards. Illustratively, the frequency band from 2.402 GHz to 2.480 GHz is further divided into 79 channels 1 MHz wide, hopped from one frequency to another as a function of time, and channeled by a narrowband carrier signal. It is possible to employ a frequency hopping scheme in which the data signal is modulated.
The master (MA) can keep the communication connected with the slave (SL). The master (MA) is capable of simultaneous communication with the slaves (SL) and controls the timing of transmission of emergency commands and data.

Next, the configurations of the transmitting/receiving device 94 and the platform information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 258 and 259. FIG. FIG. 258 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the machine information display device K of the game arcade system shown in FIG. 67 as an example. FIG. 259 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the transmitter/receiver 94 of the game arcade system.
A machine information display device K shown in FIG. The machine information display device K stores the above-described various data obtained from the game machine in a storage unit 904 connected to the I/O 907, which is an input/output unit, and displays a touch panel type liquid crystal display connected to the I/O 907. Information integrated from the obtained data is displayed on the screen 891 under the control of the display control unit 903 .

The machine information display device K has a call button 901 for displaying on the liquid crystal display screen 891 or the like a display for calling an employee MS when a player M pays a ball box or has trouble with a gaming machine. It also has a remote control receiver 902 for receiving remote control signals for the employee MS to operate the liquid crystal display screen 891 . The machine information display device K also has an external I/F 905 for obtaining information from the pachinko machine P and the ball lending machine PT.
The platform information display device K also includes a first communication module 906 that controls first communication (BLT).

The transmitting/receiving device 94 shown in FIG. 259 is provided with a receiving device control section 941 inside a housing (not shown). The transmitting/receiving device 94 is a storage unit connected to the input/output unit 946 for temporarily storing various data from the machine information display device K obtained by the first communication module 947 connected to the I/O unit 946. 949 is provided. The transmitting/receiving device 94 includes a second communication module 948 that transmits data temporarily stored in the storage unit 949 to the hall computer 90 via the wireless router 5 (FIG. 256) by WIFI standard wireless communication. The transmitting/receiving device 94 also has a touch panel type input screen 918 connected to the I/O 946 for setting communication. Further, the transmitting/receiving device 94 is connected to a top lamp 965 provided on the island end of the island facility HS, and controls lighting of the LED provided on the top lamp 965 .

Next, the communication connection and data structure of the transmission/reception device 94 and the machine information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 263. FIG. FIG. 260 is a block diagram showing transmission and reception of data within the island facility HS of the game arcade system. FIG. 261 is a block diagram of the first communication (BLT) showing transmission and reception of data between each device of the game arcade system. FIG. 262 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of data transmitted and received between each device of the game arcade system. FIG. 263 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data transmitted and received by the game arcade system.

Communication connection will be described with reference to FIGS. The machine information display device K (SL) and the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) form a piconet group and are connected in a relationship of master (MA) and slave (SL). On the other hand, up to seven slaves (SL) can be connected at the same time. The master (MA) employs a time-division multiplexing transmission system for processing transmitted data in a time-division manner. The transmitting/receiving device 94 is provided at the end of the island facility HS, and is provided at the end near the wireless router 5 (FIGS. 1 and 2) for performing the second communication (WIFI). Communication is possible without the need to add ports or the like by time-division multiplexing.

The relay device 96 has the same structure as the transmission/reception device 94 shown in FIG. Also, the relay device 96 installed at the island end of the island facility is connected to the top lamp 965 installed at the island end, and performs lighting control of the LED installed in the top lamp 965 .
By switching between the master (MA) and the slave (SL), the relay device 96 transmits the data collected from the machine information display device K (SL) to the transmission/reception device 94 and the data from the machine information display device K (SL). It can fulfill the function of the role of receiving For example, the relay device 96(a) transmits to the transmission/reception device 94 the data of the machine information display devices K from SL7 to SL12 and the data collected by the relay device 96(b). By transmitting and receiving data wirelessly through the relay device 94 in this way, the game hall system can display the data of all the machines collected by the machine information display device K (SL) in the island facility HS as the first data. It is possible to transmit the data to the transmitting/receiving device 94 by communication (BLT), and to collectively transmit the data of all the devices from the transmitting/receiving device 94 to the hall computer 90 by the second communication (WIFI).

FIG. 261 shows the state of communication between the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) and the machine information display device K (SL). After establishing a connection with the machine information display device K (SL1 to S7), the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) transmits to the machine information display device K (SL1 to S7) all at once, and an emergency flag (D0016) in FIG. is occurring. For example, the object of the emergency flag (D0016) is an abnormal signal caused by a pin of the pachinko machine P when a magnet or an electric wave is detected, or an unlocking of the game machine requested by the employee MS when dealing with a problem with the game machine. A request signal, an abnormal signal due to a trouble with the ball lending machine PT, an abnormal signal from the counter JC, and the like are included. After the simultaneous transmission, as shown in FIG. 261, the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) sequentially transmits data to the machine information display devices K (SL1 to S7).

FIG. 262 shows the structure of data transmitted between the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) and the platform information display device K (SL). The access code 915 specifies the identification number of a piconet that is a group of slaves (SL1 to SL7) configured in the island facility HS, and the packet header 916 specifies the identification number of the slaves (SL1 to SL7). Type data (D0001 to D00017) shown in the form in FIG. 263 are written.
The data transmitted from the table information display device K (SL) to the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) is an identification number such as a table number that can be recognized by the D0001 from the game machine and incidental equipment such as the table information display device K and the ball lending machine PT. is. D0002 indicates the time when data was transmitted from the machine information display device K (SL) to the transmission/reception device 94 (MA).

D0003 represents the number of out balls discharged from the gaming machine, and "1" indicates 100 when converted into the actual number of balls. The table information display device K (SL) sets data to be transmitted based on the predetermined number of out balls. For example, when 10 out balls are received, a signal of 1 pulse is received, and when 10 pulses are counted, other data (D0001 to D0017) are extracted and set as data to be transmitted as shown in form 908A in FIG. be done.
By using the number of out balls as a reference, the actual operation of the gaming machine in the hall computer 90, such as the operational status of the game machine, is calculated. Smooth introduction of other equipment. In addition, since the operating status of a gaming machine is often determined by whether or not there are out-balls, by using the number of out-out balls as a setting standard for data transmission, it is extremely easy to check the operating status of the gaming machine. Become.

D0004 represents the number of safe balls, which is the number of game media acquired by the player M, and "8" indicates 8 when converted into the actual number of balls. D0005 indicates whether or not the gaming machine is in a big win, "0" indicates that it is not in a big win, and "1" if it is in a big win. D0006 indicates whether or not the gaming machine is in the probability variation, "0" indicates that it is not in the probability variation, and indicates "1" if the probability variation is in progress. D0007 indicates the number of times the pattern of the gaming machine has changed, and "8" indicates that the pattern has changed eight times. D0008 is a number indicating how much the ball lending machine PT has sold, and "1" indicates 500 yen in monetary terms.

D0009 indicates the time when the gaming machine started the jackpot. D0010 indicates the time when the gaming machine finished the jackpot. D0011 indicates the time when the gaming machine started the probability variation. D0012 indicates the time when the gaming machine finished changing probability. D0013 indicates the identification number of each camera 69 (FIG. 104) mounted on the ball lending machine PT. D0014 indicates the time at which the camera 69 (FIG. 104) acquires an image by face recognition when it detects that a person requiring caution has been found or that the camera 69 has been tampered with by blindfolding it. . D0015 indicates the type of acquisition of an image by face authentication, "3" indicates a good player M, and "1" indicates a player M who needs attention.

D0016 is the emergency flag described above, and the type is indicated by numerals "0", "1" and "2". "0" indicates that there is no emergency flag, and "1" and "2" indicate that there is an emergency flag. "1" is an important code for a game machine such as a goto or a trouble, and is a code that needs to be notified to the hall computer 90 as soon as possible. Also, "2A, 2B" is a code for turning on the top lamp 965 provided at the end of the island facility HS and informing the employee MS that the player M is calling when the call button is pressed. . "A, B" of the code of "2" is provided to distinguish which passage side of the island end of the island equipment HS is to be lit (Fig. 260).
D0017 indicates count data and indicates the number of balls counted by the individual counter 805 mounted on the ball vending machine PT, and "859" indicates 859 actually counted balls. These data (D0001 to D0017) are cleared when the data transmission is successful, and then the table information display device K (SL) extracts each data at the time when the predetermined number of out balls has been reached and converts them into data to be transmitted. set.

<Control of wireless communication that carries data>
Wireless communication control will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 to 271. FIG. FIG. 264 is a sequence diagram for initial registration between devices of the game arcade system. FIG. 265 is a sequence diagram showing a standby state between devices of the game arcade system. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing game data communication main processing of the game arcade system. FIG. 266 is a flow chart showing emergency communication data processing of the game arcade system. FIG. 268 is a flow chart showing first communication data transmission processing of the game arcade system. FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing second communication data transmission processing of the game arcade system. FIG. 270 is a sequence diagram showing data communication processing between devices of the game arcade system. FIG. 271 is a sequence diagram showing emergency data communication processing between devices of the game arcade system.

<<Initial Settings>>
Initial setting of communication between the transmitting/receiving device 94 and the machine information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265. FIG.
The transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) and the machine information display device K (SL) shift to the initial registration mode (S3471) as shown in FIG. Prepare the ring. The transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) searches for the machine information display device K (SL) capable of the first communication (S3472), and the machine information display device K (SL) searches for the machine information display device K (SL) capable of the first communication ( SL), and transmits the machine number, the BL address as a unique address for communication, and the authentication code as information (S3473). The transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) selects from the list of machine information display devices K(SL) capable of the first communication (S3475), and inputs the authentication code of the machine information display device K(SL) to the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA). (S3476) to complete the link connection (S3477). Immediately after connecting the link, the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) and the machine information display device K (SL) exchange a random number key different from that of the second communication (WIFI) in order to strengthen communication security (S3478). The random number key is stored in each storage area so that it can be stored even when the power is turned off (S3479). The random number key may be a code or a formula. In this way, it is possible to strengthen security against eavesdropping and the like.
Further, when the machine information display device K (SL) is added, it can be added by a simple work of completing the link connection with the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA), so there is no need to install wiring.
In addition, since the first communication (BLT) and the second communication (WIFI) have different security functions, double security is applied, making the system even more difficult to wiretap.

The transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) and the machine information display device K (SL) generate a dynamic random number and store the dynamic random number so that it can be stored even after the power is turned off (S3480). Further, the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) and the table information display device K (SL) exchange dynamic random numbers (S3481), so that when the connection is interrupted and reconnected, the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) and the table information display device K (SL) The machine information display device K (SL) confirms the generated random numbers with each other, thereby enabling safe and automatic link connection. The random number for connection is automatically generated based on the random number key when the power is turned on, and by exchanging dynamic random numbers with each other, the security of reconnection and connection after power on is enhanced.
As described above, the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) and the table information display device K (SL) have completed the pairing by the initial setting, and after that, the power is turned on each other, and if the first communication is possible, the connection is automatically established. be done.

Next, FIG. 265 shows the state from the successful pairing of the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) and the table information display device K (SL) to the standby mode state.
When the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) and the machine information display device K (SL) are powered on (S3482), the machine information display device K (SL) connects to the transmission and reception device 94 (MA) with which the pairing was successful before. In response, pairing is requested (S3483). When requesting pairing, the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) transmits the machine information, BT address and dynamic random number as information, and the machine information display device K (SL) collates the information such as the dynamic random number. If connection is possible, a response is made (S3483). When responding, it transmits machine information, BT address and dynamic random number as information to establish connection (S3485).
Immediately after establishing the connection, the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) and the machine information display device K (SL) generate and store dynamic random numbers (S3486), exchange dynamic random numbers (S3487), and prepare for the next connection. Prepare. After that, the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) and the machine information display device K (SL) transition to a low power consumption standby mode until data transmission/reception is started (S3488).

<<Data wireless communication control>>
Control of communication between the transmitting/receiving device 94 and the machine information display device K will be described with reference to FIGS. 266 to 271. FIG.
First, in the game data communication main process (S3490) shown in FIG. 266, emergency communication data processing (S3550) is performed first, followed by first communication data processing (S3560) and second communication data processing (S3580). , the processing up to the transfer of the data of the game machine or the like to the hall computer 90 .

First, the emergency communication data processing (S3550) will be described with reference to FIGS. 267 and 271. FIG. The transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) performs simultaneous transmission before the first communication in order to confirm the emergency flag, and transmits the emergency flag to the machine information display device K (SL) and the relay device 96 (a, b, c, d). is checked (S3552, S3557). Urgent flags are classified into "1" and "2", with "1" being the most urgent flag and being related to silly acts and the like. "2" is a flag for the player M to call the employee MS. If there is an emergency flag (YES in S3552, YES in S3557), the contents of the emergency flag are sent to the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) and relay devices 96 (a, b, c, d) (S3553, S3558). The relay device 96 (a, b, c, d) sends the call flag "2" to turn on the top lamp 965 as described above. Also, the flag of "1" is transmitted from the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) to the hall computer 90 through the second communication (WIFI). The hall computer 90 displays a popup or the like on the monitor screen according to the content of the emergency flag, and the employee responds. Incidentally, the emergency flag may be further subdivided for each abnormality type. For example, "1-1" is a magnetic goto, "1-2" is a radio goto, "1-3" is a door open signal, "1-4" is a door unlock request signal, and "1-5" is a counter. The open/close signal and "1-6" may be subdivided into a counter open/close request signal and the like, and the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) may transmit an emergency flag to the hall computer 90. FIG.

When the emergency flag is transmitted, the table information display device K (SL) and the relay device 96 (a, b, c, d) shift to standby mode to wait for a response from the hall computer 90. (S3554). Then, response data is sent from the hall computer 90 to the machine information display device K(SL) and the relay devices 96(a, b, c, d), and the machine information display device K(SL) performs response processing.
If the emergency flag is "1", it waits to respond to a signal from the hall computer 90 until the emergency flag is cleared, and immediately shifts to a state where data can be received (NO in S3556, S3553, S3554, S3555).

Also, if the emergency flag "1" is canceled (YES in S3556), it is confirmed whether or not the emergency flag "2" is generated (S3558), and the call button of the machine information display device K (SL) is pressed. If 901 is pressed (YES in S3557), the machine information display device K (SL) transmits a call flag to the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) or relay device 96 (a, b, c, d) (S3558). ). Incidentally, if both emergency flags "1" and "2" are canceled (NO in S3557), the machine information display device K (SL) sets the cancellation flag, and the transmitter/receiver 94 (MA) or relay device 96 a, b, c, d) (S3559). Also, the release flag is transmitted from the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) to the hall computer 90 through the second communication (WIFI) (S3559).

Next, the first communication data transmission process (S3560) and the second communication data transmission process (S3580) will be described with reference to FIGS. 269 to 270. FIG.
First, in the first communication data transmission process (S3560), the machine information display device K (SL) transmits game information (out signal, safe signal, jackpot signal and start signal, sales signal, camera ID, imaging time data, etc.) related to the gaming machine. ) are collected (S3561). The machine information display device K (SL) sets the data to be transmitted based on the number of out balls as described above. When the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number (eg, 100) (YES in S3562), the machine information display device K (SL) transmits data including the number of out balls (eg, safe signal, jackpot signal, and A start signal, sales signal, camera ID, imaging time data, etc. (FIG. 263)) are set (S3563). The set data is transmitted from the machine information display device K (SL) to the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) or the relay device 96 (a, b, c, d) (S3565). The data to be transmitted is transmitted until the data transmission of the first communication (BLT) succeeds (NO in S3566), and the machine information display device K (SL) succeeds in transmitting the data (YES in S3566). , clears the set data (S3567) and prepares for the next transmission.

In addition, when the number of out balls does not reach the predetermined number (NO in S3562), the machine information display device K (SL) counts the number of times data transmission processing has not been performed (S3569). When the predetermined number of times has been reached (YES in S3570), this is a process of forcibly transmitting the collected data (S3562) data transmission. By these processes (NO in S3562, YES in S3569, S3570), the hall computer 90 detects that there is no out signal, but the number of safe balls, the number of starts, etc., are generated. It is possible to detect machine anomalies or communication anomalies. Then, the machine information display device K(SL) clears the count number (S3567), and the first communication data transmission process (S3560) ends. It should be noted that the count number (S3569) is based on the number of simultaneous transmissions transmitted to confirm the emergency flag from the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) and the transmission time. Even if the number is reached, it is fine.

Next, the second communication data transmission process (S3580) will be described. Transceiver 94 (MA)
stores the transmitted data (S3581) and checks whether there is an emergency flag (S3584). If there is an emergency flag (YES in S3584), the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) extracts the emergency flag (S3585) and turns on the top lamp 965 if there is a flag of "2", ie, a call flag. control. If the flag is "1", the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) sets the type of second communication data according to the emergency flag, and transmits the data to the hall computer 90 (S3590). Data transmission continues until it succeeds (NO in S3591), and if the data transmission succeeds (YES in S3591), the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) clears the set data (S3592), and performs the next transmission. Prepare for.
If there is no emergency flag (NO in S3584), the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) aggregates the data sent from the machine information display device K (SL) and performs second communication (WIFI). (S3586), transmits the data until the data transmission succeeds (S3590, S3591), and clears the set data when the data transmission succeeds (S3586). S3592) to prepare for the next transmission.

<Modified Example of Control of Wireless Communication for Carrying Data>
FIG. 272 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of data transmitted and received by wireless communication in the game arcade system. The configuration is the same as that of the wireless system for data transfer of equipment including gaming machines installed in the game arcade described above, and the same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted. In particular, the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) is the same, but the relay device 96 is eliminated and the machine information display device K (SL) has the function of relaying. Machine information display devices K (SL1 to SL14) are described, and the machine information display devices Ka1 and Ka2 perform second communication (BLT) by switching between the master (MA) and the slave (SL) to display the machine information. It is possible to transmit the data of the display device K to the hall computer 90 .

For example, the machine information display device K (SL7 to SL14) wirelessly conveys the game information obtained from the pachinko machine P or the like to the machine information display device Ka1 (MA/SL11) by the first communication (BLT). At that time, the machine information display device Ka1 (MA/SL11) becomes the master (MA), the machine information display devices K (SL7 to SL14) become the slaves (SL), and the machine information display device Ka1 (MA/SL11) becomes the machine information. Collect the data of the display device K (SL7 to SL14). Further, after the machine information display device Ka1 (MA/SL11) aggregates the data collected by the machine information display device Ka2 (MA/SL14) as a master (MA), the machine information display device Ka2 (MA/SL14) It becomes a slave (SL) and transmits collected data to the machine information display device Ka1 (MA/SL11).
Further, after the table information display device Ka1 (MA/SL11) aggregates the collected data as the master (MA), the table information display device Ka1 (MA/SL11) transmits the collected data to the transmission/reception device 94 (MA). do. By forming piconets and transmitting and receiving data between piconets in this way, data is transmitted from the platform information display device K (SL) at one island end to the transmitting/receiving device 94 (MA) at the other island end. Since it is possible to transport by wireless communication, there is no need to install wiring in the island facility, and at the same time, there is a risk of errors due to noise caused by transporting pachinko balls and radio noise from the pachinko machine P, electric leakage, etc. less.

(Modified example of the system in which the signals for turning on the call button and the top lamp are wireless)
273 to 278, a modification of the system in which signals for turning on the call button and the top lamp are made wireless will be described.
<Structure of call button in wireless system>
The configuration of a wireless system for lighting the call button and the top lamp will be described with reference to FIGS. 273 to 277. FIG. FIG. 273(A) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each device for transmitting and receiving call data from the call button unit 962 of the game arcade system. 273(B) is a front view of the call button unit 962. FIG.
FIG. 274 is a block diagram showing transmission and reception of call data between devices of the game arcade system. FIG. 275 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration between devices of the game arcade system. FIG. 276 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each device for transmitting and receiving call data of the game arcade system. FIG. 276 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of each device for transmitting and receiving call data of the game arcade system. FIG. 277(A) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the call button unit 962 of the game arcade system and the mobile terminal SM are connected. FIG. 277B is a schematic diagram showing the state of the portable terminal SM of the game arcade system.

FIG. 273 shows a call button unit 962 attached to the ball lending machine PT. The call button unit 962 is connected to the table information display device K by wire, and is installed within a reachable range without having to stand up. The call button unit 962 has a call switch 967 , a call liquid crystal display 966 and a USB terminal 968 . The call switch 967 is an ON/OFF changeover switch, and when the call switch 967 is pressed, the call liquid crystal display 966 displays "calling" to indicate that the call is being made. By pressing the call switch 967, the call button unit 962 sets the call flag to ON. Also, as shown in FIG. 276, a USB terminal 968 is a terminal for charging a storage battery possessed by the personal mobile terminal SM. As shown in FIG. 277, the personal portable terminal SM can be used as a substitute for the operation button of the call button unit 962 only when this USB terminal 968 is connected by dedicated application software and is being charged. Therefore, it is possible to operate the call button unit 962 at hand while operating the personal portable terminal SM owned by the individual. In this way, it is not necessary to reach for the table information display device K above the player M, and the player can operate the device at hand.

Also, the call button unit 962 can set a call flag by inputting a call signal through the USB terminal 968 from dedicated application software stored in the personal portable terminal SM. As described above, since only the call button unit 962 to which the personal mobile terminal SM is connected via the USB terminal 968 can respond to operations from the personal mobile terminal SM, interference with other call button units 962 is possible. In addition, it is sufficiently possible to deal with unauthorized remote control by mischief from a personal portable terminal that is not connected like wireless. The machine information display device K and the call button unit 962 may be connected not only by wire but also by wireless communication. Alternatively, a signal of permission to transmit a call flag to the dedicated application software of the personal mobile terminal SM may be transmitted to the call button unit 962 from the USB terminal 968 by wire or wirelessly.

Next, the configuration of wireless communication using the first communication (BLT) described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 and 275. FIG. The call button unit 962 is connected to the call button unit 962 as a plurality of slaves (SL) by Bluetooth (registered trademark) communication with a transmitter/receiver 961 (MA) as a master. Once a link connection is established between the master (MA) and the slave (SL), a secure wireless communication connection is established by the procedures and security described above, and the master (MA) and the slave (SL) can transmit and receive. state.
Also, the call button unit 962 is usually a slave (SL), and if a call flag is generated, it transmits the flag. A flag is transmitted to the transmitting/receiving device 965 (MA) at both ends, and the transmitting/receiving device 965 (MA) turns on the top lamps 965A and 965B.
The call button unit 963 (MA/SL7) has a function of switching between master (MA) and slave (SL), and transmits and receives a network (SLB) call flag.

The call flags of the network (SLA) call button units 962 (SL1 to SL7) are sent to the transceiver 961 (MA1), relaying the call button unit 963 (MA/SL7) and the call button unit 963 (SL14), It is sent to transceiver 961 (MA2).
In addition, the call flag of the call button unit 962 (SL14 to SL20) of the network SLC is transmitted to the transmission/reception device 961 (MA2), relaying the call button unit 963 (SL14) and the call button unit 963 (MA/SL7), It is sent to transceiver 961 (MA1).
In addition, the call flag of the call button unit 962 (SL7 to SL14) of the network SLB is transmitted to the call button unit 963 (MA/SL7), and the call button unit 963 (MA/SL7) and the call button unit 963 (SL14) are It is relayed and transmitted to the transmitting/receiving device 961 (MA1) and the transmitting/receiving device 961 (MA2).

<Control of call button unit in wireless system>
Control of the call button unit 962 in the wireless system will be described with reference to FIGS. 275 and 278. FIG. FIG. 278 is a sequence diagram showing call data communication processing between devices of the game arcade system.
The call button units 962 and 963 set a call flag when the call switch 967 or the like is pressed by the player M (S3601). Then, the call button units 962 and 963 display "calling" or the like on the call liquid crystal display 966 (S3602).

Next, the call button units 962 (SL1 to SL6, SL15 to SL20) transmit call flags, and the transceivers 961 (MA1, 2) receive the call flags (S3603). Further, the transmitting/receiving device 961 (MA1) transmits the call flag from the call button unit 962 (SL1 to SL6) of the network (SLA) to the call button unit 963 (MA/SL7), and the network (SLB) and the network ( (S3607).
Also, the call button unit 963 (MA/SL7) receives the call flag from the call button unit 962 (SL8 to SL13) of the network (SLB) (S3604).
Further, the call button unit 963 (MA/SL7) receives the call flag from the call button unit 962 (SL14 to SL20) of the network (SLC) from the call button unit 963 (SL14), and also receives the call flag from the call button unit 963 (SL14) of the network (SLA). The call flags from the button units 962 (SL1 to SL6) are sent to the call button unit 963 (SL14) (S3606).

Similarly, the call button unit 963 (SL14) receives the call flag from the network (SLC) call button unit 962 (SL14 to SL20) from the transmitter/receiver 961 (MA2), and also receives the network (SLA) call flag. The call flags from the button units 962 (SL1 to SL6) are transmitted to the transmitter/receiver 961 (MA2) (S3605).
When the transmitter/receiver 961 (MA1, MA2) receives the call flag from the call button unit 962 (SL1 to SL20), it lights the top lamps 965A and 965B (S3608).

Next, the call button units 962 and 963 cancel the call flag when the call switch 967 or the like is pressed again by the player M (S3609). Then, the call button units 962 and 963 erase the display of calling on the call liquid crystal display 966 (S3610).
Next, the call button unit 962 (SL1-SL6, SL15-SL20) transmits the flag release, and the transceiver 961 (MA1,2) receives the flag release (S3611). In addition, the transmitting/receiving device 961 (MA1) transmits the flag release from the call button unit 962 (SL1 to SL6) of the network (SLA) to the call button unit 963 (MA/SL7), and the network (SLB) and the network ( (S3615).

Also, the call button unit 963 (MA/SL7) receives the call flag from the call button unit 962 (SL8 to SL13) of the network SLB (S3604).
In addition, the call button unit 963 (MA/SL7) receives flag release from the call button unit 962 (SL14 to SL20) of the network (SLC) from the call button unit 963 (SL14), and also receives the call button unit 963 (SL14) of the network (SLA). A flag release from the button unit 962 (SL1 to SL6) is transmitted to the call button unit 963 (SL14) (S3614).

Similarly, the call button unit 963 (SL14) receives flag release from the network (SLC) call button unit 962 (SL14 to SL20) from the transmitter/receiver 961 (MA2), and also receives the network (SLA) call. A flag release from the button unit 962 (SL1 to SL6) is transmitted to the transmitting/receiving device 961 (MA2) (S3613).
Then, when receiving the flag release from the call button unit 962 (SL1 to SL20), the transmitter/receiver 961 (MA1, MA2) turns off the top lamps 965A, 965B (S3616).

Since it is possible to transmit data by wireless communication from the transmitting/receiving device 961 (MA1) at one end of the island to the transmitting/receiving device 961 (MA1) at the other end of the island, it is troublesome to lay wiring in the island equipment. At the same time, the influence of the noise due to the transportation of the pachinko balls and the radio noise from the pachinko machine P on errors and the risk of electric leakage are reduced. In addition, since the security function is also enhanced, it is possible to deal with eavesdropping and the like.
It should be noted that the lighting of the top lamp 965 may be performed not only within the same island equipment HS, but also in the island equipment across a passage facing each other.

(Inserted amount rewriting control)
68, 70, 279 and 280, the configuration of each device used for rewriting control of the amount of money invested will be described.
The rewriting of the input amount is, for example, when the member card 550 is carelessly forgotten to be inserted into the ball lending machine PT and the money is inserted first, or when the guest player M becomes a guest, the guest card 551 becomes valuable. When the guest card 551 in which the value is stored is forgotten to be inserted in spite of the balance, and the money is inserted first, the value of the guest card 551 is inserted into the desired IC card (550, 551). This is control processing for rewriting to move value.

The membership card 550 has an IC chip 553 provided therein, which contains information such as an ID, which is an identification number unique to the card, face image data 555 taken when the member was registered, remaining money, accumulated balls, accumulated medals, and balls acquired today. remembered. In the IC chip 507 provided inside the guest card 551, an ID, which is an identification number unique to the card, money photographed by each stand camera 69 is inserted, or the photographing date and time counted by the counting unit 805, the remaining money, and today Information such as the number of balls acquired is stored.

The devices used for these controls are the card processing unit 807 provided in the ball lending machine PT, each camera 69, the individual face authentication server 820 built in the HDD 855 connected to each camera 69, and the management area 2. It is composed of a face authentication server 80 and a hall computer 90 . The hall computer 90 may be a system that manages valuable values such as accumulated balls, accumulated medals, and a ball lending machine PT. good.

Next, the input amount rewriting control will be described with reference to FIGS. 279 to 284. FIG. FIG. 279 is an explanatory diagram showing the rewriting state of the inserted amount of the game arcade system. FIG. 280 is a sequence diagram showing processing for rewriting the inserted amount of the game arcade system. FIG. 281 is a flow chart showing the input amount rewriting main process of the game arcade system. FIG. 282 is a flow chart showing processing for rewriting the inserted amount of money for each camera of the game arcade system. FIG. 283 is a flow chart showing money amount rewriting processing of the game arcade system. FIG. 284 is a flow chart showing guest card balance face authentication processing of the game arcade system.

First, the input amount rewriting main process (S3620) will be described with reference to FIGS. 279, 280 and 281. FIG. The card processing unit 807 of the ball lending machine PT is on standby until bills are thrown into the ball lending machine PT (NO in S3621), and if bills are put in the ball lending machine PT (YES in S3621), the bills An input signal is transmitted to each camera 69 (S3622). At the same time, the card processing unit 807 of the ball lending machine PT transmits the ID of the guest card 551 and the amount of money inserted to the hall computer 90 (S3623). The hall computer 90 then stores the received ID of the guest card 551 and the amount of money invested (S3624), and uses them for sales data and the like.
Also, the card processing unit 807 allows the guest card 511 to be read and written from the card storage unit 816 by the card reader/writer 804, and the other member card 550 or guest card 551 to the card insertion/ejection port 811 (FIG. 68). The guest card 551 is moved to a position where it cannot be inserted.

A member holding a member card 550 or a player M holding another guest card 551 notices the mistake, operates the liquid crystal operation unit 801 of the ball lending machine PT shown in FIG. A button for requesting rewriting to rewrite money is operated. When the player M operates the button (YES in S3625), the card processing unit 807 transmits a face authentication verification request signal to the individual face authentication server 820 of each camera 69. FIG.
At the same time, the card processing unit 807 transmits the ID of the guest card and the amount of money requested for rewriting to the hall computer 90 (S3627). If the face authentication determination result by the individual face authentication server 820 is OK, that is, if it matches the person at the time the money was inserted (YES in S3268), the card processing unit 807 receives approval from the hall computer 90 (S3629), It shifts to rewrite processing (S3640). If the judgment result of the face authentication does not match or the approval is not granted, the card processing unit 807 displays "error" or "impossible" on the liquid crystal operation unit 801 (FIG. 69) of the ball lending machine PT. etc. are displayed (S3631).
The approval means may be performed automatically by the hall computer 90, or the approval signal may be transmitted after determining whether or not the card has an abnormality. Also, the approval means may be an operation by an employee. By providing means for approval in this way, security can be further strengthened.

Next, the individual camera determination process (S3650) will be described with reference to FIGS. 280 and 282. FIG. Each camera determination process (S3650) is a process performed by each camera 69 and individual face authentication server 820. FIG.
Since each camera 69 is constantly capturing images from the time the power is turned on and is monitoring the player M, captured moving images are always recorded in the individual face authentication server 820 (S3651). When the individual face authentication server 80 receives the bill insertion signal from the card processing unit 807 (YES in S3652), it extracts and stores the imaged time data (S3653).
In addition, even when the acquired balls are counted, the imaged time data may be extracted and stored. Since the time data recorded by each camera 69 is mainly stored, the data capacity is small and the speed of data storage processing is high, so that the player M does not have to wait. In addition, since the data held is mainly time data, it is not data related to faces, so it is suitable for the handling of personal information as well as for game halls.

After that, when the individual face authentication server 80 receives the face authentication collation request signal (YES in S3654), it extracts the time when the most recent banknote was inserted from the stored time data (S3655). Then, the individual face authentication server 80 extracts the face of the person recorded at the extraction time (S3656), compares the face of the person currently being imaged with the extracted face (S3657), and checks whether the faces match. A determination is made (S3658). After the determination, the individual face authentication server 80 transmits either the mismatch determination or the match determination to the hall computer 90 as a result (S3659, S3661).

Next, the amount rewriting process (S3640) will be described with reference to FIGS. 68, 279, 280 and 283. FIG.
Card processing unit 807 waits until hall computer 90 transmits approval for rewriting (NO at S3641), and if an approval signal is transmitted (YES at S3641), the ID of guest card 551 and the card are stored. The remaining balance is read from the card reader/writer 804 (S3642) and temporarily stored in the RAM 853 and HDD 855 (S3643).

The card processing unit 807 erases the data such as the balance of the target guest card 551 (S3644), controls the drive motor 814, and stores the data so that another player M can use it to store money for the next time. The erased guest card 551 is moved to the card storage section 816 (S3645).
The card processing unit 807 carries out a process of retracting the guest card 551 into the card storage 816, so that another member card 550 or another guest card 551 can be inserted into the card insertion/ejection port 811 (S3646). For example, a case where the membership card 550 is rewritten will be described. If the accepted guest card 551 stores 10,000 yen as the balance, the card processing unit 807, which has become able to accept the card, transfers the amount of 10,000 yen, which is the amount temporarily stored in the RAM 853 and HDD 855, to the membership card. It is added to 550 (S3647).
In addition to the amount, the number of balls counted by the counting unit 805 stored in the guest card 551 is also added.
As described above, the guest card 551 is automatically erased and stored in the card storage unit 816, and can be used to store the next guest card 551. Therefore, the employee MS replenishes the guest card 551. There is no need to do so, and since money is automatically rewritten on the member card 550 and other guest cards 551, workability is improved.

Next, the card processing unit 807 transmits the ID of the membership card 550, the added amount of money, the date and time of processing, and the information on the balls, if any, to the hall computer 90 (S3648). The hall computer 90 stores the ID of the membership card 550, the amount of money added, the processing date and time, and the information on the balls, if any, for business management and to avoid troubles with players (S3649).
As described above, the player M can rewrite the money while staying on the spot, and the game parlor can build a system that does not cause trouble with the player while improving the security. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 284, the guest card 551 is ejected with the money remaining, and the guest card balance face authentication processing is performed to rewrite the inserted amount at the ball lending machine PT of another game machine. (S3670) will be described.
The basic processing uses S3620 to S3661 described above. The guest card balance face authentication process (S3670) is a process for writing data into the IC chip 507 of the ejected guest card 551 at the time of ejection so as to enable face authentication in another ball lending machine PT.
First, when the guest card 551 is to be ejected (YES in S3671), in order to prevent the guest card 551 from being stolen, each camera determination process is started (S3650) to prepare for ejection of the guest card. Next, if there is a balance (YES in S3672), the card processing unit 807 extracts data on the recording date and time of the most recent banknote insertion from the individual face authentication server 820 (S3674). The card processing unit 807 records in the guest card 551 the ID of each camera 69 that captures the image or the ID that manages the recorded data, the date and time of recording, the remaining money, and the number of balls acquired if any.

If there is no balance and only balls on hand (YES in S3673), the card processing unit 807 extracts data on the recording date and time when the balls on hand were counted from the individual face authentication server 820 (S3676). The card processing unit 807 records in the guest card 551 the ID of each camera 69 that captures the image or the ID that manages the recorded data, the date and time of recording, and the number of balls acquired.

Next, the individual face authentication server 820 extracts the recorded data of the date and time stored in the guest card 551 from a predetermined time ago, for example, one minute ago (S3678). This process is for reducing the storage capacity of the recorded data to be saved as much as possible. The extracted recorded data is either associated with the ID of the guest card 551 and stored in the individual face authentication server 820 (S3679), or is stored in the face authentication server 80 in consideration of centralized management or communication (S3679). ) is fine. In this way, the face authentication server 80 may collectively manage.
Since the guest card 551 stores only the recording date and time without including the recording data, the process when the card is ejected is expedited. After that, a face authentication collation request is transmitted to the individual face authentication server 80 (S3680), and if it is determined that the faces match (YES in S3681), the person who has put in the money and the holder of the guest card 551 with the balance. are the same, the guest card 551 is ejected (S3682). This processing can prevent the guest card 551 from being stolen. Also, considering that the player M uses all the money, it is not necessary to perform useless processing by storing data in the guest card 551 (S3671 to S3682) when the guest card 551 is ejected.

By recording the camera ID and recording date and time in the guest card 551 in this manner, the above-described processes (S3620 to S3661) can be used. If the camera ID is described when extracting recorded data in the process of S3653, the individual face authentication server 820 extracts face image data from the recording date and time data by that camera ID, and extracts the face image data and the current data. It is sufficient to perform the process of matching with the captured face. Since it is possible to quickly rewrite the remaining money in the ball lending machine PT to which the player has moved, the player M is not kept waiting for rewriting the remaining money.

Although the above-described member card 550 or guest card 551 has been described as a card with an IC chip mounted thereon, it may be a coin-type medium instead of a card-type medium. Moreover, it may be used not only for rewriting money between guest cards and member cards, but also for rewriting money between guest cards.

(Management system for storage means for game media installed in game halls)
The configuration of the ball box management system 950 will be described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 295 using the system shown in FIG. FIG. 285 is an explanatory diagram showing the layout of the equipment installed in the game hall and the radio wave intensity of the game hall system. FIG. 286 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged part of the layout of the equipment installed in the game hall of the game hall system. FIG. 287 is a table showing the relationship between the radio wave intensity and the distance of the game arcade system. FIG. 288 is a perspective view showing the ball box 955 of the game arcade system and the ball box placing table 952 incorporating the function of charging the ball box 955 . FIG. 289 is a perspective view showing the ball box 955 of the game arcade system. FIG. 290 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which pachinko balls are transferred from the ball box of the game arcade system. FIG. 291 is a schematic diagram showing the state of the ball box 955 when pachinko balls are transferred from the ball box 955A of the game arcade system. FIG. 292 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ball box 955B of the game arcade system. FIG. 293 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ball box 955A of the game arcade system. FIG. 294 is a list of data used in the ball box management system 950 of the game arcade system. FIG. 295 is a chart showing the contents of detection of the state of the ball box 955 of the game arcade system.

The ball box management system 950 is controlled by the hall computer 90, and may be managed and controlled by a computer system including a CPU, ROM, RAM, and storage device, not limited to the hall computer 90. The ball box management system 950 is mainly composed of the hall computer 90 , the ball box 955 , the transmitting/receiving device 94 which is a wireless network, and the monitoring camera system 60 .

In the layout shown in FIG. 285, when playing a pachinko machine P, the unit price of a pachinko ball Q to be rented out is 4 yen, and the area (HA) is a 4-yen corner as a high unit price corner where the game can be played. are also divided into low unit price (for example, 1 yen) corner areas (LA). In the low unit price corner (LA), the unit price per pachinko ball may be 2 yen, 1 yen, 0.5 yen, or the like.
In this embodiment, a pachinko machine P using pachinko balls Q as game media is described as an example, but the present invention may be applied to a slot machine S using medals as game media. In that case, the unit price of one medal may be 20 yen in the area of the high unit price corner, and the unit price of one medal in the low unit price area may be 10 yen, 5 yen, or the like.

As shown in FIG. 285, the ball box 955 is capable of wireless communication with the transmitting/receiving device 94 provided at the island end of the island facility HS1. In this wireless communication, the ball box 955 conveys data to the transmitting/receiving device 94 by means of a communication module 974 equipped with a wireless communication standard represented by Bluetooth (registered trademark), for example. The radio communication adopts Class 1 with an output of 100 mW and a reach of about 100 m. As shown in FIG. The distance of the transmitting/receiving device 94 is shown. This table makes it possible to specify the distance between the receiving device 94 and the ball box 955 .
In particular, as will be described later, the master side (MA) can obtain the radio wave intensity and ID address of the slave (SL) without performing pairing. Therefore, the position of the ball box 955 can be identified from the ID address of the ball box 955 and the radio wave intensity.

The transmitting/receiving device 94 in the upper left part of FIG. 285 shows five radio wave areas (WA1-1 to WA5-1) for receiving in units of 3 m. Five radio wave areas (WA1-2 to WA5-2) are shown for the transmitting/receiving device 94 in the upper right for receiving in units of 3 m. The transmitting/receiving device 94 in the lower left shows 5 radio wave areas (WA1-3 to WA5-3) for receiving in units of 3 m. The transmitting/receiving device 94 in the lower right shows five radio wave areas (WA1-4 to WA5-4) for receiving in units of 3 m. These five areas are provided as area codes at locations that are divided in a circular range of 3 m from each transmitting/receiving device 94 according to radio wave intensity, and each transmitting/receiving device 94 provides an area code.
As shown in FIG. 285, four transceivers 94 are provided for nine island facilities at four corners of the entire game hall, so that radio wave reception areas overlap. , thereby making it possible to specify the position of the ball box 955 within a range of 3 m.

A surveillance camera 61 connected to a surveillance camera system 60 is arranged in each passage of the island facility HS. Each surveillance camera 61 is given an identification number (CH1 to CH20) of the surveillance camera 61 so that each surveillance camera 61 can be identified.

FIG. 286 shows an enlarged view of a portion of the layout shown in FIG. The ball box 955B used in the high-unit-price corner adopts Class 3, which is used for short-distance communication from 0.5 m to 1 m by a short-distance communication module 975, which will be described later, in addition to position measurement. This makes it possible to detect the approach of a ball box 955 used in corners with other unit prices. When the player M1 brings the ball box 955B for the rental unit price of 4 yen to a corner where the rental unit price of the pachinko balls Q used in the pachinko machine P is 1 yen, which is a prohibited area, the ball box 955B has a value of 0. Pairing is performed with the ball box 955A for the rental unit price of 1 yen, which is in the radio wave area (WB1-1 to WB1-6) within the range of 5m to 1m, and communication is possible.

Next, the configuration of the ball box 955 and the ball box mounting base 952 will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 293. FIG.
The ball box 955 includes a ball box 955A for a lending unit price of 1 yen and a ball box 955B for a lending unit price of 4 yen. As shown in FIG. 289, the ball box 955 is shaped like a box that can accommodate pachinko balls Q and is open at the top, and has handles extending from both ends. As shown in FIG. 288, the ball box 955 can be stored by stacking boxes with their lower storage portions stacked. Ball box 955 has a control module 954 embedded in one end as shown in FIG.
A warning LED 972 and a speaker 971 are provided around the upper end of the ball box 955 . The LED 972 employs a full-color LED, and the blinking cycle and color can be changed. Also, the speaker 971 is capable of outputting warning sounds, voices, and the like. In the ball box 955, when another corner ball box 955 approaches or a game medium is transferred, the alarm colors and tones of the ball boxes 955 are made to be the same, and the color and sound are synchronized. are made the same and paired for notification, it is possible to inform which ball boxes 955 are approaching each other or which game media have been transferred to each other.

The control module 954 has positive and negative charging terminals 956 at its tip. As shown in FIG. 288, the charging terminal 956 receives DC 5V or DC 12V from a rail distribution line 953 provided at the center of the columnar charging column 952 of the ball box table 952 . A power supply, a power supply control board, and the like are provided on the ball box placing table 952 . In addition, the transmitting/receiving device 94 may be provided on the charging pole 952 or the ball box placing table 952 .

The ball box 955A incorporates a control module 954 as shown in FIG. It has a storage unit 977, an arithmetic processing unit 976, a position measurement communication module (SL) 974 serving as a slave, and a short distance communication module (SL) 975 serving as a slave. The control module 954 stores electric power received from the rail distribution line 953 in a built-in rechargeable battery 981 . Also, the ball box 955A has a sensor section 973 connected to the control section 978 embedded in the bottom. The sensor unit 973 includes an angular velocity sensor 983 for detecting the inclination of the ball box 955A and an acceleration sensor 982 for detecting movement of the ball box 955A and vibration due to the insertion of pachinko balls Q. Also, the control unit 978 is connected to the LED 972 and the speaker 971 described above.

The ball box 955B incorporates a control module 954 as shown in FIG. It has a storage unit 977, an arithmetic processing unit 976, a position measurement communication module (SL) 974 serving as a slave, and a short-range communication module (MA) 975 serving as a master. The control module 954 stores electric power received from the rail distribution line 953 in a built-in rechargeable battery 981 . Also, the ball box 955B has a sensor section 973 connected to the control section 978 embedded in the bottom. The sensor unit 973 includes an angular velocity sensor 983 for detecting the inclination of the ball box 955A and an acceleration sensor 982 for detecting movement of the ball box 955B and vibration due to the insertion of pachinko balls Q. Also, the control unit 978 is connected to the LED 972 and the speaker 971 described above.

As shown in FIG. 295, the controller 978 determines whether the ball is thrown or moved from the numerical values of the acceleration sensor 982 by means of the arithmetic processor 976 .
As shown in FIG. 289, the acceleration sensor 982 employs a three-axis sensor with X, Y, and Z axes. different.
For example, the table in FIG. 295(A) shows the feature amount of each phenomenon. In the case of ball-throwing detection, X (value) and Y (value) are each minute values as shown in the graph of FIG. It continues as long as it is thrown into the ball box 955 .
Next, in the case of movement by walking, X (value) and Y (value) appear small and cyclically along with the number of steps as shown in the graph of FIG. , the vibration of landing appears large as Z (value). In addition, since the cycle for the distance walked continues for a long time and the function of a pedometer is also possible, it is possible to calculate the distance traveled by calculating the stride length.
As described above, the ball box 955 can detect the tilt of the ball box 955, detect the movement of the ball box, and detect the insertion of the ball box.

<Control of ball box management system>
Next, control of the ball box management system 950 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 296 is a sequence diagram showing control of the ball box management system 950 of the game arcade system. FIG. 297 is a flow chart showing the ball box management control process (S3690) of the game arcade system. FIG. 298 is a flow chart showing the ball box monitoring control process (S3710) of the game arcade system.

As shown in FIGS. 285 and 286, the case where the player M1 moves the pachinko balls Q acquired at the 1-yen corner to the ball box 955B for the 4-yen lending unit and plays at the 4-yen corner. .
The player M1 plays a game with the pachinko machine P302 series of the island facility HS3 with a rent unit price of 1 yen corner, and when he wins the pachinko ball Q, the sensor part 973 of the ball box 955A as shown in FIG. 296 and FIG. Acceleration sensor 982 detects vibration (S37711), and turns on position measurement communication module 974 (SL) and short-distance communication module 975 (SL) of ball box 955A (S3712). However, if there is no detection or communication connection (pairing) by the sensor unit 973 for a predetermined time (approximately 20 minutes), both communication modules 974 and 975 are turned off in order to reduce power consumption.

After that, the player M1 moves from the 4-yen corner with the ball box 955B. When the acceleration sensor 982 detects the movement of the ball box 955B (S3711), the communication modules 974 and 973 are turned on (S3712). An ID address (4S0001), which is an identification number, is received (S3691). Then, the transmitting/receiving device 94 detects the received ID address (4S0001) and radio wave intensity (-65 dBm) as shown in FIG. 294(A) (S3692).
As shown in FIG. 294(B), the transmitting/receiving device 94 transmits the area code (WA2-1), the ID address (4S0001), and the master code, which is the identification number of the transmitting/receiving device 94, to the ball box management system 950. (MA0001) is transmitted (S3693).

The ball box management system 950 receives area codes (WA2-1, WA5-3), ID addresses (4S0001) and master codes (MA0001, MA0003) from a plurality of transmission/reception devices 94 as shown in FIG. , the position of the ball box 955B (ID address (4S0001)) is detected (S3694), and the position of the ball box 955B owned by the player M1 is specified. At that time, the moving distance of the ball box 955B can be calculated from the number of steps, and it can be used as a correction function to specify the position. is.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 285 and 286, player M1 has brought a 4-yen ball box 955B into the 1-yen corner area, which is originally prohibited from being brought in, so the ball box management system 950 is prohibited. Intrusion into the area is confirmed (S3696), and if entry into the prohibited area of the ball box 955B is confirmed (YES in S3696), communication connection (pairing) between the ball box 955B and the transmitting/receiving device 94 is permitted. (S3697). At the same time, the ball box management system 950 provides the monitoring camera system 60 with the position information of the camera that is most suitable for monitoring by the monitoring camera 61 or each camera 69 specified by the ball box management system 950 as shown in FIG. 294(C). The identification number (CH3) and the location information of the calculated virtual location (302 series) are transmitted (S3707).

Due to the communication connection, the ball box 955B causes the LED 972 to emit light to prompt a warning (S3715). At the same time, since the ball box 955B is emitting light, the surveillance camera 61 or each camera 69 can easily confirm the object to be monitored, automatically confirm the ball box 955B by image recognition (S3698), and can track it. There is (S3699). Here, in the monitoring camera system 60, images captured by the monitoring camera 61 or each camera 61 are recorded as needed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 294(D), 1S050 represents the ID address of the ball box 995A owned by the player M1, and since the area codes (WA2-1, WA5-3) are the same, the ball box 955A It is found that the ball box 955B is approaching within a range of 3 m, and the ball box management system 950 can confirm the approach of the ball box 955A and the ball box 955B (S3701). In addition, as the ball box 955A and the ball box 955B approach (YES in S3716), the short-range communication module 975 (MA) enters the radio wave reception area of 0.5 m to 1 m. Communication connection (pairing) with the module 975 (SL) is started (S3717).

Then, the nearby ball box 955A is also caused to emit light as a result of the communication connection (pairing) (S3718). As a result, it becomes easier to confirm with the monitor camera 61, and it is possible to notify the employee MS. Further, it is possible to confirm even afterward whether the pachinko balls Q have been moved from which ball box 955A to which ball box 955B. In addition, since the ball box 955B can obtain information through communication from the ball box 955A, it is possible to obtain information on the tilt and vibration of the ball box 955A and use it for monitoring the ball box 955. . In addition, it is possible to make the same synchronization, selection of colors and tone colors for issuing alarms from the ball boxes 955 (955A and 955B).

Next, when the player M1 tilts the ball box 955A to move the pachinko ball Q to the ball box 955B, the angular velocity sensor 983 detects the tilt of the ball box 955A (YES in S3719). The ball box 955A transmits a tilt detection signal to the transmitting/receiving device 94 via the master ball box 955B (S3721). When the ball box management system 950 receives the detection of the inclination of the ball box 955A (S3702), the monitoring camera system 60 stores and saves information such as the imaging time of the monitoring camera 61 and the identification number of the monitoring camera 61. . And provision is made so that the employee MS can be prepared for later verification.

When the acceleration sensor 982 of the ball box 955B detects the vibration when the pachinko balls Q are thrown in (YES in S3722), the ball box 955B transmits an alarm command to the ball box 955A and the ball boxes 955A and 955B. emits a warning sound from the speaker 971 as an alarm (S3723). Thus, by detecting the state in which the pachinko balls Q have been transferred to another ball box 955 and issuing a warning, it is possible to reliably detect the state in which the pachinko balls Q have been transferred without fear of malfunction. Therefore, troubles between the player M1 and the employee MS are reduced. In addition, since the relocated ball box 955B in the 4-yen corner is also notified to the outside by the alarm of the LED 972 and the speaker 971, the employee MS refrains from counting the pachinko balls Q with the counter JC, and the store side suffers damage. never.

The light emission and warning of the ball box 955A and the ball box 955B prevent the player M1 from making mistakes and prevent the player M1 from playing illegal games. Also, even if the player M1 uses it as it is, the employee MS can be immediately confirmed by the light emitted from the ball box 955 . In addition, since the monitor camera 61 captures the whole process from bringing the ball box 955B into the prohibited area to moving the pachinko balls Q to the ball box 955B, the player M1 cannot escape. becomes. Therefore, the employee MS rarely gets into trouble with the player M1.

The ball box 955 that emits light and alarm sound does not stop unless it is canceled by the ball box management system 950 (YES in S3724, YES in S3704). The ball box management system 950 transmits a release signal to the transmission/reception device 94 (S3705), and the ball boxes 955A and 955B that have received the release signal from the transmission/reception device 94 or the ball box 955B stop emitting light and warning sounds ( S3725).

(Information display device and game information management system installed in the game hall)
1, 2, 67 and 299 to 313, the machine information display device K installed in the game hall and the game hall information management system 1050 will be described. In addition, the display of the mode shown below will be explained by taking the liquid crystal display screen 891 of the liquid crystal display unit 610 displayed on the machine information display device Kd as an example, but the liquid crystal display of the machine information display devices K, Ka, Kb, etc. described above will be explained. It can be applied to the display screen 891 . Further, the embodiments described below can be applied not only to liquid crystal display but also to 7-segment display and LED dot display.

<Collection of game information to be displayed on machine information display device>
1, 2, 67, 299 and 300, a configuration for collecting game information will be described for the configuration for collecting game information to be displayed on the machine information display device K (Ka, Kb, Kd). .
FIG. 299 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a game parlor information management system for collecting game information to be displayed on the machine information display device Kd. FIG. 300 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display mode correspondence table 1037 showing an example of the correspondence relationship between the display mode displayed on the machine information display device Kd and the model type of the gaming machine.

The information displayed on the machine information display device K (Kd) is the game information obtained directly from the game machine, the game information provided by the game machine maker, etc., and the advertising information for advertising obtained from nearby cooperating stores, etc. It is roughly classified into three types of information. Of these, game information obtained from a game machine such as a pachinko machine P is output in the form of a signal such as a pulse signal from an information terminal board I, which will be described later, as shown in FIGS. The output signal is converted by the platform computer 93 into data suitable for the platform information display device K (Kd) and sent to the platform information display device K (Kd).
Various signals as game information obtained are stored in the hall computer 90 via the platform computer 93 and the island computer 91 . The hall computer 90 collects and processes various signals in order to obtain business information regarding games. At the same time, the machine information display device K (Kd) processes information to be displayed to the player M from the signal obtained from the game machine and displays it on the liquid crystal display screen 891 .
The signal obtained from the game machine may be transmitted directly from the information terminal board I of the game machine to the machine information display device K (Kd) without going through the machine computer 93. ) to the hall computer 90 via the island computer 91, a signal obtained from the gaming machine may be transmitted.

As shown in FIG. 299, the game hall information management system 1050 accumulates not only the information of the game machines in the game hall but also the information of the game machines and cooperating shops from the outside in the external information management server 1051 via the Internet or the like. do. As for the information about the gaming machine from the outside, especially the game information of the pachinko machine P and the slot machine S from the gaming machine maker is collected in the external information management server 1051 . For example, as shown in FIG. 300, the game information includes wiring information output from information terminal boards I of the pachinko machine P and the slot machine S for connecting to the machine information display device K (Kd) or the machine computer 93, and pachinko machine information. There is spec information of machine P and slot machine S. In addition, the game hall information management system 1050 collects display material information to be displayed on the machine information display device K (Kd) from game machine manufacturers. In addition to the information related to games, the game hall information management system 1050 collects information on the content of advertisements for advertisements from cooperating stores to the external information management server 1051 .

The wiring information shown in FIG. 300 indicates the layout of the information terminal board I and the color of the wiring connected to the information terminal board I. FIG. The wiring information indicates the type of signal output from the information terminal board I connected by the wiring color. For example, "red" in model "CROOZ" indicates "start wiring". The signal of "start wiring" is a start signal output when the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is decided when expressed by the signal output from the information terminal board I of the pachinko machine P. This wiring information may differ depending on the gaming machine manufacturer or the gaming machine model, and it is necessary to obtain this wiring information for each model when replacing a new machine or moving within the gaming arcade. By displaying the wiring information on the liquid crystal display screen 891, the machine information display device Kd can connect the pachinko machine P and the machine information display device Kd while viewing the wiring information when changing the machines. work can be done, and wiring or polarity errors can be prevented. Only in the case of turning off the power supply of the platform information display device Kd and connecting the wires, it is preferable to display on the liquid crystal display screen 891 of the platform information display device Kd on the opposite side or the neighboring platform information display devices Kd on both sides. . The base information display device Kd may display the position of the terminal board, the type of the signal line, the wiring color, the type of the signal line, the polarity of the wiring, and the like on the liquid crystal display screen 891 .

The pachinko machine P and the slot machine S are representative examples of the spec information of the gaming machine, and the pachinko machine P and the slot machine S each have various specs. For example, the pachinko machine P shown in FIG. 67 is a so-called "probability variable" type in which the probability varies at a predetermined rate after the big win. This pachinko machine P is in a so-called ``continuous small winning prize'' state in which the special pattern 2 changes in a short period of time when the special pattern 2 starting port 304 is won after the big win, and the probability of the small winning is improved. Become.
In this state of "small winning consecutive winning", the small winning attacker 303 is frequently released, and the number of winnings increases, so the number of balls to be obtained increases. In this state of "small winning consecutive prizes", the number of balls produced per winning is small, but the number of balls produced may increase due to frequent winning. There are various types of pachinko machines P, such as a type in which small wins continue until a big win, and a type in which the probability of small wins changes.

Moreover, the special design 306 shown in FIG. 67 displays the variation of the special design 1 and the special design 2 on the special design LED indicator 305 by lighting of the LED. The special pattern 306 has a special pattern 1 and a special pattern 2, which correspond according to the position of the winning starter. The special symbol 1 varies depending on the winning of the pachinko ball Q to the special symbol 1 starting port 309, and the special symbol 2 varies depending on the winning of the pachinko ball Q to the special symbol 2 starting port 304.例文帳に追加

The spec information of one model is, for example, "number of prize balls" = "4 & 1 & 6 & 8 &14","number of rounds" = "6OR16R", "number of counts" = "9C", "normal jackpot probability" = "1/319", " Probability variation (hereinafter referred to as “probability variation”) jackpot probability” = “1/114”, “probability variation inrush rate” = “navel (special pattern 1 start port 309): 54%, electric chew (special pattern 2 start port start port 304) 83% (ST 168 rotations)”, “time saving” = “100 times OR 168 times”, and “average ball output” = “6R: about 702 pieces”, “16R:”, and the like.
Since this spec information is published on the Internet by each game machine manufacturer, the game information display management computer 1055 automatically or manually collects this information in the external information management server 1051 .

In addition, the spec information of the gaming machine shown in FIG. ” type “ST 100 times”, model “CR ○○ XX” indicates “probability change” type “ST 25 times” and “short time 55 times”, model “CR △ △ ○○” is “V "Winner" type "time reduction 15 times" and "time reduction 25 times" are shown.

Also, the display material information is graphic materials such as characters and patterns related to the gaming machine that are stored in JPEG format or BMP format and used when displayed on the machine information display device Kd. In addition, as for the display material information, each gaming machine maker publishes a flow chart of how to play the game in BMP format or JPEG format on the Internet. are collected in the external information management server 1051 .
Furthermore, the advertising content information is advertising information for displaying the products and services sold by cooperating stores on the table information display device Kd or POP in the store for a fee or free of charge.

The game parlor information management system 1050 that collects and manages the above-described information mainly comprises a hall computer 90, a table information display device Kd, and a game information display management computer 1055, as shown in FIG. The hall computer 90 includes a server equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM and hard disk, a computer equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM and hard disk, and a monitor in the management area 2 (FIG. 1).

In addition, the machine information display device K (Kd) has a liquid crystal display screen 891 for providing information to the player M on its surface inside the housing. Furthermore, the game information display management computer 1055 includes an external information management server 1051 equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM and hard disk, a computer 1052 equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM and hard disk, and a monitor 1053 in the management area 2 (FIG. 1). I have it. The game information display management computer 1055 manages spec information, wiring information, and advertisement content information collected automatically or manually in the management area 2 (FIG. 1).

<Selection processing of contents to be displayed on the table information display device>
Next, referring to FIGS. 300 to 302, the processing for selecting the contents to be displayed on the machine information display device K (Kd) will be described. FIG. 301 is a flow chart showing the display mode switching process (S3750). FIG. 302 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display content list table 1035 showing display modes and display content on the machine information display device K (Kd).
The game information display management computer 1055 selects the contents to be displayed on the machine information display device K (Kd) from the spec information which is the characteristic of the game machine by the display mode switching process (S3750) shown in FIG. It is determined from the content list 1035 . The display mode is switched mainly when the gaming machine is replaced or when the gaming machine is moved within the store.

The display mode switching process (S3750) will be described with reference to FIG. First, the game information display management computer 1055 judges whether it is the pachinko machine P or the slot machine S (S3750). If the game information display management computer 1055 is the slot machine S (NO in S3751), it determines whether it is in the ART format (S3753). If the game information display management computer 1055 is in the ART format (YES in S3753), the game information display management computer 1055 determines that the mode to be displayed on the machine information display device K (Kd) is "SB mode" (S3754). If it is not the ART format (NO in S3753), the game information display management computer 1055 determines the mode to be displayed on the machine information display device K (Kd) as "SA mode" because it is the normal type (S3755).

Next, if the game information display management computer 1055 is the pachinko machine P (YES in S3751), it determines whether it is a so-called ST type in which the variable probability or the reduction in working hours are terminated by a specified number of times (S3752).
If the game information display management computer 1055 is a so-called ST type (YES in S3752), which will be described later, the effect pattern 308 (Fig. 67, Fig. 314) continue the performance without stopping and the special pattern 306 (Fig. 67) of the special pattern LED indicator 305 (Fig. 67) stops. (S3757). If the game information display management computer 1055 is a pachinko machine P of a type that stops special symbols during presentation (YES in S3757), the game information display management computer 1055 determines the mode to be displayed on the machine information display device K (Kd) as "PSA mode". (S3761).
The game information display management computer 1055 determines that the mode to be displayed on the machine information display device K (Kd) is the "PSB mode" if the pachinko machine P is not of the type in which special symbols are stopped during presentation (NO in S3757). (S3762).

In addition, if the game information display management computer 1055 is not the so-called ST type, the probability variation continues until the next big hit without a specified number of times. It is determined whether or not there is a certain type (S3756). If the game information display management computer 1055 is of the type with a small hit during probability variation (YES in S3756), the mode to be displayed on the table information display device K (Kd) is determined as "PKR mode" (S3759).
The game information display management computer 1055 determines the mode to be displayed on the machine information display device K (Kd) as "PKA mode" if it is not the type with a small hit during probability variation (NO in S3756) (S3758).

Next, with reference to the display content list 1035 in FIG. 302, each mode and the content displayed on the machine information display device K (Kd) will be described. The display content list 1035 shows the display content to be displayed on the machine information display device K (Kd) in horizontal columns, and is divided vertically into the pachinko machine P and the slot machine S, and the content displayed in each mode is indicated by " ○”.

In the "PKA mode" and "PSB mode", the machine information display device K (Kd) displays "jackpot count", "start count", "acquisition count", "probability variable count" and "jackpot history".
"PKR mode" displays "big win count", "start count", "minor win count", "acquisition count", "ball output speed", "probability variable count" and "jack hit history" on the machine information display device K (Kd). ” is displayed.
The "PSA mode" displays "jackpot count", "start count", "acquisition count", "probability variable count", "start count non-display" and "jackpot history" on the machine information display device K (Kd).

In the "SA mode", the machine information display device K (Kd) displays the "big win count", "start count", "acquisition count", "BIG count", "REG count" and "jack hit history".
"SB mode" displays "jackpot count", "start count", "acquisition count", "BIG count", "REG count", "ART count" and "jackpot history" on the machine information display device K (Kd). indicate.
The display mode correspondence table 1037 and display content list 1035 displayed in FIG. 300 are managed by the game information display management computer 1055 . The machine information display device K (Kd) stores the same settings as the display content list table 1035, and each mode can be switched by operating the game information display management computer 1055 and the machine information display device K (Kd). is. The game hall information management system 1050 can change the contents displayed on the machine information display device K (Kd) by switching between these modes.

<<Display processing for displaying information of pachinko machines with consecutive small hits on the machine information display device>>
303 to 308, the processing and display contents for displaying information about the pachinko machine Pa on the machine information display device K (Kd) will be described. FIG. 303 is a schematic diagram showing an example of gaming machine information signals output from the information terminal board I of the gaming machine. FIG. 304 is a time chart showing signal processing of gaming machine information in the machine information display device K (Kd). FIG. 305 is a flow chart showing a ball payout speed display control process (S3730) for controlling the display of information on the ball payout speed on the machine information display device K (Kd). FIG. 306 is a flow chart showing a ball payout speed display process (S3740) for controlling the display of information on the ball payout speed on the machine information display device K (Kd). FIG. 307 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mode displayed on the table information display device K (Kd). FIG. 308 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mode displayed on the machine information display device K (Kd).

The pachinko machine Pa shown in FIG. 303 has a spec that the probability variation continues until the next big win at a rate of 65%, and the above-mentioned "small win continuous winning" is mounted on the main substrate (not shown). "Small hit continuous winning" is a so-called probability variable state in which the probability of a big hit improves at the time of judging a big hit, and a high probability state in which the probability of a small hit improves at a predetermined rate at the time of judging a big hit. It is a "small hit consecutive prize". In the 'continuous small winning prize', since the probability of small winning is maintained at a high probability until the next big winning, the small winning continues and the number of pachinko balls Q obtained increases until the big winning.

This pachinko machine Pa maintains a state of high probability of small win without fail during the variable probability, in addition to the case of the above-mentioned "continuous small win", and when it continues until the next big win, the probability of small win is maintained. Not only when the is improved in a plurality of stages, but also when judging a big win, if a small win is won, the high probability of the small win may be maintained until the next big win.
The display mode displayed by the machine information display device K (Kd) determined from the specifications of the pachinko machine Pa becomes the "PKR mode" when the display mode is determined by the processing of FIGS. The machine information display device K (Kd) displays ``number of big wins'', ``number of starts'', ``number of small wins'', ``number of wins'', ``ball output speed'', ``probability variable times'' and ``history of big wins''.

Further, the main signals output from the information terminal board I provided on the back frame 305 of the pachinko machine Pa and input to the machine information display device K (Kd) are the special prize 1 signal 1011, the special prize in progress signal 1012, and the prize ball payout. There are a signal 1013, a start signal 1014, a special prize 2 signal 1015, and a special symbol 2 start-up winning signal 1016.
The special prize 1 signal 1011 is a signal for outputting a big win and a small win of the pachinko machine Pa. The special prize signal 1012 is a signal that is continuously output between a big win, a small win and a variable probability. The prize ball payout signal 1013 is a signal that outputs one pulse in units of 10 won payouts. The start signal 1014 is a signal that outputs 1 pal when the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 stop. The special prize 2 signal 1015 is a signal that is output when the small winning attacker 303 wins.

The special symbol 2 start opening winning signal 1016 is a signal output when the special symbol 2 starting opening 304 (FIG. 67) is won. The out signal 1017 counts the number of balls fired by the pachinko machine Pa and indicates a state in which the pachinko machine Pa is in operation. The out signal 1017 obtains information from the island equipment HS, but if there is no out ball signal 1017 and prize balls are dispensed, it is possible that troubles such as goto have occurred, and it is necessary to take immediate action. be. Further, the machine information display device K (Kd) may display the following information on the liquid crystal display screen 891 as one of the services for the player M only during operation depending on the presence or absence of the out-ball signal.

304 to 306 show the display control processing (S3730) for judging based on various signals input by the table information display device K (Kd) and displaying the "ball output speed" on the liquid crystal display screen 891. showing. As shown in FIG. 305, first, the machine information display device K(Kd) determines whether or not the special award signal 1012 is input to the machine information display device K(Kd) (S3731). As shown in FIG. 304, the pachinko machine Pa continuously outputs a special prize signal 1012 to the machine information display device K (Kd) during a special prize such as a big win, a variable probability, or a short time. The machine information display device K (Kd) determines that a special prize is being awarded when the special prize signal 1012 is turned ON (tr4).

Next, if the special prize is in progress (YES in S3731), the machine information display device K (Kd) determines whether or not the jackpot has ended from the output of the special prize 1 signal 1012 input to the machine information display device K (Kd). It judges (S3732). As shown in FIG. 304, the pachinko machine Pa continuously outputs a special prize 1 signal 1011 to the machine information display device K (Kd) when a big win or a small win is in progress. When the pachinko machine Pa hits the jackpot, it continuously outputs the special prize 1 signal 1011, and then turns off the signal after the jackpot ends. Then, the machine information display device K (Kd) judges that the jackpot has been completed when it becomes OFF (tr1). Further, the machine information display device K (Kd) makes the ball output speed display control process (S3730) stand by if the prize is not being awarded (NO in S3731).

Next, if the jackpot is completed (YES in S3732), the machine information display device K (Kd) is a special pattern from the output of the special pattern 2 starting opening winning signal 1016 input to the machine information display device K (Kd). 2 It is determined whether or not a pachinko ball has been won in the starting port 304 (Fig. 67) (S3733). As shown in FIG. 304, the pachinko machine Pa outputs 1 pulse to the machine information display device K (Kd) each time the special symbol 2 starting port 304 (FIG. 67) is won. The special symbol 2 starting port 304 (FIG. 67) of the pachinko machine Pa increases the probability of opening the electric chew if the probability is changing, and opens frequently. Then, the machine information display device K (Kd) judges that the special symbol 2 starting opening winning is in progress when the special symbol 2 starting opening winning signal 1016 becomes ON (tr2) (S3733). Further, the machine information display device K (Kd) waits the ball output speed display control process (S3730) if the jackpot is in progress (NO in S3732). In the machine information display device K (Kd), the fact that the special symbol 2 start opening winning signal 1016 is input based on the special symbol 2 start opening winning signal 1016 is also the trigger (tr2) of the start of the period in which the small hit continues. By doing so, it is possible to use it as an opportunity to accurately determine that the small winning has started while also serving as a countermeasure against goto.

Next, if the special symbol 2 starting port 304 is winning (YES in S3733), the machine information display device K (Kd) outputs the special prize 2 signal 1015 input to the machine information display device K (Kd). Then, it is determined whether or not a pachinko ball has been awarded to the small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) (S3734). As shown in FIG. 304, the pachinko machine Pa outputs one pulse to the machine information display device K (Kd) each time a small winning attacker 303 (FIG. 67) wins. As a result of winning the special pattern 2 starting port 304 (Fig. 67), the pachinko machine Pa releases the small hit attacker 303 (Fig. 67) if the small win is won, and the specified number of winning prizes is reached or Control is performed to close the small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) when the specified time is reached. Then, when the special prize 2 signal 1015 turns ON (tr3), the machine information display device K (Kd) determines that the small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) is winning (YES in S3734).

Next, if the small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) is winning (YES in S3734), the machine information display device K (Kd) starts counting the elapsed time 1019 by the built-in clock function (S3735). . Next, the machine information display device K (Kd) shifts to a ball output speed display process (S3740), which will be described later. Next, the machine information display device K (Kd) counts the number of pulses from the special prize 1 signal 1011 or the special prize 2 signal, and stores the counted value in the storage area as the number of small wins (S3736).
Then, the machine information display device K (Kd) continues the processing (S3734 to S3736) until the winning of the small winning attacker 303 (FIG. 67) and the continuation of the small winning ends (YES in S3737). The machine information display device K (Kd) is triggered by the special prize 2 signal 1015 OFF (tr5) (NO in S3734) and the special prize 1 signal OFF (tr6) (YES in S3737), the small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) It is judged that the winning of the prize is finished. It should be noted that it may be determined that the continuation of the small winning has ended only when the special prize 2 signal 1015 becomes OFF (tr5). However, by adding to the condition that the special prize 1 signal is turned OFF (tr6), the machine information display device K (Kd) can more accurately determine the end of the small win.

Next, the machine information display device K (Kd) starts the timer (T1) on the program from the clock function built in the CPU when the winning of the small hit attacker 303 (FIG. 67) is completed (NO in S3734). (S3738). When the predetermined time of the preset timer (T1) elapses (YES in S3739), the machine information display device K (Kd) stops the timer (T1), and the machine information display device K (Kd) stops the timer (T1). T1) is cleared (S3748), the elapsed time 1019 is calculated, and after storing the elapsed time 1019 in the storage area (S3749), the ball output speed display control process (S3730) is terminated.

The predetermined time of this timer (T1) is for measuring the timing at which the small win ends when measuring the elapsed time, and is set to about 1 minute to 2 minutes considering that the small win continuation is accidentally interrupted on the way. is desirable, and can be changed as appropriate depending on the characteristics of the pachinko machine Pa. These are effective not only for noise countermeasures but also for accidental small wins that do not continue, and can prevent erroneous processing.

Next, the ball output speed display processing (S3740) will be described with reference to FIGS. 306 to 308. FIG. The machine information display device K (Kd) activates the timer (T2) on the program from the clock function incorporated in the CPU (S3741). Machine information display device K (Kd) totalizes the number of prize balls in the storage area until a predetermined time of a preset timer (T2) elapses (NO in S3734) (S3742). The table information display device K (Kd) tallies the number of one pulse output from the prize ball payout signal 1013 as the number of prize balls. Then, when the timer (T2) has passed the predetermined time (YES in S3734), the machine information display device K (Kd) calculates the speed of the number of balls to be played based on the predetermined time and the total number of prize balls (S3745). ).

For example, as shown in FIG. 307, the machine information display device K (Kd) determines the interval at which "10800 balls per hour" is displayed in the payout speed display area 1028 using a timer (T2). For example, if the timer (T) is 10 seconds, the machine information display device K (Kd) displays the ball payout speed in the ball payout speed display area 1028 at intervals of 10 seconds. In addition, the machine information display device K (Kd) calculates the speed based on the time of the timer (T2) (S3746). For example, if there are 30 winning balls in 10 seconds, the speed per hour is 60 minutes x (60/10) seconds x 30 = 10800 balls per hour. Kd) displays "10800 balls per hour" in the ball output speed display area 1028 (S3746). Then, the machine information display device K (Kd) clears the timer (T2), stores the payout speed of 10800/hour in the storage area (S3747), and ends the payout speed display process (S3740).

An example of display on the liquid crystal display screen 891 when the machine information display device K (Kd) is in the "PKR mode" will be described with reference to FIGS. 307 and 308. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 307, the table information display device K (Kd) displays ball payout speed information on a liquid crystal display screen 891. As shown in FIG. The machine information display device K (Kd) has a small winning duration display area 1026 on the liquid crystal display screen 891 . The machine information display device K (Kd) is the elapsed time 1019 ("5 minutes") that is the continuous time ("5 minutes") of the small win from the big win calculated by the machine information display device K (Kd) to the next big win as described above. S3749) is shown in the small hit duration display area 1026. The machine information display device K (Kd) displays the time during which the small win continues, so that the player can know how long the small win has continued, and at the same time, the next time. It can be an indication to the player or other players as to how long the small win will last.

In addition, the machine information display device K (Kd) has an acquisition number display area 1027 on the liquid crystal display screen 891 . The winning number display area 1027 displays the number of balls ("900 balls") won during the small wins from the big win to the next big win (S3742).
In addition, the table information display device K (Kd) has a ball output speed display area 1028 on the liquid crystal display screen 891 . The ball output speed display area 1028 indicates the speed of the number of balls to be output (“10800 balls per hour”) during the small win from the big win to the next big win (S3746). The ball-out speed display area 1028 is updated at intervals of 10 seconds as described above to display the speed of the number of balls-out (S3746).

In this way, the display of the speed of the number of balls to be paid out conveys the sense of speed of the number of balls to the player M, and at the same time, allows the player M to grasp how much balls are expected to be paid out in consideration of the time. It can be used as an index. It should be noted that although the update is performed at intervals of 10 seconds, if the interval is made shorter, the player M will be able to feel the speed of the ball coming out in real time, and at the same time, the player M will be able to take the time into consideration. It can be used as an index for grasping how many balls are expected to be paid out.

In addition, the employee MS can estimate how much time will elapse after the speed of the number of balls that will need to be exchanged. Therefore, the speed of the number of balls to be played may be measured from the hall computer 90, and an instruction may be given from the intercom or the mobile terminal device 40 to allocate the capacity to the island facilities HS where the pachinko machines P with high speed are lined up. The hall computer 90 may collect information such as the number of small wins and the speed of the number of balls released from the table information display device K (Kd) to a server connected to the hall computer 90 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 307, there is a meter display 1021 modeled after a speedometer in addition to a ball-out speed display area 1028 for displaying the speed of the number of balls to be put out. The meter display 1021 has a scale portion 1023 displaying the number of balls (“10000”, “20000”) and a needle portion 1022 pointing to the scale portion 1023 corresponding to the number of the ball output speed. A meter display 1021 defines the limit value as 20,000 balls/hour (h), and shows how far the 10,080 balls/hour (h) is changing.

In addition, as another example of displaying the ball output speed, the ratio display 1024 indicates whether the ball output speed is high or low depending on how much the hatched area occupies the ratio of the occupied area 1025 extending on the straight line. are displayed so that the The percentage display 1024 defines the limit value as 20,000 balls/hour (h), and indicates at what rate the rate of 10,080 balls/hour (h) changes. By providing the meter display 1021 or the ratio display 1024 in this manner, the player M can intuitively distinguish whether the speed of ball output is high or low. In addition, even when the employee MS is busy, he/she can intuitively grasp the ball output speed, and can recognize at a glance how long the player M will need the ball box afterward.

Incidentally, the machine information display device K (Kd) may display the average speed of the number of balls released. The hall computer 90 can also display the ranking of the average speed of the number of balls released or the speed of the highest number of balls released, etc. on an information display device (not shown) installed on the edge or wall of the island facility HS. . Also, instead of the number of winning balls per unit time, the number of small wins per unit time may be used. can be used as an index for grasping how much ball is expected to be paid in consideration of time.

The machine information display device K (Kd) stores the number of times obtained from the special prize 1 signal 1011 or the special prize 2 signal 1015 in the storage area (S3748), and the number of times the small win continues from the big win to the next big win ("100 times”) is displayed in the small hit number display area 1029. Such display of the number of times conveys to the player M a sense of speed of the small win, and at the same time, it can be used as an index for the player M to grasp how much balls are expected to be paid out in consideration of the time. . In addition, by displaying the number of times of a special state due to continuous small wins to the player, it is possible to promote a feeling of anticipation for the small wins when the small wins become continuous.

As shown in FIG. 308, the machine information display device K (Kd) displays special prize history information on the liquid crystal display screen 891. FIG. The machine information display device K (Kd) displays a history 1031 of the number of starts up to a big win in the center of the liquid crystal display screen 891 in the form of a bar graph. The number of starts history 1031 shows the oldest history on the right side of the screen and the latest history on the left side. For example, the machine information display device K (Kd) displays "164" as the number of starts up to a big win above the number of starts history 1031 on the right end. In addition, the machine information display device K (Kd) displays the above-described meter display 1021 to the right of the history of the number of starts 1031, which shows a state in which small wins continue after a big win. Also, above the start count history 1031, the total number of starts “353 times” is shown.

In addition, the machine information display device K (Kd) indicates, by hatching, in the history 1031 of the number of times of starting the place where the big win was made. In particular, the number-of-starts history 1031 in which the total number of starts is "353" indicates that three big wins have been made by hatching. The other start number history 1031 indicates that the big hit ended in a single shot without drawing a probability change because there is no hatched portion. The hatched portions shown on the liquid crystal display screen 891 may actually be represented by different colors or the like.

In addition, the machine information display device K (Kd) has a jackpot number display area 1053, a start number display area 1034, and a probability variable number display area 1037 on the upper right of the liquid crystal display screen 891.
Since these three displays are information that the player M wants to know as information, they are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen 891 by enlarging display characters and the like so as to be easy to understand.

<<Display processing for displaying the information of the pachinko machine for which the determination of the jackpot is confirmed on the machine information display device during the production>>
309 to 314, the processing and display contents for displaying information about the pachinko machine Pb on the machine information display device K (Kd) will be described. FIG. 309 is a schematic diagram showing an example of gaming machine information signals output from the information terminal board I of the gaming machine. FIG. 310 is a time chart showing signal processing of gaming machine information in the machine information display device K(kd). FIG. 311 is a flow chart showing the number-of-starts non-display process for controlling the display of the machine information display device K(kd). FIG. 312 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mode displayed on the machine information display device K(kd). FIG. 313 is a number-of-starts display area display list table 1036 showing an example of contents displayed on the machine information display device K(kd). FIG. 314 is a schematic diagram showing the effect of the pachinko machine Pb and the mode of the special symbol 306 displayed on the special symbol LED display 305. FIG.

The pachinko machine Pb shown in FIG. 309 is equipped with a main board with a spec that increases the continuation rate called "V winning", which is a special state at a rate of 60% after the big win.
In this pachinko machine Pb, if the player hits to the right and wins the special symbol 2 starter 304 (FIG. 67), the probability of winning is higher than in normal times, so the probability of continuation is higher. However, the number of times the lottery of the special symbol 2 continues in a state of high probability is determined, and the specified number of times of the lottery of the special symbol 2 is often determined as 5 times, 10 times, or the like.

In addition, such a pachinko machine Pb displays an effect and an effect pattern 308 on a liquid crystal effect display screen 307 as shown in FIG. The effects of this pachinko machine Pb in the case of a big win and in the case of a loss are shown below. The pachinko machine Pb shows specifications when the specified number of special symbols 2 is set to 5 times.

When the pachinko machine Pb is out, first, the liquid crystal effect display screen 307a indicates that the effect symbol 308a is changing, and the special symbol LED display 305a indicates that the special symbol 2 (306a) is out for the second time. it's shown. Next, the liquid crystal effect display screen 307b shows that the effect symbol 308b is changing, and the special symbol LED display 305b displays that the special symbol 2 (306b) is out of the game for the third time. Also, the liquid crystal effect display screen 307c shows that the effect symbol 308c is changing, and the special symbol LED display 305c displays that the special symbol 2 (306a) is out for the fourth time. Then, the effect symbol 308d shows "384" on the liquid crystal effect display screen 307d, and the special symbol LED display 305d displays that the special symbol 2 (306a) is out of the specified number of times for the fifth time. In this way, in the pachinko machine Pb, the variation of the special symbol 2 is actually stopped. It is expressed by whether or not it was caught, and the predetermined number of times is indicated by one performance display. With such an effect representation, the player M can enjoy the effect with a sense of anticipation until the end.

When the pachinko machine Pb hits the jackpot, first, the liquid crystal effect display screen 307a indicates that the effect symbol 308a is changing, and the special symbol LED display 305e indicates that the special symbol 2 (306a) is missing for the second time. it's shown. Next, the liquid crystal effect display screen 307b shows that the effect symbol 308b is changing, and the special symbol LED display 305f displays a big win when the special symbol 2 (306c) is the third time. In addition, the liquid crystal effect display screen 307c shows that the effect pattern 308c is changing, and the special pattern LED display 305g maintains the state where the special pattern 2 (306c) is the third time and the big hit is displayed. ing. Then, the effect symbol 308d shows "333" on the liquid crystal effect display screen 307e, and the special symbol 2 (306c) is displaying the big win on the special symbol LED display 305h. In this way, in the pachinko machine Pb, the variation of the special symbol 2 is actually stopped, but the effect on the liquid crystal effect display screen 307d continues until the time when it is assumed that the specified number of times can be completed. , a big hit is expressed depending on whether or not a fish is caught, and the time equivalent to the prescribed number of times is indicated by one performance display. With such an effect representation, the player M can enjoy the effect with a sense of anticipation until the end.

The display mode displayed by the machine information display device K (Kd) determined from the specifications of the pachinko machine Pb is "PSA mode" when the display mode is determined by the processing of FIGS. The machine information display device K (Kd) displays ``number of jackpots'', ``number of starts'', ``number of wins'', ``variable probability'', ``non-display of number of starts'' and ``history of jackpots''.

The main signals output from the information terminal board I provided on the back frame 305 of the pachinko machine Pb and input to the machine information display device K (Kd) are the special prize 1 signal 1011, the special prize in progress signal 1012, and the prize ball payout signal. 1013 , a start signal 1014 and a grand prize 2 signal 1015 .
The special prize 1 signal 1011 is a signal that is continuously output during the jackpot of the pachinko machine Pa. The special prize signal 1012 is a signal that is continuously output between a big win, a small win and a variable probability. The prize ball payout signal 1013 is a signal that outputs one pulse in units of 10 won payouts. The start signal 1014 is a signal that outputs 1 pal when the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 stop. The special prize 2 signal 1015 is a signal that is output at the time of winning a prize to the small hit attacker 303 or a different attacker at the time of the big win in the case of use without a small hit.

310 to 314 show start times non-display processing (S3770) for making determinations based on various signals input by the machine information display device K (Kd) and hiding the "start times" on the liquid crystal display screen 891. showing. As shown in FIGS. 310 and 311, first, the machine information display device K(Kd) determines whether or not the special award signal 1012 is input to the machine information display device K(Kd) (S3771). As shown in FIG. 310, the pachinko machine Pa continuously outputs a special prize signal 1012 to the machine information display device K (Kd) during a special prize such as a big win, a variable probability, or a short time. The machine information display device K (Kd) judges that a special prize is in progress when the input of the special prize in progress signal 1012 is turned ON (tr7).

Next, if the special prize is in progress (YES in S3771), the machine information display device K (Kd) determines whether or not the jackpot has ended from the output of the special prize 1 signal 1012 input to the machine information display device K (Kd). It judges (S3772). As shown in FIG. 310, the pachinko machine Pa continuously outputs a special prize 1 signal 1011 to the machine information display device K (Kd) when a big win or a small win is in progress. When the pachinko machine Pa hits the jackpot, it continuously outputs the special prize 1 signal 1011, and then turns off the signal after the jackpot ends. Then, the machine information display device K (Kd) judges that the jackpot is finished when the turn is OFF (tr8, tr9).

Next, if the jackpot has ended (YES in S3772), the machine information display device K (Kd) resets 1043 the number of starts displayed in the number-of-starts display area 1034 (tr9, S3774). By resetting the number of starts at the end of the big win in this way, the number of starts is displayed as much as possible even during the big win, thereby maximizing the time for the player M to check how many rotations the big win was made. be able to give.
The machine information display device K (Kd) does not display the number of starts on the liquid crystal display screen 891 even if the start signal 1014 is input (S3775).
In the conventional machine information display device, the start signal 1014 is received together with the stop of the special pattern of the pachinko machine Pb, and the number of starts is updated and displayed. However, if the pachinko machine Pb has specs such that the liquid crystal effect display screen 307b or the effect pattern 308b is used to express this, if the number of starts is not updated, it will be known that the player has won a big hit in the middle of the effect. The performance of is also disinterested.
By hiding the number of starts, the machine information display device K (Kd) prevents the timing of the jackpot of the pachinko machine Pb from being known by the number of starts, thereby preventing the performance from being spoiled. The number of starts is displayed according to the performance of the machine.

Next, the machine information display device K (Kd) performs a random lottery by the built-in CPU, and determines the contents to be displayed in the number of starts display area 1034 from the number of starts display area display list 1036 as shown in FIG. (S3776). As shown in FIG. 312, the machine information display device K (Kd) selects from the number of starts display area display table 1036 in the number of starts display area 1034 of the liquid crystal display screen 891 during the period of non-display of the number of starts (1041). Display the "short time" that was displayed. In this manner, the machine information display device K (Kd) displays the game state on the liquid crystal display screen 891, so that the current state of the pachinko machine Pb can be known without displaying the number of starts. In addition to "during time saving", it may be "during variable probability".
In addition to the above, the contents of the number-of-starts display area display table 1036 include "Chance", "Tomorrow we will open at 9:00", "We are preparing ○○ cake as a prize", and "Sunny weather". These displayed contents can be quoted from the above-mentioned advertisement contents information. It is possible to impress the player with the content.

Next, the machine information display device K (Kd) receives the input of the start signal 1014 and stores the number of starts in a built-in storage area in order to finally inform the player M even if the number of starts is not displayed. counting.
Next, the machine information display device K (Kd) repeats the above processing (S3772 to S3779) until the jackpot is reached (NO in S3772) if the machine information display device K (Kd) is in a special prize such as during time saving or probability variation (YES in S3779) .

Further, the machine information display device K (Kd) judges that the jackpot is in progress when the special prize 1 signal 1011 is turned ON (tr10). In addition, when the signal 1012 during the special prize is turned OFF (tr11), it is determined that the time saving or the variable probability is finished and the special prize is finished.
Then, the machine information display device K (Kd) displays the number of starts (S3773) if it is not during the special prize (time reduction or probability change) (NO in S3771, NO in S3779) or during the jackpot (YES in S3772). . In this way, by displaying the number of starts after the big win or after the special prize is finished, the player M can grasp the result of his own game in a satisfied state after enjoying the performance of the game machine. .
It should be noted that the pachinko machine Pb is a type in which the effect ends after the probability change, and in the case of a so-called time saving in which the opening probability of the special symbol 2 start port 304 is improved, the machine information display device K (Kd) starts After hiding the number of times, the number of times of start may be displayed in the number of times of start display area 1034 after the variable probability is finished, and the player M can confirm the remaining number of times of time reduction during the time reduction. The trigger for ending the probability variation may be determined from the special prize signal that does not include time saving.
In addition, the machine information display device K (Kd) displays the number of starts after the number of starts (the number of times that special symbols are fixed) is hidden, after the number of starts reaches the specified number of times of probability variation or time saving, or during the jackpot. A specification may be adopted in which the number of starts is displayed in the area 1034 .

(technical features)
Examples of technical features of the present embodiment are shown in parentheses below, but they are not particularly limited, but merely illustrative, and the effects conceivable from these features will also be described.

<First feature point>
A game hall system used in a game hall where a game machine (for example, mainly a pachinko machine P or a slot machine S) is installed, wherein game information (for example, mainly Out signal, safe signal, jackpot signal and start signal, sales signal, camera ID and imaging time data, etc.) are collected and encrypted by game information analysis means (e.g., mainly hall computer system 90) that analyzes the game information. Game information communication means for transmitting the game information by means of wireless communication means (for example, mainly the first communication (BLT) and second communication (WIFI)) (for example, mainly the transmitter/receiver 94, the machine information display K), wherein the game information communication means includes count data (for example, mainly the number of out balls) indicating the number of game media inserted into the game machine in the game information, and the count data. transmission setting means (for example, mainly processing of S3562 to S3567) for collecting the other game information and setting the game information to be transmitted to the game information analysis means when the count data reaches a predetermined number; Provided data transmission means (for example, mainly the table information display device K) and transmission/reception means (for example, mainly for transmission/reception) that are connected to the data transmission means by the wireless communication means and transmit the game information to the game information analysis means and a device 94).

With the above features, by transmitting data based on the number of game media inserted into the game machine, the conversion of the data is facilitated and introduction to other devices is facilitated. In addition, since the operating status of a gaming machine is often determined by whether or not there is a game medium inserted into the gaming machine, by setting the setting criteria for transmitting the game medium inserted into the gaming machine, the It becomes extremely easy to check the operating status of the machine. The trouble of laying wiring in the island equipment is eliminated, and at the same time, the influence of the noise due to the transportation of the pachinko balls and the radio noise from the pachinko machine P on errors and the risk of electric leakage are reduced. In addition, since the security function is also enhanced, it is possible to deal with eavesdropping and the like. When adding data transmission means, it can be done simply by completing the transmission/reception means and link connection, so there is no need to install wiring.

<Second feature point>
The wireless communication means connects wireless communication from the plurality of data transmission means to the transmission/reception means, and a first communication means (for example, mainly a first communication (BLT)) for transmitting the game information by time division. , a second communication means (e.g., mainly a second communication (WIFI)).
Due to the above features, since the security functions are different between the first communication means and the second communication means, double security is provided, making the system even more difficult to wiretap. In addition, communication is possible without the need to add ports or the like by a time-division method.

<Third Characteristic Point>
The transmission setting means detects that the processing of transmitting the game information has not been performed a predetermined number of times when the count data does not reach a predetermined number, and detects that the count data has not reached the predetermined number. It is characterized by comprising spare transmission means for transmitting the game information from the data transmission means to the transmission/reception means (mainly, for example, the processing of NO in S3562, S3569, S3570, S3563, S3565 and S3566).
Due to the above features, for example, when other game information is generated even though there is no count data, it is abnormal, so it is possible to detect a goto act, an abnormality in the game machine, or an abnormality in communication. becomes.

<Fourth characteristic point>
The transmission setting means detects that the processing of transmitting the game information has not been performed for a predetermined time when the count data has not reached a predetermined number, and detects that the count data has not reached the predetermined number. Even if there is, the preliminary transmission means for transmitting the game information from the data transmission means to the transmission/reception means (for example, mainly by replacing the count number of NO of S3562, S3569, S3570, S3563, S3565 and S3566 with a timer etc. when setting).
Due to the above features, for example, when other game information is generated even though there is no count data, it is abnormal, so it is possible to detect a goto act, an abnormality in the game machine, or an abnormality in communication. becomes.

<Fifth characteristic point>
The first communication means is characterized by comprising frequency hopping means (mainly frequency hopping method, for example) for changing the frequency for transmitting the game information every time.
Since the above features prevent radio wave interference with other frequencies, it is possible to prevent interference with, for example, the WIFI standard of the second communication means.

<Sixth characteristic point>
A network (for example, mainly transmitting/receiving devices 94 (MA) 96 (a, b, c) and machine information display devices K (SL1 to SL6)) is formed by a predetermined number of the data transmission means and the transmission/reception means, and An inter-network transmission means for transmitting the game information between the networks by wirelessly connecting the transmission/reception means between the networks (for example, mainly the transmission/reception device 94 (MA) and the transmission/reception device 96 (MA)). It is characterized by
With the above features, it is possible to transmit the game information at both ends of the island equipment by wireless communication. This reduces the influence of radio noise on errors and the risk of electric leakage.

<Seventh characteristic point>
A predetermined number of the data transmission means and the transmission/reception means form a network (for example, mainly the transmission/reception device 94 (MA), the machine information display device K (SL1 to SL6), and the machine information display device Ka1), and the network Inter-network transmission means for transmitting the game information between the networks by wireless connection between the transmission/reception means and the data transmission means (for example, the table information display device Ka1).
With the above features, there is no need to install a relay device, and game information at both ends of the island facility can be transferred by wireless communication. The influence of the noise from the pachinko machine P and the radio wave noise from the pachinko machine P on the error and the risk of electric leakage are reduced.

<Eighth feature point>
The data transmission means is provided with game information display means (for example, mainly the liquid crystal display 891 of the machine information display device K) for processing the collected game information and displaying it to the player as information of the game machine. characterized by
With the above features, the data transmission means can provide information to the player using the collected data by providing the game information display means, so information can be provided to the player immediately.

<Ninth characteristic point>
A game hall system used in a game hall where game machines (for example, mainly pachinko machines P or slot machines S) are installed. and a plurality of call display means (for example, mainly a top lamp 965) provided near the game machine, wireless communication is connected by encryption means, a call signal is transmitted by the wireless communication, and the call display means and call operation means (for example, mainly a call button unit 962) for lighting.

Due to the above features, since it is provided in the vicinity of the game machine, it is possible for the player to operate the call while sitting. In addition, the trouble of laying wiring in the island facility is eliminated, and at the same time, the influence of noise due to the transportation of pachinko balls and radio noise from the pachinko machine P on errors and electric leakage are reduced.

<Tenth Characteristic Point>
A portable terminal means (for example, mainly a personal portable terminal SM) capable of transmitting the call signal and capable of charging a storage battery held therein, and supplying power for charging the storage battery from the call operation means. connection means (for example, mainly a USB terminal 968); call control means for controlling the call signal from the mobile terminal means via the connection means (for example, mainly the processes of S3601, S3602, S3609 and S3610); characterized by comprising
Due to the above features, the call operation can be performed even while the player is sitting on the chair. In addition, there is no interference with other calling operation means, and it is sufficiently possible to deal with illicit remote operation by mischief from a personal portable terminal that is not connected like radio.

As shown in the above embodiments, the present invention can also be applied to the gaming machines of the present embodiment, such as game arcades and casinos, and facilities that operate similar to the gaming machines.

1...game hall, 2...management area, 3...game area, 5...wireless router (wireless communication means),
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Communication server, 60... Surveillance camera system, 61... Surveillance camera (imaging means),
69... each camera (imaging means), 70... end ball processing device (end ball processing means),
71... Edge ball server, 80... Face authentication server,
90... Hall computer (game information analysis means),
440... Shutter section (conveying means), 600... Captured image,
550... Membership card (storage medium), 551... Guest card (storage medium),
555, 556, 557, 559, 605, 606 ... face image data (feature data),
800... Individual face authentication device (player identification means),
805, 805a, 805b, 805c ... counting units (counting means),
820... individual face authentication server, 860... night monitoring system,
965 ... top lamp (call display means),
1050 ... Game hall information management system (game information management means),
K, Ka, Kb, Kc, Kd .
P... Pachinko machine, S... Slot machine,
PT: a ball lending machine (game medium lending means) as a game machine-related attachment means;
CT: medal lending machine (game medium lending means) as a game machine-related attachment means;
JC... a counter (counting means) as a means attached to a gaming machine, BA... a battery (electricity storage means),
SM... personal mobile terminal, TA... game medium storage tank TA (storage means),
S · Sa... ball detection sensor (storage amount detection means), BR... transport gutter (transport means).

Claims (1)

A game hall system used in a game hall where game machines for playing games are installed,
a game information communication means for collecting at least game information related to a game obtained from the gaming machine and transmitting the game information by wireless communication means in which the game information analysis means for analyzing the game information is encrypted,
The game information communication means is
Count data indicating the number of game media inserted into the game machine in the game information;
Data transmission means provided with transmission setting means for collecting the other game information including the count data and setting the game information to be transmitted to the game information analysis means when the count data reaches a predetermined number. When,
a transmitting/receiving means connected to the data transmitting means and the wireless communication means for transmitting the game information to the game information analyzing means;
and an emergency flag indicating that the call operation means for performing lighting display for calling the employee has been operated,
The master, which transmits and receives data from a plurality of data transmission means, requests the data transmission means for the emergency flag indicating urgent work in the game arcade by simultaneous transmission, and the presence or absence of the emergency flag from the data transmission means. and emergency flag confirmation means for confirming the
The masters are provided at both ends of the island facility,
the master receiving the emergency flag by the emergency flag confirmation means comprises an emergency flag transmission means for transmitting the emergency flag to the other master provided in the island equipment,
A system for amusement arcades , wherein the master, which has received the emergency flag, transmits a signal for the call display means at the end of the island to light up and display in order to call the employee .

Images